MI 020-520

Instruction

January 2014

PC50 Intelligent Field Device Tool
with Advanced DTM Library
Operation Using HART Communications Protocol

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Contents
Figures.................................................................................................................................... ix
Preface................................................................................................................................ xxxi
1. Common Information ....................................................................................................... 1
Configuration Report ................................................................................................................ 1
HART Status ............................................................................................................................ 1
Changing HART Polling Address ............................................................................................. 2
Reference .................................................................................................................................. 3
Activity Log .............................................................................................................................. 4
Scratch Pad ............................................................................................................................... 5
Trending ................................................................................................................................... 5
2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters.............................................................................................. 7
Device Overview Screen ............................................................................................................ 7
Process Variables Screen ............................................................................................................ 8
Device Status Screen ................................................................................................................. 9
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 11
Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 12
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 26
Units Description .................................................................................................................... 27
Model Code Description ......................................................................................................... 28
Store to Device ........................................................................................................................ 28
3. CFT51 Transmitter......................................................................................................... 29
Device Overview Screen .......................................................................................................... 29
Process Variables Screen .......................................................................................................... 30
Device Configuration .............................................................................................................. 31
Device Status .......................................................................................................................... 58
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 61
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 67
4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters ................................................. 71
Device Overview Screen .......................................................................................................... 72
Process Variables Screen .......................................................................................................... 72

iii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Contents

Device Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 73
Diagnostic/Alarm Status Screen .............................................................................................. 74
Input/Output Status Screen .................................................................................................... 75
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 75
Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 76
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 87
5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters ..................................................................... 89
Device Overview Screen .......................................................................................................... 89
Process Variables Screen .......................................................................................................... 90
Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 90
Device Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 98
Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 99
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 101
6. 875PH Analyzer ............................................................................................................ 105
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 106
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 107
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 145
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 146
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 168
7. 876PH Transmitter....................................................................................................... 171
Device Overview Screen ........................................................................................................ 172
Process Variables Screen ........................................................................................................ 173
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 173
HART Status ........................................................................................................................ 198
Device Status Screen ............................................................................................................. 199
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 201
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 206
8. 875EC Analyzer ............................................................................................................ 213
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 214
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 215
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 216
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 253
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 254
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 271

iv

Contents

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter ....................................................................................................... 275
Device Overview Screen ........................................................................................................ 275
Process Variables Screen ........................................................................................................ 276
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 276
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 303
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 305
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 309
10. 875CR Analyzer .......................................................................................................... 315
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 316
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 318
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 320
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 354
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 355
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 377
11. 876CR Transmitter..................................................................................................... 379
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 379
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 380
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 381
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 402
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 405
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 407
12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter ................................................................................... 411
Device Overview Screen ........................................................................................................ 412
Process Variables Screen ........................................................................................................ 412
Device Status Screen ............................................................................................................. 413
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 413
Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 414
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 418
13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter................................................................... 419
Device Overview Screen ........................................................................................................ 420
Process Variables Screen ........................................................................................................ 420
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 421
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 429
HART Status ........................................................................................................................ 430
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 431v

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Contents

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 434
14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter ...................................................................... 437
Device Overview Screen ........................................................................................................ 438
Process Variables Screen ........................................................................................................ 439
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 440
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 446
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 447
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 461
15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters ...................................................................... 463
Create Pre-Configuration File ............................................................................................... 464
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 466
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 468
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 470
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 485
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 486
Application Design Conditions (IMV31 Only) ..................................................................... 506
Test Device Equations ........................................................................................................... 549
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 551
16. IMV30 Transmitter..................................................................................................... 553
Create Pre-Configuration File ............................................................................................... 554
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 555
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 556
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 570
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 572
Test Device Equations ........................................................................................................... 586
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 587
17. RTT15 Transmitter .................................................................................................... 589
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 590
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 591
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 592
Diagnostic Configuration ...................................................................................................... 603
Access .................................................................................................................................... 603
Device Information ............................................................................................................... 605
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 606
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 607
vi

Contents

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 614
18. RTT80 Transmitter .................................................................................................... 617
Device Overview ................................................................................................................... 619
Process Variables ................................................................................................................... 621
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 622
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 652
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 655
Index .................................................................................................................................. 661

vii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

viii

Contents

Figures
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sample HART Status Screen ........................................................................................
Sample HART Change Address Screen ........................................................................
Sample Activity Log Screen ..........................................................................................
Sample Scratch Pad Screen ...........................................................................................
Sample Trending Screen ..............................................................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Overview Screen .......................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Process Variables Screen .......................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Status Screen ............................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter General Setup Screen ...........................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Measurement Units Screen ..................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Totalizers Screen ..................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Process Parameters Screen ....................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Piping Configuration Screen ................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Flowtube Screen ...................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Tuning Screen .....................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Digital Output Screen ..........................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Analog Output Screen .........................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Pulse Output Screens ...........................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Output Alarm Screen ...........................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter HART Screen ......................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Local Display Screen ............................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Information Screen ...................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Self Test Screen ....................................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Override Digital Output Screen ...........................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Override Pulse Output Screen .............................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Units Description Screen .....................................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Model Code Description Screen ..........................
Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Store to Device Screen .........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Overview Screen ..................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ...................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Process Variables Screen (Mass Flow) ..............................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter General Setup Screen .......................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter - Measurement Units .......................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Measurement Units (Pulse Total Units) ...........................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Totalizers Screen ..............................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Totalizers Screen (Pulse Output) .....................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Configuration Screen ...........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter New Password Screen ......................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Fluid Screen .....................................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter 2 Phase Correction Screen ...............................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Alarm Configuration Screen ....................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Total Alarm Configuration Screen ...................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Components Alarm Configuration Screen ..............

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
30
30
31
33
36
37
39
40
43
43
44
45
47
48

ix

MI 020-520 – January 2014

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
x

Figures

Sample CFT51 Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen ........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Screen ..................................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Dynamics Screen .................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Input Screen .......................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Output Screen ....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Information Screen ..............................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Status Screen ........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Diagnostic History Screen ...............................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Value Screen ...................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen ..........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen (2) .....................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen (3) .....................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Restore Screen ................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen ..............................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen (2) .........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen (3) .........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Restore Screen ....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter mA Calibration Screen .....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter mA Restore Screen ...........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Tube Check Screen ..........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Restore Factory Settings Screen ........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Output Screen ....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen ........................................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Configuration Report Screen ...........................................
Sample CFT51 Transmitter Tube Verification Report Screen ......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Overview Screen .................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Status Screen .......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Series Transmitter Diagnostic/Alarm Status Screen ............
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Input/Output Status Screen ............................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Auto Zero Lock Setup Screen .........................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter General Setup Screen ......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen .............................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Totalizers Screen .............................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Rate Range Screen ..........................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Alarm Output Screen ......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Contact Inputs Screen ....................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Analog Output Screen ....................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen .......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Relay Output Screen .......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Auto Zero Lock Screen ...................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Alarm Screen ..................................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Flow Alarms Screen ........................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Totalizer Alarms Screen ..................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter HART Screen .................................................

50
52
54
55
56
56
57
58
59
61
61
62
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
70
72
72
73
74
75
75
76
76
77
78
79
80
80
81
81
82
83
83
84
85

Figures

92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Local Display Screen .......................................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Information Screen .............................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Digital Output) Screen .................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Analog Output) Screen .................
Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Pulse Output) Screen ....................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Overview Screen .........................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Process Variables Screen .........................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter General Setup Screen ..............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Measurement Units Screen .....................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Measurement Units Screen- Mass Flow Units Selected .........................................................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Totalizers Screen ....................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Rate Range Screen ..................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Flow Tube Screen ...................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Screen .....................................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Analog Output Screen ............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Pulse Output Screen ...............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter HART Output Screen ............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Local Display Output Screen ..................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Information Screen .....................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Status Screen ...............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter HART Status Screen ..............................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Manual Zero Screen Page 1 ....................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Manual Zero Screen Page 2 ....................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Restore Factory Settings Options Screen ................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Check Screen .................................................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Test (Analog Output) Screen ........................
Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Test (Pulse Output) Screen ...........................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Device Overview Screen ........................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer General Screen ......................................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Sensor Screen (pH Selection) ................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Sensor Screen (ppm Selection) ..............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (pH Selection) ............................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (ppm Selection) ..........................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (Custom Selection) ....................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto) ................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual) ...........
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen ......................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom Selection) .......
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen ...........................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as On) .................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as Pulse) ...............................
Sample 875PH Analyzer HART Output Screen ...........................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Digital Output Screen ...........................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Single Line) ........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Dual Line) ..........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Scan) ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Hold Screen .................................................................

85
86
87
88
88
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
94
95
96
97
97
98
99
99
100
101
101
102
102
103
106
107
109
110
110
111
112
113
113
114
115
117
118
119
120
121
122
124
125
126
xi

MI 020-520 – January 2014

139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
xii

Figures

Sample 875PH Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen ..........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen ..........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Passcode Access Screen ..........................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 1 .............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 2 .............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 3 .............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 4 .............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen ............................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection) ............
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection) ............
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection) ............
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection) ............
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection) ............
Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 2 Screen ............................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Remote Screen ......................................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection) .........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ...................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection) .........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ...................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Device Information Screen ....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer HART Status Screen .............................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Parameter Calibration Screen ................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Parameter Calibration Screen (Custom Selection) .................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 1 .................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 2 .................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 3 .................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 4 .................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 1 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 2 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 3 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 4 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 5 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 6 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 7 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 8 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 9 .....................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 10 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Solution Calibration Screen ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 1 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 2 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 3 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 4 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 5 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 1 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 2 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 3 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 4 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 5 ............................................

127
128
129
130
130
130
131
131
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
142
143
144
144
146
147
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
152
152
152
153
153
153
154
154
154
155
156
156
156
157
157
158
158
158
159

Figures

187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 6 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 7 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 8 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 9 ............................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1 ........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2 ........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3 ........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4 ........................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 1 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 2 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 3 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 4 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 5 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 6 ...................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 9 ..................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10 ................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer Faults Screen .........................................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer History Screen 1 ...................................................................
Sample 875PH Analyzer History Screen 2 ...................................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Overview Screen (pH) ..........................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Process Variables Screen (pH) ..........................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter General Setup Screen .......................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (pH) ..........................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (PH Measurement Type andOther Electrode Option) ..............................................................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (ISE Concentration) ..................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen mV (ORP) ................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (pH and ORP) ..........................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (pH/pH and ORP) ...............
Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (ISE Concentration
Measurement Type) .....................................................................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Measurement Type ORP) ....
Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto) ..........
Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual) ......
Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Standard) ................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Ammonia) ..............
Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom) .................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Digital Output Screen ......................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5) .......................

159
159
160
160
161
161
161
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
164
165
165
165
165
166
166
166
166
167
168
169
170
172
173
173
174
175
176
177
177
178
179
179
180
180
181
181
182
183
184
185
xiii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
xiv

Figures

Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 6 or 7) ................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen ...........................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line) ......................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Dual Line) ........................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Triple Line) ......................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Auto Hold Output Screen ...............................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Screen ............................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Limit for Coated Reference ............................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Limits for Broken Glass ..................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Passcode Access Screen .....................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Information Screen ..............................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration screen ...................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Status screen ........................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Status Tree Screen ............................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen ......................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters User Selectable Buffers .............................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters User Selectable Custom pH Buffer ..........
Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen ..................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 2 ...............................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 3 ...............................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 4 ...............................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter DAC Trim Screen ............................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Faults Screen ....................................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Faults Suspended State with Time Screen ........................
Sample 876PH Transmitter History Log Screen ..........................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Hold) .................................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Hold Present Values) ..........................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold) ....................................
Sample 876PH Transmitter Firmware Upgrade Screen ................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Device Overview Screen ......................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Process Variables Screen ........................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer General Screen ......................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Sensor Screen ........................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Sensor Screen (Sensor Type as Other) ...................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Screen (Manual Selection) ................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Screen (Auto Selection) ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen ................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen (Auto Selection) ......................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen (Signal Selection) ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen ....................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (% Selection) ..............................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (Custom Selection) .....................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation (Linear Selection) .....................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation (Cusotom Selection) .................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Analog (Failsafe as On) .............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Analog (Failsafe as Pulse) ..........................................

186
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
204
205
205
206
206
207
208
209
209
210
211
214
215
216
218
219
219
219
221
222
223
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
231

Figures

281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Digital ......................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Single Line) ....................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Dual Line) .....................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Scan) ..............................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen ...............................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Daily) ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Weekly) ...............................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Monthly) .............................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Period by Hours) .................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Period by Days) ...................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection) .........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection) .........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Output HART ......................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Autohold ..................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Remote Screen ......................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen ...........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Passcode Access Screen ..........................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen ................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Device Information Screen ....................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer HART Status Screen .............................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Parameters Calibration Screen ...............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 1 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 2 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 3 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 4 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 5 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 6 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 7 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 8 ...................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 1 ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 2 ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 3 ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 4 ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 5 ..................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 1 ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 2 ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 3 ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 4 ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 5 ....................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 1 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 2 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 3 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 4 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 5 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 6 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 7 ............................................

232
233
235
236
237
239
240
241
242
243
244
246
247
247
248
249
249
250
251
252
252
254
255
256
257
257
257
258
258
258
258
259
260
260
261
261
262
262
262
263
263
263
264
264
265
265
266
266
xv

MI 020-520 – January 2014

329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
xvi

Figures

Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 8 ............................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1 ........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2 ........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3 ........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4 ........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 5 ........................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3 .................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6 .................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 9 ..................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10 ................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer Faults Screen .........................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer History Screen 1 ....................................................................
Sample 875EC Analyzer History Screen 2 ....................................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Overview Screen ...................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Process Variables Screen (Measurement) ..........................
Sample 876EC Transmitter General Setup Screen .......................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter General Setup Screen (3 Applications) .............................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (871EC) ....................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (871FT Type) ............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (EP307) .....................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (FT10 Type) ..............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (Other) ......................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications Screen ........................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications Screen (with 2 Applications) ......
Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications - Running Application
Selection Screen (with Auto Selected for Application to Run) ......................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Units % Selection) ...............
Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Units % Selection Conc Range) ................................................................................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Number of Points Selection)
Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Screen (Auto as Temperature Mode) ...........
Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual) .....
Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen .................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Linear) ....................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom) .................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Digital Output Screen ......................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Analog Output Screen ......................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen ...........................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line) .......................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Triple Line) ......................
Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5) .......................

266
267
267
267
268
268
268
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
270
271
271
272
273
275
276
276
277
278
279
279
280
280
281
281
282
283
284
284
285
286
287
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295

Figures

375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 6 or 7) ................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Auto Hold Output Screen ................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Diagnostic Configuration Screen ......................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Diagnostics Configuration ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Information Screen ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration Screen ...................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Status Screen ........................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Status Tree Screen ............................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen ......................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen ..................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 2 ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 3 ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 4 ...............................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter DAC Trim Screen ............................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Faults Screen ....................................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter History Log Screen ...........................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Off) ....................................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold) .....................................
Sample 876EC Transmitter Firmware Upgrade Screen ................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Overview Screen (Single Cell) ..................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Overview Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell) ..........
Sample 875CR Analyzer Process Variables Screen (Single Cell) ...................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Process Variables Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell) ............
Sample 875CR Analyzer General Screen .....................................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer General Screen (Dual Cell) .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Single Mode) ............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Dual Mode) ...............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Redundant Mode) ......................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual) ...........
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto) ................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Dual Cell Configuration) ....................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen ..............................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen (Auto Selection) ....................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen (Signal Selection) ..................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen ............................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen (% Selection) .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen (Custom Selection) .............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Low Conductivity) ......
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Linear) ........................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Ultra Pure) ..................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom) ....................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen ...........................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as On) ...............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as Pulse) .............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer HART Output Screen ...........................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Digital Output Screen .........................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Local Display Screen (Dual Selection) ...................................

297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
306
307
307
308
308
309
310
310
311
312
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
323
324
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
338
339
339
340
341
xvii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
xviii

Figures

Sample 875CR Analyzer Local Display Screen (Scan Selection) .................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Auto Hold Screen ...............................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection) .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ..................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection) .........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection) ....................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Remote Screen ....................................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen ..........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Passcode Access Screen .......................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen ................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Information Screen (Single Cell) ...............................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Information Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell) ........
Sample 875CR Analyzer HART Status Screen .............................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Parameters Calibration Screen .............................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 1 ...............................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 2 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 3 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 4 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 1 ...................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 2 .....................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 3 .....................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 4 .....................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 5 .....................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 1 .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 2 .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 3 .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 4 .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 5 .......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 1 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 2 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 3 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 4 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 5 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 1 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 2 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 3 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 4 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 5 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 6 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 7 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 8 .................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 5 ........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 1 ..........................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 2 ............................................

343
344
345
347
348
348
349
350
351
352
352
354
355
356
357
358
358
358
359
359
360
360
360
361
362
362
362
363
363
364
364
364
365
365
366
366
366
367
367
367
368
368
369
369
369
370
370
371

Figures

471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 3 ............................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 1 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 2 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 3 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 4 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 5 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 6 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 7 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 8 ......................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1 ...............................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6 ................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 9 ..................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10 ................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer Faults Screen .........................................................................
Sample 875CR Analyzer History Screen ......................................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Overview Screen ...................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Process Variables Screen ...................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter General Setup Screen .......................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Cell Configuration Screen ................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Cell Configuration Screen (Nominal Cell Factor) ............
Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications Screen .......................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications - Auto Selection Screen .............
Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications (1) Screen ..................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ..............................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Base Display Scale) ..............
Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Number of Points Selection)
Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Measurement andConcentration) .............................................................................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto) ...........
Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual) ......
Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen .................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Compensation (Custom) Screen .................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Digital Output Screen ......................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen ...........................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line) ......................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Double Line) ....................
Sample 876CR Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5) .......................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Output Auto Hold Screen ...............................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Diagnostics Configuration ...............................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Passcode Access Screen .....................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Information Screen ...............................................

371
371
372
372
372
372
373
373
373
374
374
374
375
375
375
375
376
376
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
382
383
384
385
385
386
386
387
388
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
xix

MI 020-520 – January 2014

518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
xx

Figures

Sample 876CR Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration Screen ..................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter HART Status Screen ........................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Status Tree Screen ............................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen ......................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen ..................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Calibrate Pure H2O Calibration Screen ...........................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Faults Screen ....................................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter History Log Screen ..........................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Loop Test Screen .............................................................
Sample 876CR Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold) ...................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen .................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen .......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter General Setup Screen ......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units Screen .............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Parameters Screen ...............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Output Screen ................................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Alarm Output Screen ......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen ....................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen .............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Loop Test Screen ............................................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen .................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen .................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter General Configuration Screen ........
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units ........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Signals Screen .................................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Cutoff Mode Screen .......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Zero Value Screen ..........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Span Value Screen ..........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Set LRV Screen ..............................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Alarm Screen ..................................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Failure Alarm Screen ......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Analog Output Screen ....................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen ....................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Local Display Screen .......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen .............
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen .......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter HART Status Screen ......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Alarm Status Screen ........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Status Record Screen ......................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Screen ...........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Correct Input LRV Screen ..............
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Correct Input URV Screen .............
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Reset Corrects Screen .....................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter DAC Trim Screen ..........................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen ...............
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Restore Factory Settings screen .......

401
402
403
404
405
405
406
407
408
408
409
412
412
413
414
414
415
416
416
417
417
418
420
420
421
422
422
423
423
423
424
424
425
426
426
427
428
429
430
430
431
431
432
432
432
433
433
434

Figures

566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Self Test Screen ..............................
Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Loop Test Screen ............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen .................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter General Screen ................................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ...........................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Parameters Screen ...............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Output Screen ................................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Alarm Output Screen ......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen ...................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen .............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen .......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Status Screen .......................................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 1 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 2 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 3 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 4 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 5 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 6 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 7 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 8 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 9 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 10 ..................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 11 ..................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 12 ..................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 1 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 2 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 3 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 4 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 5 ....................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 1 ......................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 2 ......................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 3 ......................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9 ..........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 11 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 12 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 1 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 2 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 3 ........

434
435
438
439
440
441
441
443
443
444
445
446
447
448
448
448
449
449
449
450
450
450
451
451
451
452
452
452
452
453
453
453
453
454
454
454
455
455
455
455
456
456
456
456
457
457
457
457
xxi

MI 020-520 – January 2014

614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
xxii

Figures

Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 4 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 5 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 1 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 2 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 3 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 4 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 5 ........
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Time in Service Meter Calibration Screen .......
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Multiple Calibration Screen ............................
Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Override Analog Output Screen .....................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Create Pre-Configuration File ..........................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Create PreConfiguration File ...........................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Device Overview Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Device Overview Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter General Screen .................................................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter General Screen .................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ..............................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ..............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen ..................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen (IMV31 shown) ..........
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Screen .............................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter Electronic Temperature Screen ........................................
Sample IMV25 Transmitter RTD Temperature Screen ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Temperature Screen .........................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Density Screen .................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Screen .....................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Output HART Screen (IMV31 shown) ..............
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Local Display Access Screen (IMV31 shown) .....
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Device Information Screen (IMV31 shown) .......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Device Status Screen (IMV31 shown) ................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 1 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 2 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 3 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 4 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 5 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 6 (IMV31 shown) ..................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 7 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 8 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 9 (IMV31 shown) .................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 1 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 2 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 3 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 4 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 5 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 6 (IMV31 shown) ......

458
458
458
458
459
459
459
460
460
461
464
465
466
467
468
469
471
471
473
474
476
476
477
478
479
479
480
481
481
482
483
484
485
486
486
487
487
487
488
488
488
489
489
490
490
490
491
491

Figures

662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 7 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 8 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 9 (IMV31 shown) ......
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 10 (IMV31 shown) ....
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 1(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 2(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 3(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 4(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 5(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 6(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 1(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 2(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 3(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 4(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 5(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 6(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 7(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 8(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 1 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 2 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 3 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 4 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 5 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 6 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 7 ........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 1 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 2 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 2 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 3 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 4 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 5 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 6 .................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 7 .................

491
492
492
493
493
494
494
494
494
495
495
496
496
497
497
497
498
498
498
498
499
499
499
499
500
500
500
500
501
501
501
501
502

xxiii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722

xxiv

Figures

Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 1(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 2(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 3(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 4(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 5(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 6(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 7(IMV31 shown) ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 1 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 2 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 3 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 4 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 5 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 6 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 7 ...............................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions (Tank Type Selection) ....
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions Open Tank
Selection Screen ...........................................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank Tank Liquid - Water or Steam .....................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids Selection ................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids Selection .....................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank Tank Liquid - Enter Fluid Properties Selection ............................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg ........................................................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Tank Liquid - Water or Steam .....................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Water or Steam ......................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids ...............................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids .................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids .....................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids ......................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (NX-19 Selection) ................

502
502
502
503
503
503
503
504
504
504
505
505
505
505
506
507
508
509
511
512
513
515
516
518
519
520
521
522

Figures

723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank
Dry Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Gr Selection) ...........
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Heating Value Selection) .........
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Detailed Method Selection) ....
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gas - Natural Gas Properties .....................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (S-GERG Heating Value Selection) ......
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixtures Screen ......................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixture Properties Screen .......................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg ..
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Water or Steam .....................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - Water or Steam ...............................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - Water or Steam .............................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Al ChE 250+ Fluids ..............................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids .........................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids .......................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids .....................................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids ...............................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - Standard Fluids .............................................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (NX-19 Selection) ................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Gr Selection) ...........................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Heating Value Selection) .........
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Detailed Method Selection) ....
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gas Properties ...........................................................
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (S-GERG Heating Value Selection) ......
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixtures Screen ......................................................................

523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
542
543
543
544
544

xxv

MI 020-520 – January 2014

747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
xxvi

Figures

Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet
Leg - Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixture Properties Screen .............................................. 545
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Boiler Drum Screen 1 .. 545
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Boiler Drum Screen 2 .. 547
Sample IMV31 Transmitter Test Device Equations Screen .......................................... 549
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Loop Test Analog Output Screen (IMV31 shown) 551
Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Loop Test Digital Output Screen (IMV31 shown) 551
Sensor Range Selection Screen ..................................................................................... 554
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Overview Screen ................................................. 555
Sample IMV30 Transmitter General Screen ................................................................ 556
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen .............................................. 557
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Screen ............................................ 560
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen ................................................. 561
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Screen ............................................ 562
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Electronic Temperature Screen ........................................ 562
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Screen .............................................. 563
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Density Screen ................................................................ 564
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Flow Screen .................................................................... 565
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Display Flow Data Screen ............................................... 566
Sample IMV30 Transmitter HART Output Screen ..................................................... 567
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Local Display Access Screen ............................................ 568
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Information Screen ............................................. 569
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................ 570
Sample IMV30 Transmitter HART Status Screen ....................................................... 571
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 1 ........................................................ 572
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 2 ........................................................ 572
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 3 ........................................................ 573
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 4 ........................................................ 573
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 5 ........................................................ 573
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 6 ........................................................ 574
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 7 ........................................................ 574
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 8 ........................................................ 574
Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 9 ........................................................ 575
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 1 ............................................. 575
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 2 ............................................ 576
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 3 ............................................. 576
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 4 ............................................. 576
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 5 ............................................ 577
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 6 ............................................. 577
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 7 ............................................. 577
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 8 ........................................... 578
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 9 ............................................. 578
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 10 ........................................... 579
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 1 ...................... 579
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 2 ........................ 580
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 3 ........................ 580
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 4 ........................ 580
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 5 ........................ 580

Figures

794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 6 ........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 1 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 2 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 3 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 4 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 5 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 6 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 7 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 8 ............................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 1 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 2 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 3 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 4 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 5 .........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 6 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 7 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 8 ..........................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Test Device Equations Screen ..........................................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Loop Test Analog Output Screen ....................................
Sample IMV30 Transmitter Loop Test Digital Output Screen ....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Overview Screen .................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter General Screen ................................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Screen 1 ...............................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Screen 2 .............................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Enter Value Screen 1 .......................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Enter Value Screen 2 .......................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 1 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 2 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 3 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 4 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 5 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 6 ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Error Values Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Min Max Values Screen ...................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter HART Screen ..................................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Diagnostic Configuration Screen .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Access Screen 1 ................................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Access Screen 2 ................................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Information Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Status Screen ........................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter HART Status Screen .......................................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4 .....................................

581
581
582
582
582
582
583
583
583
584
584
584
584
585
585
585
585
586
587
588
590
591
592
593
593
594
596
597
597
598
598
598
599
599
599
600
601
602
603
603
604
605
606
607
607
607
608
608
xxvii

MI 020-520 – January 2014

842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
xxviiiFigures

Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9 .....................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10 ...................................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9 ...........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10 .........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 11 .........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 12 .........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 13 .........................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Override DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1 .......................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Override DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2 .......................
Sample RTT15 Transmitter Loop Test Screen .............................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Menu Structure Screen ....................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Overview Screen ..................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Process Variables Screen ..................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter General Screen ................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Settings Screen ..................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Settings Screen (Thermocouple Sensor Type) ....
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Trimming Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Trimming Screen (User Trimmings) .................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Linearization Screen (RTD Poly Nickel or
RTD Polynomial Copper Sensor Type) .......................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Linearization Screen (RTD Platinum
Sensor Type) ................................................................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Settings Screen ..................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Settings Screen (Thermocouple Sensor Type) ....
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Trimming Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Trimming Screen (User Trimmings) .................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Linearization Screen (RTD Poly Nickel or
RTD Polynomial Copper Sensor Type) .......................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Linearization Screen (RTD Platinum
Sensor Type) ................................................................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Min Max Values Screen ...................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostic Settings Screen ...............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Access Screen ...................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Temperature Screen .............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Analog Output Screen .....................................................

608
608
609
609
609
609
610
610
610
611
611
611
611
612
612
612
612
613
613
613
614
614
618
619
621
622
624
624
626
627
627
628
629
630
632
633
633
634
635
637
639
641
641
642

Figures

886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sample RTT80 Transmitter Digital Output Screen .....................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter HART Screen ..................................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Local Display Screen .......................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Information Screen ..............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 1 Screen .....................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 2 Screen .....................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 3 Screen .....................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter HART Status Screen .......................................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Actual Screen .............................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Actual Screen (Remedy Information) .........
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Previous Screen ..........................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter Restore Factory Defaults Screen ......................................
Sample RTT80 Transmitter - Loop Test Screen ..........................................................

644
646
648
650
652
653
654
654
655
657
658
659
660

xxix

MI 020-520 – January 2014

xxx

FiguresPreface
This manual explains how to operate, calibrate, and configure devices using a HART
communication protocol with the PC50 Field Device Tool software package.
Chapter 1 provides information that is common to for using the PC50 Field Device Tool withvarious transmitters with HART communication protocol. This is followed by chapters on eachapplicable Foxboro Intelligent Device. These chapters show the product structure to access eachfunction and an explanation of each parameter.
Therefore, to use this manual, refer to Chapter 1 “Common Information” for information that iscommon to all devices and to the appropriate chapter shown in the table below for procedures on
how to communicate with your specific Foxboro Intelligent Device.
This document is organized by product families as shown in the table below.

DeviceFlow Products:
84 Series Vortex Flowmeters
CFT51 Transmitter
IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters
MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters
Analytical Products:
875PH Analyzer
876PH Transmitter
875EC Analyzer
876EC Transmitter
875CR Analyzer
876CR Transmitter
Pressure Products:
I/A Series Pressure Transmitters
I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter
I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter
IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters
IMV30 Transmitter
Temperature Products:
RTT15 Transmitter
RTT80 Transmitter

Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

xxxi

MI 020-520 – January 2014

xxxii

Preface1. Common Information
NOTE

When in offline configuration, the DTM shows a limited number of configuration
parameters. Items such as device status, calibration, troubleshooting, and othersimilar parameters that require a live device are not shown.
If you transition to online mode while the offline screen is still visible, the menu
tree will not be updated with all available parameters. To change from offline toonline configuration, be sure to close the DTM user interface and reopen it to view
all available parameters.

Configuration Report
The Configuration Report shows a summary of the Device, DTM, and relevant configuration
information. You can use the Save and Print buttons at the bottom of the display to save the data
to an html file or print the data respectively.
There are only OK, Cancel and Apply buttons.

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of various parameters is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a
yellow triangle (warning), or a red cross mark (error). On most DTMs, if Configuration
Changed does not show a green checkmark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset Configuration
Changed Flag button on the lower left of the screen.
NOTE

On some devices, only field device status is shown.

1

MI 020-520 – January 2014

1. Common Information

Figure 1. Sample HART Status Screen

Changing HART Polling Address
To change the HART Polling Address, you must change the address in both the device and theDTM. To do this follow the procedure below.
1. Change the device address via the HART Output Screen of your device in Setup.
2. Disconnect the Communications and Device DTMs.
3. Right-click on the HART communications DTM and go to Additional Functions
to Change DTM Address.
4. Double-click on the old address. A dialog box appears as shown in Figure 2.

2

1. Common Information

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 2. Sample HART Change Address Screen
5. Change the address in the dialog box. Click OK.
6. Connect the device and load the settings from the device.

Reference
This display shows a list of Online Documentation related to the device, Useful Links torelated information, and Customer Service phone, fax, email, and website information.

3

MI 020-520 – January 2014

1. Common Information

Activity Log
The Activity Log records any changes made to the device. The Clear Log button is used to clear
the log and the Export Log button to create an Excel file that you can save for future reference.
NOTE

The information is stored in the DTM, not in the device.

Figure 3. Sample Activity Log Screen

41. Common Information

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Scratch Pad
The Scratch pad provides a place for the user to record any type of information including website
links (such as www.invensys.com), file links (such as “file: c:\readme.doc”), and mail links (such as
mailto:john.doe@invensys.com). These links can be activated by clicking on them.

Figure 4. Sample Scratch Pad Screen

Trending
The Trending feature enables you to analyze trends in your measurements. You cansimultaneously view any two of the available measurements - PV (flow rate), mA (flow rate), andPulse Rate as shown in Figure 5. You can change the range of the left and right Y axis to suit yourneeds and the data update frequency. Time in hours, minutes, and seconds is on the horizontal
axes. You can also scroll all three axes with the arrows on the display or by positioning your cursor
on the range numbers and dragging it in the desired direction.
To start recording, click Start Recording. The legend on this button changes to Stop
Recording. Clicking Stop Recording stops recording and changes the legend back to Start
Recording. Clear clears the measurement display. Export creates an Excel file that you can savefor future reference.
5

MI 020-520 – January 2014

1. Common Information

NOTE

The trend data is temporarily stored in the DTM, not in the device.

Figure 5. Sample Trending Screen62. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using the PC50 Field Device Tool with
84 Series Vortex Flowmeters with HART communication protocol. Additional information about
these transmitters and HART communication is contained in the following documents.


MI 019-202

84F-T, 84F-U, 84W-T, and 84W-U Installation, Configuration,
Troubleshooting and MaintenanceMI 019-205

84S-T and 84S-U Installation, Configuration, Troubleshooting
and MaintenanceMI 019-211

84F-L, 84F-M, 84W-L, and 84W-M Installation, Configuration,
Troubleshooting and MaintenanceMI 019-214

84S-L and 84S-M Installation, Configuration, Troubleshooting
and MaintenanceDevice Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, current PV, andTotals data.

Figure 6. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Overview Screen7MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen provides the PV and totals data that was displayed on the Device
Overview screen plus additional measurement and device information.

Figure 7. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Process Variables Screen8

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status Screen
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. In the Measurement Statussection of the screen, the status of various parameters is recognized by the use of a green
checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error). The current value of theseparameters is also displayed.
In the Detail Status section of the screen, the Device Error Status and Device Warning Status isshown. The Error Reason may be given as a code. An explanation of the codes is given in Table 1.
NOTE

Error Reason indicates the last error reason code. It is possible that the condition
has since been cleared.

Figure 8. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Status Screen
Table 1. Diagnostic Error Codes
Hex Reason CodeError Message

0000
0200
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
0A00
0Bxx where xx is 00 to FF
0C00
0CFF

No Error
Math Error
Stack Underflow
Stack Overflow
MSTAT Mismatch
MCU Register Error
Bad Vector
RAM Test Failure
ROM CRC Error
Bad Parameter at 01xx 0Bxx
EEPROM Initialization Needed
SI EEPROM Blank
9

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Table 1. Diagnostic Error Codes
Hex Reason Code (Continued)
0Cxx where xx is 01 to FE
0D06
0D08
0Dxx where xx is 00 to FF but not
06 or 08
0Exx
0F00
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
1A00
1B00
1C00
1Dxx where xx is not one of thevalues below
1D10
1D20
1D30
1D40
1D50
1D60
1D70
1D80
1D90
1DA0
1DB0
1E00
1F00
2000
21xx where xx is 00 to FF

10

Error Message (Continued)
Bad Parameter at 00xx 0Cxx
Bad EE Sensor User
Bad EE MAU Factory
Bad EE at 0Dxx
EE Configuration With Error
S4 > URL
Sensor No Input
S1 > URL
S3 > URL
S3 < LRLSPI State Error
SPI Read Block
S5 < LRL
S2 > URL
S2 < LRL
S2 = 0S1 < LRL
State Machine Error
MCU EE Write Error
Sensor Initialization Error
A/D Calibration SPI Failure
Sensor Start SPI Bad
Sensor Start SPI Bad
Sensor Start SPI Bad
Display Interrupts SPI Bad
Loss of A/D Interrupts
One A/D Interrupts Loss
Data Process Hung
A/D Not Done With Calibration
S1 Current Low
S1 Current High
Sensor Error
Unintended Reset
Unknown Display
MIT Mismatch 21xx = DIR

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Table 1. Diagnostic Error Codes
Hex Reason Code (Continued)
22xx where xx is 00 to FF
23xx where xx is 00 to FF
24xx where xx is 00 to FF
25xx where xx is 00 to FF
26xx where xx is 00 to FF
27xx where xx is 00 to FF
28xx where xx is 00 to FF
2Axx where xx is 00 to FF
2Fxx where xx is 00 to FF
30xx where xx is 00 to FF
31xx where xx is 00 to FF
32xx where xx is 00 to FF
33xx where xx is 00 to FF
34xx where xx is 00 to FF
35xx where xx is 00 to FF
3600
3700
38xx where xx is 00 to FF

Error Message (Continued)
Hot Connect Detected 22xx = ImageRAM Database Bad CRC
MCU EE Write Error
Bad DIR Detected
Invalid Communications Register
Communications Invalid Reason CodeDisplay Hot Connect Detected
Offline/Load Command Received
Re-initialization Command Received
Unexpected Interface Manager Return CodeCommunications Invalid Task Request
Communications Invalid Interrupt Seen
Communications Invalid Receive State
Communications Invalid Transmit State
Communications Write Never Ended
Display Timeout
ASIC Error
Initialization Issue eReturn = xx

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter (except
low power versions) using the PC50 Field Device Tool:DAC Trim
This procedure is used to trim the 4 mA (zero) and 20 mA (span) output values of theflowmeter to match the output of a plant standard measurement device. A suitablereference, like a digital multimeter, is used to calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA points
respectively.



Scaled DAC Trim
This procedure is the same as the DAC Trim procedure described above except thatthe 4 and 20 mA points are scaled to whatever units are required by the readout or
control devices. For example, if the readout device is a voltmeter, across a 250 Ω
resistor, the 4 and 20 mA points would correspond to 1 and 5 volts respectively.

11

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Setup
Each flowmeter is shipped from the factory with an operating configuration database. However,the flowmeter will not provide an accurate measurement if the configuration does not fit yourapplication. Be sure to check the configuration of the flowmeter prior to start-up.
If the user information is not supplied with the purchase order, the flowmeter is shipped with thefollowing defaults:
Table 2. Default Database When User Information Not Supplied
Item

MetricFluid TypeType of Flow
Measurement Units
Flowing Temperature
Flowing Density
Absolute Viscosity
Upper Range Value

EnglishLiquid (water)
Liquid (water)
VolumeVolume3m /sgal/min
20C
68°F
3
998.21 kg/m
62.316 lb/ft3
1.002 cP
1.002 cP
Upper Range Limit for Upper Range Limit for
Flowmeter Size
Flowmeter Size

These defaults are not recommended for general operation. If no other process information isavailable, entering Liquid, Gas, or Steam as the Fluid in the General Setup screen establishes
default data bases as shown in Tables 3, 4, or 5 respectively.
Table 3. Default Database for Liquid
Parameter

MetricFluid TypeType of Flow
Measurement Units
Flowing Temperature
Flowing Density
Absolute Viscosity
Upper Range Value

EnglishLiquid (water)
Liquid (water)
Same as present configuration
Same as present configuration
20°C
68°F
3
998.21 kg/m
62.316 lb/ft3
1.002 cP
1.002 cP
Upper Range Limit for Upper Range Limit for
Flowmeter Size
Flowmeter Size

Table 4. Default Database for Gas
Parameter
Fluid TypeType of Flow
Measurement Units
Flowing Temperature
12

MetricEnglishGas (air)Gas (air)Same as present configuration
Same as present configuration*
20°C
68°F

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Table 4. Default Database for Gas (Continued)
Parameter
Flowing Density
Absolute Viscosity
Upper Range Value

MetricEnglish9.546 kg/m3
0.596 lb/ft3
0.0185 cP
0.0185 cP
Upper Range Limit for Upper Range Limit for
Flowmeter Size
Flowmeter Size

*Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable
to gas.

Table 5. Default Database for Steam
Parameter
Fluid TypeType of Flow
Measurement Units
Flowing Temperature
Flowing Density
Absolute Viscosity
Upper Range Value

MetricEnglish

Steam
Steam
Same as present configuration
Same as present configuration*
178.3°C
352.9°F
3
4.966 kg/m
0.310 lb/ft3
0.015 cP
0.015 cP
Upper Range Limit for Upper Range Limit for
Flowmeter Size
Flowmeter Size

*Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable
to steam.

Setup is accomplished using your PC50 Field Device Tool via several screens. These screens aredescribed below.

13

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

General Setup Screen

Figure 9. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter General Setup Screen

14

Field

Entry

Model Code
Fluid
K Factor
PV Map
PV URVPV USLPV Minimum Span
PV Damping
Tag

Enter the Model Code found on the flowmeter data plate.
Select Liquid, Gas, or Steam.
Enter the K Factor found on the flowmeter data plate.
Select Volume, Base Volume, Mass, or Velocity.
Enter the Upper Range Value (must be the PV USL shown).
Shows the Upper Sensor Limit of the device.
Shows the Minimum Span of the device.
Select the damping time between 0 and 32 seconds.
Enter maximum of 8 characters. Optional, used for reference only.

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units Screen

Figure 10. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Measurement Units Screen
Field
PV Units
K Factor Units
Temperature Units
Density Units
Viscosity Units
Net Totalizer UnitsGrand Totalizer Units
Pulse Total Units

Entry
Select the PV Units from the list presented.
Select p/l or p/ft3.
Select C (Celcius), K (Kelvin), F (Fahrenheit), or R (Rankine).
Select lb/ft3, lb/yd3, LT/yd3, ST/yd3, lb/gal, kg/l, Custom.
Select cPoise or PaSec.
Select the Net Totalizer Unit from the list presented.
Select the Grand Totalizer Unit from the list presented.
Select the Pulse Totalizer Unit from the list presented.

15

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Totalizers Screen

Figure 11. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Totalizers Screen
Field
Net Totalizer
Value
Map
State
Show on Local Display
Grand Totalizer
Value
Map
State
Show on Local Display
Pulse Totalizer
State

Entry
Shows the net totalizer value.
Select Volume, Base Volume, or Mass.
Select On or Paused.
Check to show the value on the local display.
Shows the grand totalizer value.
Select Volume, Base Volume, or Mass.
Select On or Paused.
Check to show the value on the local display.
Select On or Paused.

Each of the totalizers can be cleared by pressing the applicable Clear Totalizer button.

16

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Process Parameters Screen

Figure 12. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Process Parameters Screen
Field
Fluid
Fluid Name
Process Temperature
Process Density
Base Density
Process Viscosity

Entry
Select Liquid, Gas, or Steam.
Enter the Fluid Name.
Enter the Process Temperature in the units shown.
Enter the Process Density in the units shown.
Enter the Base Density in the units shown.
Enter the Process Viscosity in the units shown.

17

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Piping Configuration Screen

Figure 13. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Piping Configuration Screen
Field

Entry

Mating Pipe
Piping Configuration

Select the Mating Pipe bore from the list presented.
Select the Piping Configuration from the list presented. An illustrationof each configuration is shown as you highlight it.
The Upstream Distance to the first upstream disturbance in pipe
diameters.
Enter the Custom K Factor (with sign in percent).

Upstream Distance
Custom K Factor Bias18

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Flowtube Screen

Figure 14. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Flowtube Screen
Field

Entry

Flowtube
Model CodeEnter the Model Number of the flowmeter.
K Factor
Enter the K Factor in the units shown.
Serial NumberEnter the Serial Number of the flowmeter.
Special (for customized flowtubes only)
Tube DiameterEnter the custom flowtube diameter in meters.
Tube AlphaEnter the thermal coefficient of expansion (alpha) in mm/mm/°K.
LFCI Adjustment
Enter the low flow cut-in user factor.
Factor19

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Tuning Screen

Figure 15. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Tuning Screen
Field
TuningReynolds Correction
Pulse Add/Drop
LFCI (Low Flow Cut-In)
LFCI
LFCI Index
Auto LFCI
Start

Entry
Check to turn Reynolds Correction feature on.
Check to turn Pulse Add/Drop feature on.
Shows the LFCI value.
Shows the LFCI Index number.
Press Start button to perform Auto LFCI.
NOTEThis must be done while there is no flow in themeter.

Digital Output Screen
In Primary Variable Map, select the PV to be mapped to Volume, Base Volume, Mass or Velocity.

Figure 16. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Digital Output Screen20

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Analog Output Screen

Figure 17. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Analog Output Screen
Field
AO/PV Map
AO/PV LRV
AO/PV URV

Entry
Shows whether the PV is mapped to Volume Flow, Mass Flow,
BVolume Flow, or Velocity.
Shows the AO/PV LRV (Analog Output / Primary Variable Low
Range Value).
Shows the AO/PV URV (Analog Output / Primary Variable Upper
Range Value).

21

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Pulse Output Screen

Figure 18. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Pulse Output Screens
Field
Pulse Mode
PO/PV Map
PO/PV LRV(a)PO/PV URV(a)Maximum Frequency(a)Pulse Width(b)Pulse Resolution(b)Maximum Flow Rate(b)(c)(a) Only when Pulse Mode = Rate(b) Only when Pulse Mode = Total

22

Entry
Select the pulse mode as Off, Raw, Rate, or Total.
Shows whether the PV is mapped to Volume Flow, Mass Flow,
BVolume Flow, or Velocity.
Shows the PO/PV LRV.
Shows the PO/PV URV.
Select the upper frequency end point corresponding to the highest
frequency generated as 10, 100, or 1000 Hz.
Select the pulse width as 0.5, 5, or 50 ms.
Check units per pulse or pulses per unit. Enter the value.
Shows the maximum flow rate.

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Alarm Screen
In this parameter, select Fail Low or Fail High for output to go fully downscale or fully upscale in
the event of a failure.

Figure 19. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Output Alarm Screen

HART Screen

Figure 20. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter HART Screen
Field
Polling Address
Number of Request Preambles

Entry
Select an address between 0 and 15. A nonzero number applies tomultidrop applications.
Select the number of preambles, between 3 and 20, to be sent in a
response message from the flowmeter to the host.

23

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Local Display Screen
This configuration affects the display local to the transmitter.

Figure 21. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Local Display Screen
Field
Show Primary Variable
Primary Variable Format
Show Net Totalizer
Net Totalizer Format
Show Grand Totalizer
Grand Totalizer Format
Primary Display
Display Cycle

24

Entry
Check to show the Primary Variable Measurement on thelocal display.
Select the decimal point placement of the Primary Variablemeasurement.
Check to show the net Totalizer Measurement on the local
display.
Select the decimal point placement of the Net Totalizer
measurement.
Check to show the Grand Totalizer Measurement on thelocal display.
Select the decimal point placement of the Grand Totalizer
measurement.
Select the first measurement to be displayed.
Select whether the measurements to be displayed are scanned
Automatically or Manually.

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Information Screen

Figure 22. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Software Subrevision
Hardware Revision

Entry
Shows the manufacturer as Foxboro.
Enter the Tag (8 characters maximum).
Enter the Descriptor (16 characters maximum).
Enter the Message (32 characters maximum).
Enter the date of the last calibration (mm/dd/yyyy).
Shows the Universal command set revision level.
Shows the software version of the flowmeter.
Shows the software revision level.
Shows the software subrevision level.
Shows the flowmeter hardware revision level.

25

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Troubleshooting
Self Test
In the Troubleshooting parameter, press the Start Self Test button to perform a flowmeter self
test.

Figure 23. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Self Test Screen

Loop Test
The loop test is a procedure to use the transmitter as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop. There are separate screens to override the digital and pulse outputs.

Figure 24. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Override Digital Output Screen
Field

Entry

Digital Output
Net Total
Grand Total
Network Frequency
Measurement to Override

Shows the digital output.
Shows the net total.
Shows the grand total.
Shows the network frequency.
Select the measurement to override (PV, Net Total, Grand
Total, Network Frequency).
Enter the value with which you wish to override the output.
Select or clear this check box to activate/end the override of
the measurement.

Override Digital Value
Override Measurement26

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 25. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Override Pulse Output Screen
Field
Pulse Output
Override Pulse Value
Override Measurement

Entry
Shows the digital output.
Enter the value with which you wish to override the output.
Select or clear this check box to activate/end the override of
the measurement.

Units Description
Under the Reference heading, the Units Description parameter gives a list of the unit
abbreviations and their explanation.

Figure 26. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Units Description Screen27

MI 020-520 – January 2014

2. 84 Series Vortex Flowmeters

Model Code Description
Under the Reference heading, the Model Code Description parameter gives an explanation of the
product model code.

Figure 27. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Model Code Description Screen

Store to Device! CAUTION
Before storing your changes, decide whether you want to store any changes you may
have made to the Model Code, K Factor, and Tube Serial Number. Changes in theseparameters can change important factory set parameters or other highly device
dependent parameters.
1. Select one or more of the parameters listed if you wish to change them.
2. Click OK to store all parameters except any of the unselected ones to the device.

Figure 28. Sample 84 Series Vortex Flowmeter Store to Device Screen28

3. CFT51 TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using CFT51 Transmitter with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about these transmitters with HART
communication is contained in the following document.


MI 019-140 I/A Series Digital Coriolis Mass Flow Transmitter With HART and
MODBUS Communication Protocols Model CFT51 - Installation, Startup,
Configuration, and MaintenanceDevice Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, Measurements(PV, SV, TV, and QV), and Totals and Analog Output.

Figure 29. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Overview Screen29

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables 1 screen displays the Process Variable and totalizer instantaneous values. It
continuously refreshes the values to match with local display.

Figure 30. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Process Variables Screen
Process Variables 2 screen displays the mass flow and volume flow values.

Figure 31. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Process Variables Screen (Mass Flow)30

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Configuration
General Setup Screen
The General screen shows the Access and Information about the Flow, Density constants andFlow tube Information.

Figure 32. Sample CFT51 Transmitter General Setup Screen
Field
GeneralFlow Tube Size andMaterial

K BiasFlow Direction

Low Flow Cutoff
Low Flow Cutoff
Value
Density Limit

Entry
Select the Flow Tube Size and Material from the drop-down menu.
Choose from CFS10-02S, CFS10-02H, CFS10-03S, CFS10-03H,
CFS10-03C, CFS10-05S, CFS10-05H, CFS10-05C, CFS10-08S,
CFS10-08C, CFS10-10S, CFS10-10H, CFS10-10C, CFS10-15S,
CFS10-15C, CFS10-20S, CFS10-20C, CFS20-15H, CFS20-30S,
and CFS20-30C.
Enter the K Bias.
Select the Flow Direction from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Bidirectional Positive, Bidirectional Negative, Unidirectional Positive,
and Unidirectional Negative.
Select the Low Flow Cutoff from the drop-down menu.
If you select the Low Flow Cutoff as On, enter the Low Flow Cutoff
Value.
Enter the Density Limit.

31

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Pressure
Compensation
Static Pressure
Alarm Acknowledge

Select the Pressure Compensation from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Disable, Enable External Pressure, and Unable Internal Pressure.
Enter the Static Pressure.
Select the Alarm Acknowledge from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Automatic or Manual.
Select the Diagnostic Acknowledge from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Automatic or Manual.

Diagnostic
Acknowledge
Flow Constants
Flow Constants 2
Density Constants
Density Constant 2
Density Constant 432

3. CFT51 TransmitterEnter the Flow Constant.
Enter the Density Constant.
Enter the Density Constant.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen is where you configure the units for each process parameter in thedevice. You can configure units for flow, density temperature, concentration and totalizers.

Figure 33. Sample CFT51 Transmitter - Measurement Units33

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Mass Flow Unit

Volume Flow Unit

Density Unit

Temperature Unit
Concentration Unit
Total 1 Unit

Total 2 Unit

Total 3 Unit

Total 4 Unit

Mass Flow Comp A
Unit

Mass Flow Comp B
Unit

34

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Select the Mass Flow Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose fromg/s, g/min, g/h, g/d, kg/s, kg/min, kg/h, kg/d, lb/s, lb/min, lb/h, lb/d,oz/s, oz/min, oz/h, oz/d, STon/s, STon/min, STon/h, STon/d,
MetTon/min, MetTon/h, MetTon/d, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Volume Flow Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose fromL/s, L/min, L/h, L/d, gal/s, gal/min, gal/h, gal/d, Impgal/s,
Impgal/min, Impgal/h, Impgal/d, Cum/s, Cum/min, Cum/h, Cum/d,Cuft/s, Cuft/min, Cuft/h, Cuft/d, bbl/s, bbl/min, bbl/h, bbl/d, andCustom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Density Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from
SGU, kg/Cum, kg/L, lb/gal, lb/Cuft, lb/Cuin, g/mL, g/Cucm, g/l,
STon/Cuyd, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Temperature Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose fromdegF and degC.
Select the Concentration Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose
from % by wt, degBrix, degBaum hv, and % by vol.
Select the Total 1 Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from g, kg,
MetTon, lb, STon, ounce, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Total 2 Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from gal,
L, Impgal, bbl, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Total 3 Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from g, kg,
MetTon, lb, STon, ounce, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Total 4 Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from g, kg,
MetTon, lb, STon, ounce, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Mass Flow Comp A Unit from the drop-down menu.
Choose from g/s, g/min, g/h, g/d, kg/s, kg/min, kg/h, kg/d, lb/s,
lb/min, lb/h, lb/d, oz/s, oz/min, oz/h, oz/d, STon/s, STon/min,STon/h, STon/d, MetTon/min, MetTon/h, MetTon/d, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.
Select the Mass Flow Comp B Unit from the drop-down menu.
Choose from g/s, g/min, g/h, g/d, kg/s, kg/min, kg/h, kg/d, lb/s,
lb/min, lb/h, lb/d, oz/s, oz/min, oz/h, oz/d, STon/s, STon/min,STon/h, STon/d, MetTon/min, MetTon/h, MetTon/d, and Custom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, Offset, and Slope.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Volume Flow Comp A
Unit

Select the Volume Flow Comp A from the drop-down menu. Choose
from L/s, L/min, L/h, L/d, gal/s, gal/min, gal/h, gal/d, Impgal/s,
Impgal/min, Impgal/h, Impgal/d, Cum/s, Cum/min, Cum/h, Cum/d,Cuft/s, Cuft/min, Cuft/h, Cuft/d, bbl/s, bbl/min, bbl/h, bbl/d, andCustom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, offset, and Slope.
Select the Volume Flow Comp B from the drop-down menu. Choose
from L/s, L/min, L/h, L/d, gal/s, gal/min, gal/h, gal/d, Impgal/s,
Impgal/min, Impgal/h, Impgal/d, Cum/s, Cum/min, Cum/h, Cum/d,Cuft/s, Cuft/min, Cuft/h, Cuft/d, bbl/s, bbl/min, bbl/h, bbl/d, andCustom.
If you select Custom, enter the Label, offset, and Slope.
Select the Pressure Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from psi,bar, and kPa.

Volume Flow Comp B
Unit

Pressure Unit

If you select Total as Pulse Output Mode, the pulse total units are available as shown in Figure 34.

35

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Figure 34. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Measurement Units (Pulse Total Units)36

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Totalizers
The Totalizers screen is where you configure the Totalizers Map, Direction, Protection, and Stateof Totals.

Figure 35. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Totalizers Screen
Field
Total 1Map

Direction
Protection
State

Entry
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, andVolume Flow B.
Select the Direction from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Forward, Reverse, and Bidirection.
Select the Protection from the drop-down menu. Choose from batch
and Grand.
Select the State from the drop-down menu. Choose from Yes and No.
37

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Clear Totalizer
Total 2Map

Direction
Protection
State
Clear Totalizer
Total 3Map

Direction
Protection
State
Clear Totalizer
Total 4Map

Direction
Protection
State
Clear Totalizer

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Click Clear Totalizer to clear the totalizer 1 value.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, andVolume Flow B.
Select the Direction from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Forward, Reverse, and Bidirection.
Select the Protection from the drop-down menu. Choose from batch
and Grand.
Select the State from the drop-down menu. Choose from Yes and No.
Click Clear Totalizer to clear the totalizer 2 value.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, andVolume Flow B.
Select the Direction from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Forward, Reverse, and Bidirection.
Select the Protection from the drop-down menu. Choose from batch
and Grand.
Select the State from the drop-down menu. Choose from Yes and No.
Click Clear Totalizer to clear the totalizer 3 value.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, andVolume Flow B.
Select the Direction from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Forward, Reverse, and Bidirection.
Select the Protection from the drop-down menu. Choose from batch
and Grand.
Select the State from the drop-down menu. Choose from Yes and No.
Click Clear Totalizer to clear the totalizer 4 value.

If you select Pulse Output Mode as Total, the pulse totalizer options are available for
configuration as shown in Figure 36.

38

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 36. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Totalizers Screen (Pulse Output)39

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Display Configuration
The Display Configuration screen is where you configure the display pages and format of value
display on local display.

Figure 37. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Configuration Screen
Field
Display
Mass Flow
Volume Flow
Density
Temperature
Concentration
Mass Flow A
Mass Flow B
Volume Flow A
Volume Flow B

40

Entry
Select Mass Flow to display the value on the front panel.
Select Volume Flow to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Density to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Temperature to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Concentration to display the value on the front panel.
Select Mass Flow A to display the value on the front panel.
Select Mass Flow B to display the value on the front panel.
Select Volume Flow A to display the value on the front panel.
Select Volume Flow B to display the value on the front panel.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Field
Total 1
Total 2
Total 3
Total 4
Cycle
Default Display

Display Damping
Alarm Blink
Diagnostic Blink
FormatMass Flow

Volume Flow

Density

Temperature

Total 1

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the Total 1 to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Total 2 to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Total 3 to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Total 4 to display the value on the front panel.
Select the Cycle from the drop-down menu. Choose from Manual andAutomatic.
Select the Default Display from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Mass Flow, Volume Flow, Density, Concentration, Temperature, Mass
Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, Volume Flow B, Total 1, Total
2, Total 3, and Total 4.
Enter the Display Damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Blink from the drop-down menu. Choose from On
and Off.
Select the Diagnostic Blink from the drop-down menu. Choose fromOn and Off.
Select the Mass Flow from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select the Volume Flow from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select the Density from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select the Temperature from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Total 1 from the drop-down menu. Choose from XXXXXXX,XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, and X.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.

41

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Total 2

Total 3

Total 4

Concentration

Mass Flow A

Mass Flow B

Volume Flow A

Volume Flow B

42

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Select Total 2 from the drop-down menu. Choose from XXXXXXX,XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, and X.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Total 3 from the drop-down menu. Choose from XXXXXXX,XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, and X.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Total 4 from the drop-down menu. Choose from XXXXXXX,XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, and X.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Concentration from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Mass Flow A from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Mass Flow A from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Volume Flow A from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.
Select Volume Flow A from the drop-down menu. Choose fromXXXXXXX, XXXXX.X, XXXX.XX, XXX.XXX, XX.XXXX, andX.XXXXX.
Select the format in which the device has to display the measurement
value.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

New Password
The New Password screen is where you can change the password based on the access level.

Figure 38. Sample CFT51 Transmitter New Password Screen
Field

Entry

Access Level

Select the Access Level from the drop-down menu. Choose from Low
and High.
Enter the old password.
Enter the new password.

Old Password
New Password

Fluid
The Fluid screen is where you configure the Fluid Components like Component Name, Density,
Density Change Per Degree, and Reference Temperature.

Figure 39. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Fluid Screen
Field
Fluid Component A
Component Name
DensityDensity Change Per
DegreeReference Temperature

Entry
Enter the first Component Name.
Enter the Density.
Enter the Density Change Per Degree.
Enter the Reference Temperature.

43

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Field

Entry

Fluid Component B
Component Name
DensityDensity Change Per
DegreeReference TemperatureEnter the second Component Name.
Enter the Density.
Enter the Density Change Per Degree.
Enter the Reference Temperature.

2 Phase Correction
The 2 Phase Correction screen is where you configure the aggregate of the gas and liquid in theflow tube.

Figure 40. Sample CFT51 Transmitter 2 Phase Correction Screen
Field
Two Phase Compensation
2 Phase Correction
Tube Orientation
DensityDensity Change Per Degree
Reference Temperature
44

Entry
Select the 2 Phase Correction from the drop-down menu. Selectfrom On and Off.
Select the Tube Orientation from the drop-down menu. Selectfrom Vertical and Horizontal.
Enter the Density.
Enter the Density Change Per Degree
Enter the Reference Temperature.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Flow Alarm Configuration
The Flow Alarm Configuration screen is where you set the Mass, Volume, Concentration,
Density, and Temperature Alarms.

Figure 41. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Alarm Configuration Screen
Field
Mass Flow Alarm
Alarm Enable
High Setpoint
Alarm High Deadband
Alarm Minimum
Alarm Low Deadband

Entry
Select the Alarm Enable from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,Low, High, and Both.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Enter the Alarm Minimum.
Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.

45

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Alarm Output
Volume Flow Alarm
Alarm Enable
High Setpoint
Alarm High Deadband
Alarm Minimum
Alarm Low Deadband
Alarm Output
Concentration Alarm
Alarm Enable
High Setpoint
Alarm High Deadband
Alarm Minimum
Alarm Low Deadband
Alarm Output
Density Alarm
Alarm Enable
High Setpoint
Alarm High Deadband
Alarm Minimum
Alarm Low Deadband
Alarm Output
Temperature Alarm
Alarm Enable
High Setpoint
Alarm High Deadband
Alarm Minimum
Alarm Low Deadband
Alarm Output

46

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,Low, High, and Both.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Enter the Alarm Minimum.
Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,Low, High, and Both.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Enter the Alarm Minimum.
Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,Low, High, and Both.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Enter the Alarm Minimum.
Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,Low, High, and Both.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Enter the Alarm Minimum.
Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Totals Alarm Configuration
The Totals Alarm Configuration screen is where you set the alarms, set point, and type of alarm.

Figure 42. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Total Alarm Configuration Screen
Field
Total 1
Alarm Enable HighHigh Setpoint
Alarm Output
Total 2
Alarm Enable HighHigh Setpoint
Alarm Output
Total 3
Alarm Enable HighHigh Setpoint
Alarm Output
Total 4
Alarm Enable HighHigh Setpoint
Alarm Output

Entry
Select the Alarm Enable High from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off and On.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable High from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off and On.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable High from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off and On.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
Select the Alarm Enable High from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off and On.
Enter the High Setpoint.
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
47

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Flow Components Alarm Configuration
The Flow Components Alarm Configuration screen is where you configure alarms for Mass andVolume Flow Components.

Figure 43. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Components Alarm Configuration Screen
Field

Entry

Mass Flow Component A
Alarm Enable
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
High Setpoint
Enter the High Setpoint.
Alarm High Deadband Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Alarm MinimumEnter the Alarm Minimum.
Alarm Low Deadband Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Alarm Output
Enter the Alarm Output.
Mass Flow Component B
Alarm Enable
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
High Setpoint
Enter the High Setpoint.
Alarm High Deadband Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Alarm MinimumEnter the Alarm Minimum.
Alarm Low Deadband Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Alarm Output
Enter the Alarm Output.
48

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Mass Flow Component C
Alarm Enable
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
High Setpoint
Enter the High Setpoint.
Alarm High Deadband Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Alarm MinimumEnter the Alarm Minimum.
Alarm Low Deadband Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Alarm Output
Enter the Alarm Output.
Mass Flow Component D
Alarm Enable
Select the Alarm Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, Display, Discrete Out, and Both.
High Setpoint
Enter the High Setpoint.
Alarm High Deadband Enter the Alarm High Deadband.
Alarm MinimumEnter the Alarm Minimum.
Alarm Low Deadband Enter the Alarm Low Deadband.
Alarm Output
Enter the Alarm Output.

49

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Analog Output
The Analog Output screen is where you configure the Map, URV, LRV, Damping, Alarm
Response, and Diagnostic Response.

Figure 44. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Analog Output Screen503. CFT51 Transmitter

Field
Analog Output 1
Map

URV
LRV
Damping
Alarm Response
Diagnostic Response
Analog Output 2
Map

URV
LRV
Damping
Alarm Response
Diagnostic Response
Analog Output 3
Map

URV
LRV
Damping
Alarm Response
Diagnostic Response

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration, Mass Flow A,
Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Enter the upper range value.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the Damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Response from the drop-down menu. Choose from
High, Low, Hold Last Output value, and None.
Select the Diagnostic Response from the drop-down menu. Choose
from High, Low, and Hold Last Output Value.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration, Mass Flow A,
Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Enter the upper range value.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the Damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Response from the drop-down menu. Choose from
High, Low, Hold Last Output value, and None.
Select the Diagnostic Response from the drop-down menu. Choose
from High, Low, and Hold Last Output Value.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration, Mass Flow A,
Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Enter the upper range value.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the Damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Response from the drop-down menu. Choose from
High, Low, Hold Last Output value, and None.
Select the Diagnostic Response from the drop-down menu. Choose
from High, Low, and Hold Last Output Value.

51

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Pulse Output
The Pulse Output screen is where you configure Pulse Outputs, Modes, and Rate Modes.

Figure 45. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen
Field
Pulse Outputs
Fast Update
Quadrature
Pulse Output 1
Mode
Rate Mode
Map

52

Entry
Select the Fast Update from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off
and On.
Select the Quadrature from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off
and On.
Select the Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Rate andTotal.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration, Mass Flow A,
Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Field
Scaling Method

URV
LRV
PO Minimum
Frequency
PO Maximum
Frequency
Damping
Alarm Response
Diagnostic Response
Pulse Output 2
ModeRate Mode
Map

Scaling Method

URV
LRV
PO Minimum
Frequency
PO Maximum
Frequency
Damping
Alarm Response
Diagnostic Response

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the Scaling Method from the drop-down menu. Choose from
URV, Units Per Pulse, and Pulses Per Unit.
If you select Units Per Pulse or Pulses Per Unit, the URV and LRVfields are not available.
Enter the upper range Value.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the PO Minimum Frequency in Hz.
Enter the PO Maximum Frequency in Hz.
Enter the damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Response from the drop-down menu. Choose from
High, Low, Hold Last Output Value, and None.
Select the Diagnostic Response from the drop-down menu. Choose
from High, Low, and Hold Last Output Value.
Select the Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Rate andTotal.
Select the Map from the drop-down menu. Choose from Mass Flow,
Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration, Mass Flow A,
Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Select the Scaling Method from the drop-down menu. Choose from
URV, Units Per Pulse, and Pulses Per Unit.
If you select Units Per Pulse or Pulses Per Unit, the URV and LRVfields are not available.
Enter the upper range value.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the PO Minimum Frequency in Hz.
Enter the PO Maximum Frequency in Hz.
Enter the damping in seconds.
Select the Alarm Response from the drop-down menu. Choose from
High, Low, Hold Last Output Value, and None.
Select the Diagnostic Response from the drop-down menu. Choose
from High, Low, and Hold Last Output Value.

53

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

HART
The Output HART screen is where you configure the Polling Address, Number of Response
Preambles, and Loop Current Mode.

Figure 46. Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Screen
Field
HART
Polling Address
Number of Requested
Preambles
Number of Response
Preambles
Loop Current Mode

54

Entry
Select the Polling Address from the drop-down menu. Choose from 1
to 15 for HART 5, and 1 to 63 for HART 6.
Shows the Number of Requested Preambles.
Enter the Number of Response Preambles.
Select the Loop Current Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Enable and Disable.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

HART Dynamics
The HART Dynamics screen is where you configure the PV, SV, TV, and QV Maps.

Figure 47. Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Dynamics Screen
Field

Entry

Primary Variable Map

Select the Primary Variable Map from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Mass Flow, Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration,
Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Select the Secondary Variable Map from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Mass Flow, Volume Flow, Density, Temperature,
Concentration, Total 1, Total 2, Total 3, Total 4, Mass Flow A, Mass
Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Select the Tertiary Variable Map from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Mass Flow, Volume Flow, Density, Temperature, Concentration,
Total 1, Total 2, Total 3, Total 4, Mass Flow A, Mass Flow B, Volume
Flow A, and Volume Flow B.
Select the Quaternary Variable Map from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Mass Flow, Volume Flow, Density, Temperature,
Concentration, Total 1, Total 2, Total 3, Total 4, Mass Flow A, Mass
Flow B, Volume Flow A, and Volume Flow B.

Secondary Variable
Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map55

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Contact Input
The Contact Input is used to configure inputs like calZero, Signal Lock, Alm/Diag Ack, Clear
Total1, Clear Total2, Clear Total3, Clear Total4, Clear Nets, Clear All Totals and Sel Zero.

Figure 48. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Input Screen

Field
Function

Entry
Select the Function from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off andOn.

Contact Output
The Contact Output screen is where you configure the Function (Off, Alarm, Diags and Alarm
Diags) and Digital Output (Normally, Off, On).

Figure 49. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Output Screen
Field
Function
Operation

56

Entry
Select the Function from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off andOn.
Select the Operation from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Normally Open and Normally Close.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Information
The Device Info screen shows the complete information of the device (Hardware).

Figure 50. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Model
Distributor
Device ID
Write Protect
Transmitter MS
Flowtube MS
Transmitter Serial Number
Location

Entry
Shows the manufacturer as Foxboro.
Shows the model as CFT51.
Shows the distributor as Foxboro.
Shows the Device ID.
Shows the Write Protect.
Shows the Transmitter.
Shows the Flowtube MS.
Shows the Transmitter Serial Number.
Enter the Location.
57

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Flowtube Serial Number
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of Last Calibration
Calibrator’s ID
Final Assembly Number
Long Tag
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Hardware Revision
Software Revision
Software Subrevision

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Enter the Flowtube Serial Number.
Enter the Tag.
Enter the Descriptor.
Enter the Message.
Select the Date of Last Calibration from the drop-downmenu. Choose from calendar.
Enter the Calibrator’s ID.
Enter the Final Assembly Number.
Enter the Long Tag.
Shows the Universal Revision.
Shows the Field Device Revision.
Shows the Hardware Revision.
Shows the Software Revision.
Shows the Software Subrevision.

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.

Figure 51. Sample CFT51 Transmitter HART Status Screen58

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014NOTE

The status of various parameters is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark(good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).
Click Reset Configuration Changed Flag to reset the configuration flag in the device.

Device Status
The Device Status screen shows the current readings from the device like (Mode, Alarms, etc).

Figure 52. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Device Status Screen59MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
StatusMode
AlarmsDiagnostics
Time
Write Protect
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 2
Analog Output 3
Pulse 1
Pulse 2Discrete In
Discrete Out
Flow Direction
Void Fraction
Tube Mode
Tube Frequency
Sensor Amplifier
Drive Current
PressureAcknowledge

60

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry
Shows the DTM Mode status.
Shows the alarm status.
Shows the Diagnostics status.
Shows the Time in hours.
Shows the Write Protect status.
Shows the Analog Output 1 status.
Shows the Analog Output 2 status.
Shows the Analog Output 3 status.
Shows the Pulse 1 status.
Shows the Pulse 2 status.
Shows the Discrete In status.
Shows the Discrete Out status.
Shows the Flow Direction status.
Shows the Void Fraction status.
Shows the Tube Mode status.
Shows the Tube Frequency status.
Shows the Sensor Amplifier status.
Shows the Drive Current status.
Shows the Pressure status.
Choose Alarm or Diagnostic from the drop-down menu and click the
Acknowledge button.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic History
The Diagnostic History screen shows the history log of the device.

Figure 53. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Diagnostic History Screen

Calibration
Flow Zero ValueThe Zero Value register shows you the value of the calibration.

Figure 54. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Value Screen
Field
Flow Zero Offset

Entry
Enter the Flow Zero Offset.

61

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Flow Zero Calibration
The Flow Zero Calibration calibrates Zero Flow.

Figure 55. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen
Click the Next button, the screen appears as shown in Figure 56.

Figure 56. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen (2)Field
Select Zero

Entry
Select the Select Zero from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Secondary and Primary.

Click the Next button, the screen appears as shown in Figure 57.

Figure 57. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Calibration Screen (3)FieldCalibration Zero

62

Entry
Select the Calibration Zero from the drop-down menu. Choose fromYes and No.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Flow Zero Restore
It restores the measurement value in zero flow conditions.

Figure 58. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Flow Zero Restore Screen

Field
RestoreEntry
Select the Restore from the drop-down menu. Choose from Yes andNo.

Density Calibration
The Density Calibration calibrates Density.

Figure 59. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen
Click the Next button, the screen appears as shown in Figure 60.

63

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Figure 60. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen (2)Field
Density Calibration
Fluid
Density
Reference Pressure

Entry
Select the Fluid from the drop-down menu. Choose from High and
Low.
Enter the Density.
Enter the Reference Pressure in psi.

Click the Next button, the screen appears as shown in Figure 61.

Figure 61. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Calibration Screen (3)643. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Density Calibration
Calibrate Density

Select Yes to calibrate density.

Click Next to complete calibrating the density.

Density Restore
It restores the density value to the original value.

Figure 62. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Density Restore Screen

Field
RestoreEntry
Select Yes or No from the Restore drop-down menu.

mA Calibration
This procedure is used to trim the 4 mA (zero) and 20 mA (span) output values of the flow meterto match the output of a plant standard measurement device. A suitable reference, like a digital
multimeter, is used to calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA points respectively.

Figure 63. Sample CFT51 Transmitter mA Calibration Screen65

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Entry

DAC Trim
Analog Output
Calibration

Select the Analog Output Calibration from the drop-down menu.
Choose from mA 1, mA 2, and mA 3.

mA Restore
The mA Restore screen is where you restore the selected mA value.

Figure 64. Sample CFT51 Transmitter mA Restore Screen
Field

Entry

mA Restore

Select the mA Restore from the drop-down menu. Choose from mA 1,
mA 2, and mA 3.

Tube Check
The Tube Check screen is where you check the ratio and percent of change with value and time. It
saves the current ratio and datum.

Figure 65. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Tube Check Screen663. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Start Tube Check
Datum

Click Start Tube Check to perform the tube check.
Enter the Value and Time.

Troubleshooting
Restore Factory Settings
The Restore Factory Settings configures all the data to factory default values.

Figure 66. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Restore Factory Settings Screen
Click Next and follow on screen messages to restore the factory settings of the DTM.

Contact Output
Contact Output screen allows to perform the override of contact output or digital output.

Figure 67. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Contact Output Screen
Field
Operation
Discrete Out

Entry
Select the Operation from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Inactive and Active.
Shows the status of the contact output.

67

MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Analog Output
The Analog output overrides the Analog Output Value with the selected Loop Test.

Figure 68. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field

Entry

Analog Output Loop
Test
Override Analog Value
Override Analog
OutputSelect the Analog Output Loop Test from the drop-down menu.
Choose from mA1, mA 2, and mA 3.
Enter Override Analog Value.
Selecting the Override Analog Output check box overrides themeasurement value.

Pulse output
The Pulse output overrides the Pulse Output Value with the selected Loop Test.

Figure 69. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen

68

Field

Entry

Pulse Output Loop
Test
Override Pulse Value
Override Pulse Output

Select the Pulse Output Loop Test from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Pulse 1 and Pulse 2.
Enter Override Analog Value.
Selecting the Override Pulse Output check box overrides themeasurement value.

3. CFT51 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Configuration Report
The Configuration Report gives a summary of the Device, DTM, and relevant configuration
information.

Figure 70. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Configuration Report Screen69MI 020-520 – January 2014

3. CFT51 Transmitter

Tube Verification Report
Tube Verification Report gives the transmitter, sensor, flow, and density configuration and meter
validation.

Figure 71. Sample CFT51 Transmitter Tube Verification Report Screen70

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series
Magnetic Flow Transmitters
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using the PC50 Field Device Tool with
IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters with HART communication protocol.
Additional information about these transmitters with HART communication is contained in thefollowing documents.
IMT25
MI 021-387

IMT25 Installation



MI 021-390

IMT25 Operation, Configuration, and Calibration



MI 021-391

IMT25 System Maintenance

MI 021-397

IMT25 Operation Using a HART CommunicatorMI 021-402

IMT96 Installation



MI 021-403

IMT96 Operation, Configuration, and Calibration



MI 021-404

IMT96 System Maintenance

MI 021-415

IMT96 Operation Using a HART Communicator

IMT96

71

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, and current PV
data.

Figure 72. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Overview Screen

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen provides the PV and totals data that was displayed on the Device
Overview screen plus additional measurement information.

Figure 73. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Process Variables Screen72

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status Screen
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of various parameters
is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X(error).
In the Error Reason and Error Reason Code sections of the screen, the reason and code forthe error is given.
NOTE

Error Reason indicates the last error reason. It is possible that the condition has
since been cleared.

Figure 74. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Status Screen73MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Diagnostic/Alarm Status Screen
The Diagnostic/Alarm Status screen shows diagnostic and alarm status information as well as
present URV information.

Figure 75. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Series Transmitter Diagnostic/Alarm Status Screen74

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Input/Output Status Screen
The Input/Output Status screen shows contact input and relay output status as well as output
owners information.

Figure 76. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Input/Output Status Screen

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT25 or IMT96 Series Transmitterusing the PC50 Field Device Tool:Calibration

DAC Trim

Scaled DAC Trim

Auto Zero Lock

The Auto Zero Lock selection includes an Auto Zero Lock Setup as shown in Figure 77.

Figure 77. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Auto Zero Lock Setup Screen75

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field

Entry

Auto Zero Lock Enable
Auto Zero Lock Output EffectAuto Zero Lock Alarms

Specify whether Auto Zero Lock is enabled (On or Off ).
Specify whether Auto Zero Lock is to affect the outputs.
Specify whether Auto Zero Lock is to generate an alarm condition.

Setup
General Setup Screen

Figure 78. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter General Setup Screen

Field

Entry

Tube Model Code Enter the flowtube model code.
Meter Factor
Enter the Cal Factor stamped on the flowtube data plate.(a)mA/Pulse
Enter the damping time in seconds.
Damping
Tag
Enter maximum of 8 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
(a) If data plate just says Cal Factor, refer to MI 019-397.

Measurement Units Screen

Figure 79. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen76

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field
Rate Units
Totalizer Units

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the Rate Units from the list presented.
Select the Totalizer Units from the list presented.

Totalizers Screen

Figure 80. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Totalizers Screen

Field
Totalizers
State
Net Totalizer
Net Total
Forward Total
Reverse Total
Clear Totalizer
Grand Totalizer
Grand Total
Clear Totalizer

Entry
Select totalizers On or Off.
Shows the result of the forward total minus the reverse total.
Shows the sum of the positive flow readings.
Shows the sum of the negative flow readings.
Clears the Net Totalizer
Shows the result of the forward total minus the reverse total since theGrand Totalizer was last cleared.
Clears the Grand Totalizer77

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Rate Range Screen

Figure 81. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Rate Range Screen

Field
Rate Range
Flow Mode
Direction
Primary URV
URV2
URV3

78

Entry
Select Unidirectional Single Range, Unidirectional Multi-Range,
Bidirectional Dual Range, or Bidirectional Split Range.
Select flow tube direction as Positive or Reverse.
Enter the upper range value for forward flow in all flow modes except
Unidirectional Multi-Range where it is the URV for the first range.
Enter the upper range value for reverse flow Bidirectional flow modes
and the URV for the second range in the Multi-Range flow mode.
Enter the upper range value for the third range in Multi-Range flowmode.

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Flowmeter Screen

Figure 82. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Alarm Output Screen

Field

Entry

Flowtube
Meter Factor
Enter the Cal Factor stamped on the flowtube data plate.(a)Tube Model CodeEnter the flowtube model number stamped on the flowtube data plate.
Tube Serial NumberEnter the flowtube serial number stamped on the flowtube data plate.
Transmitter
Transmitter Model CodeShows the transmitter model code.
Transmitter Serial Number Shows the transmitter serial number.
Line Frequency
Select the line frequency as 50 or 60 Hz.
Reduction
Select whether the reduction feature is to be On or Off.
(a) If data plate just says Cal Factor, refer to MI 019-397.

79

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Contact Inputs Screen

Figure 83. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Contact Inputs Screen

Field

Entry

Function
Operation

Select to enable (On) or not enable (Off ) the specified contact input.
Select whether the contact input is Normally Open or Normally Closed.

Analog Output Screen

Figure 84. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Analog Output Screen

Field
mA/Pulse Damping
Alarm Out EffectDiagnostic Output
Effect80

Entry
Enter the mA/Pulse Damping time in seconds.
Select how an alarm affects the output: No Effect, Go Upscale, or Go
Downscale.
Select how a diagnostic condition affects the output: Go Upscale, or
Go Downscale.

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Pulse Output Screen

Figure 85. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Pulse Output Screen

Field

Entry

Mode
Maximum Pulse Rate
Pulse URV
mA/Pulse Damping
Net Total Format

Select pulse output state as Rate or Total.
Select the output at full scale flow: 1, 2, 5, or 10 kHz.
Specify the flow at the maximum pulse rate.
Enter the damping time in seconds.
Select the resolution of the displayed values for Net Total, Forward
Total, and Reverse Total from the list provided.

Relay Output Screen

Figure 86. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Relay Output Screen81

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field
Function

Entry
Select the function of the specified relay output: Off (not used),
Alarms, Diags, Alarms+Diags, or Flow Direction. Also Test Mode on
the IMT25.
Select whether the specified relay output is Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Select the type of alarm that triggers the relay output (if Function is set
to Alarms or Alarms+Diags.
Select On or Off. On deactivates the relay while the alarm condition
still exists.

Operation
Alarm
Suppress

Auto Zero Lock Screen

Figure 87. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Auto Zero Lock Screen

Field

Entry

Auto Zero Lock Enable
Auto Zero Lock Output Effect

Select to enable (On) or not enable (Off ) the AZL detector.
Select to enable (Auto Zero Lock) or not enable (None) the AZL
detector to affect the outputs.
Select to enable (On) or not enable (Off ) the AZL detector to
generate an alarm condition.

Auto Zero Lock Alarms

82

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Alarm Screen

Figure 88. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Alarm Screen

Field
Alarming
Alarm Clearing

Auto Zero Lock Alarms
Alarm Out Effect
Alarm Display

Entry
Select On or Off to enable the alarm feature.
Select Automatic Acknowledge to acknowledge an alarm
automatically when the alarm condition no longer exists or selectManual Acknowledge only.
Select On or Off to enable or disable AZL to cause an alarm.
Select how an alarm affects the output: No Effect, Go Upscale, or Go
Downscale
Select whether you want the display to Blink or Don’t Blink when an
alarm condition occurs.

Flow Alarms Screen

Figure 89. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Flow Alarms Screen83MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field
High Rate
High Setpoint
High Deadband
Low Rate
Low Setpoint
Low Deadband

Entry
Select On or Off to specify whether High Rate Alarm is enabled.
Enter the setpoint if High Rate alarming is enabled.
Enter the deadband if High Rate alarming is enabled.
Select On or Off to specify whether Low Rate Alarm is enabled.
Enter the setpoint if Low Rate alarming is enabled.
Enter the deadband if Low Rate alarming is enabled.

Totalizer Alarms Screen

Figure 90. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Totalizer Alarms Screen

Field

Entry

Net Totalizer Alarm
Net Totalizer Alarm
Setpoint
Grand Totalizer Alarm

Select On or Off to specify whether Net Totalizer Alarming is enabled.
Enter the Net Totalizer Alarm Setpoint if Net Totalizer Alarm isenabled.
Select On or Off to specify whether Grand Totalizer Alarming isenabled.
Enter the Grand Totalizer Alarm Setpoint if Grand Totalizer Alarm isenabled.

Grand Totalizer Alarm
Setpoint84

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

HART Screen

Figure 91. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter HART Screen

Field
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles

Entry
Select an address between 0 and 15. A nonzero number applies tomultidrop applications.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in a response message fromthe transmitter to the host.

Local Display Screen

Figure 92. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Local Display Screen85

MI 020-520 – January 2014

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field
Alarm Display
Diagnostic Display
Rate Format
Display Damping
Net Total Format
Grand Total Format
Default Display
Dual Display
Dual Display Line 1
Dual Display Line 2

Entry
Select whether you want the display to Blink or Don’t Blink when an
alarm condition occurs.
Select whether you want the display to Blink or Don’t Blink when an
diagnostic condition occurs.
Select the resolution of the displayed values for flowrate from the list
provided.
Enter the Display Damping time in seconds.
Select the resolution of the displayed values for Net Total from the list
provided.
Select the resolution of the displayed values for Grand Total from thelist provided.
Select the measurement to be displayed from the list provided.
Select On or Off to enable or disable the Dual Display feature.
Select the measurement to be displayed on Line 1 if Dual Display wasenabled.
Select the measurement to be displayed on Line 2 if Dual Display wasenabled.

Device Information

Figure 93. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Device Information Screen86

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Device ID
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of last Calibration
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Software Subrevision
Hardware Revision

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Shows the manufacturer as Foxboro.
Shows the Device ID.
Enter the Tag (8 characters maximum).
Enter the Descriptor (16 characters maximum).
Enter the Message (32 characters maximum).
Select the Date of Last Calibration.
Shows the universal command set revision level.
Shows the field device revision level.
Shows the software revision level.
Shows the software subrevision level.
Shows the hardware revision level.

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the transmitter as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Digital Output

Figure 94. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Digital Output) Screen

Field
Digital Output
Net Total
Grand Total

Entry
Shows the current Digital Output.
Shows the current Net Total.
Shows the current Grand Total.
87

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Override Digital Value
Override Measurement

4. IMT25 and IMT96 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Entry
Enter the desired digital value.
Check/uncheck to activate/end override of measurement.

Analog Output

Figure 95. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Analog Output) Screen

Field
PV Analog Output
Override Analog Value
Override Measurement

Entry
Shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Select 4 mA or 20 mA.
Check/uncheck to activate/end override of measurement.

Pulse Output

Figure 96. Sample IMT25 or IMT96 Transmitter Loop Test (Pulse Output) Screen

Field
Pulse Output
Override Pulse Value
Override Measurement

88

Entry
Shows the current Pulse Output.
Enter the desired pulse value in Hz.
Check/uncheck to activate/end override of measurement.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow
Transmitters
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using MAG2 series of high performance
Magnetic Flow Transmitters with HART communication protocol. Additional information about
these transmitters with HART communication is contained in the following document.


MI 021-500
Flowmeters

Installation, operation, and maintenance of MAG2 Series Magnetic

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, current PV, andcurrent Totals data.

Figure 97. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Overview Screen89

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen displays the PV and totals data that was displayed on the Device
Overview screen plus additional measurement information.

Figure 98. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Process Variables Screen

Setup
General Setup Screen

Figure 99. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter General Setup Screen
Field
Flow Tube Size
Meter Factor
mA/Pulse
Damping
Tag

90

Entry
Select the nominal inside diameter of the flow tube size adjacent to thesensor from the drop-down menu.
Set the Cal Factor stamped on the flowtube data plate.
Set the damping time in seconds.
Set the tag name. Enter maximum of 8 characters. Optional, used forreference only.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units Screen

Figure 100. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Measurement Units Screen
Field
Flow Rate Units
Pulse Output Units

Entry
Select the flow rate units from the drop-down menu.
Select the pulse output units from the drop-down menu.

When Mass Flow units is selected, the Measurement screen appears as shown in Figure 101.

Figure 101. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Measurement Units Screen- Mass Flow Units Selected

Field
Measurement Units
Flow Rate Units
Pulse Output Units
Specific Gravity
Specific Gravity

Entry
Select the flow rate units from the drop-down menu.
Select the pulse output units from the drop-down menu.
Enter the specific gravity.

91

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Totalizers Screen

Figure 102. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Totalizers Screen
Field

Entry

Total Restart Value
Clear Totalizer
ButtonSet the Total restart value.
Clears the Net Totalizer

Rate Range Screen

Figure 103. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Rate Range Screen

92

Field

Entry

Low Flow Cut Off
Upper Range Value

Select the low flow cut off value from the drop-down menu.
Set the upper range value, which is the value when the output reaches
100%.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Flow Tube Screen

Figure 104. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Flow Tube Screen
Field
Flowtube
Flow Tube Size
Meter Factor (Ex Value)
C2 Value
Meter Factor Bias (Flow
Coefficient)
Flowtube Type

Entry
Select the Flowtube size from the drop-down menu.
Set the meter factor.
Set the Flowtube factor.
Set a compensation coefficient for flow rate calculation.
Select the Flowtube type from the drop-down menu. MAG2 should be
the only chosen option for normal product operation.

93

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Transmitter Screen

Figure 105. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Screen
Field
Immunity
mA/Pulse
Damping
Auto Spike
Cut
MovingAverageMovingAverage Time
Low Flow
Cut Off
Drop OutElectrode
StatusSensitivity
Electrode
Status Mode

94

Entry
Set the pulse damping time in seconds.
Allows you to turn the auto spike cut on or off.
Allows you to set the moving average to on or off.
Set the moving average time in seconds.
Select the low flow cut off value, in percentage, from the drop-down
menu.
Select the drop-out rate in percentage
Select the electrode status sensitivity from the drop-down menu.

Select the electrode status mode.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen - Analog

Figure 106. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field
mA/Pulse Damping
Burn out AO
Upper Range Value

Entry
Set the pulse damping time in seconds.
Select the burn-out value from the drop-down menu.
Set the upper range value for the analog output.

95

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Output Screen - Pulse/Contact

Figure 107. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Pulse Output Screen
Field
Mode
Output Mode
Pulse Output
Pulse Scaling
Pulse Width
Pulse Drop Out
Pulse Output EffectContact Output
DO High Alarm
DO Low Alarm
Diagnostic Output
Effect96

Entry
Select the output mode from the drop-down menu.
Set the pulse scaling value.
Set the pulse width value in milliseconds.
Select the drop-out value from the drop-down menu.
Set the burn-out value.
Set the alarm to trigger at the higher value set.
Set the alarm to trigger at the lower value set.
Select the diagnostic output effect from the drop-down menu.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen - HART

Figure 108. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter HART Output Screen
Field
HART
Polling Address

Entry
Select an address between 0 and 15. A nonzero number applies
to multidrop applications.

Output Screen - Local Display

Figure 109. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Local Display Output Screen
Field
Display Mode

Entry
Select the display mode in percentage of range from the drop-down
menu.

97

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Device Information

Figure 110. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field

Entry

Device Information
Final Assembly Number
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of last Calibration

Enter the assembly number of the device that is connected.
Enter the Tag (8 characters maximum).
Enter the Descriptor (16 characters maximum).
Enter the Message (32 characters maximum).
Select the Date of Last Calibration.

Device Status Screen
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of various parameters
is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X(error).

98

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 111. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Device Status Screen

Figure 112. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter HART Status Screen

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on a MAG2 Series Transmitter:

DAC Trim
In this procedure the transmitter controls the loop current to either 4 mA (zero) or 20 mA (span).
By providing the inputs to the following screens, the values indicated by a suitable reference like adigital multimeter, the transmitter can trim its output.

99

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Gain Trim
This is an electrical trim and you can set the meter to the following values, 0.0m/s, 2.5m/s, and10.0 m/s.

Pulse Trim
Pulse trim is the calibration for pulse output.

Ex TrimEx trim is the calibration for excitation current. You can choose from the following options, 3.5
mA, 4.9 mA, 7.0 mA, 11.9 mA, and 14.0 mA.

Manual Zero

Figure 113. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Manual Zero Screen Page 1

100

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 114. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Manual Zero Screen Page 2

Auto ZeroIn this procedure, the transmitter calibrates the impedance of the fluid between the electrodes sothat it may be used to detect when the fluid level gets below the electrode level.

Troubleshooting
Restore Factory Settings
The Restore Factory Settings options will reset all data to factory default values. This helps withthe troubleshooting tasks.

Figure 115. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Restore Factory Settings Options Screen101

MI 020-520 – January 2014

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the transmitter as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Loop Check

Figure 116. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Check Screen

Analog Output

Figure 117. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Test (Analog Output) Screen
Field
Override Value
Override Analog Output

102

Entry
Allows you to set the override value in percentage.
Select the check box to override analog output.

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Pulse Output

Figure 118. Sample MAG2 Series Transmitter Loop Test (Pulse Output) Screen
Field
Override Pulse Value
Override Pulse Output

Entry
Allows you to set the override pulse value in percentage.
Select the check box to override pulse output.

103

MI 020-520 – January 2014104

5. MAG2 Series Magnetic Flow Transmitters

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 875PH with HART communication
protocol. Additional information is available in the following document.


MI 611-225 Model 875PH Intelligent Electrochemical Analyzer for pH, ORP, or
Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Measurements105

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information and the device information. The
current measurement, temperature, analog 1 output (PV) and HART analog (SV) data isrepresented in a graph.

Figure 119. Sample 875PH Analyzer Device Overview Screen

Field
HART
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Polling Address

106

Entry
This field shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of thedevice.
This field shows the tag number.
This field shows the HART message that is sent from the device whenrequested. The message can have a maximum of 32 characters.
This field shows the configured address of the device.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Device Information
Date of Last Calibration

This field shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
NOTE

You can change the calibration date in “Device
Information”.
Device Software Version
Serial NumberThis field shows the software version of the device.
This field shows the serial number of the device.

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen is where you can set measurement units for device parameters and specify apasscode that allows you to access the configurable device parameters.

Figure 120. Sample 875PH Analyzer General Screen107

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Passcode
Passcode
Level
GeneralMeasurement Units
Temperature Units
Analog Output
1/PV Map
Analog Output
1/PV LRV
Analog Output
1/PV URV
HART Analog
Output/SV Map
HART Analog
Output/SV LRVHART Analog
Output/SV URV
Damping
Tag Name108

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry
Specify a passcode (valid) for configuring the device parameters.
This field shows the passcode level.
Select the units for measurement from the drop-down list. Choose
from ppm, mV, pH, and Custom.
Select the units for temperature from the drop-down list. Choose fromdegC and degF.
Map a measurement for analog output 1 from the drop-down list.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Specify the lower range value for analog output 1.
Specify the upper range value for analog output 1.
Map a measurement for HART analog output from the drop-downlist. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Specify the lower range value for HART analog output.
Specify the upper range value for HART analog output.
Select the damping time that is applied to the current output. Choose
from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, and 120 seconds.
Specify the HART tag name. The tag name can have a maximum of 8
characters.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

SensorThe Sensor screen allows you to configure parameters for sensor.

Figure 121. Sample 875PH Analyzer Sensor Screen (pH Selection)

Field
SensorMeasurement Units

Electrode

SlopeaIsopotentialb
Temperature Type

Entry
Select the measurement units to measure sensor temperature. Choose
from ppm, mV, pH, and Custom.
For pH or ppm units you must select the electrode.
Select the electrode from the drop-down list.
If measuring pH - choose from Glass, Antimony, or Other.
• Glass sets the isopotential point at 7 pH.
• Antimony sets it at 1 pH.
• Other allows the isopotential point to be set manually from -2.0
through 16.0 pH.
If measuring ppm - choose from Positive or Negative to specify the ion
polarity as positive or negative.
• A positive ion selective measurement gets more positive as theconcentration increases• A negative ion selective measurement gets more negative as theconcentration increases.
Specify mV change per decade change in concentration.
Set the isopotential point.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down list. Choose from 2
Wire 100 Ω, 2 Wire 1000 Ω, 3 Wire 100 Ω, or 3 Wire 1000 Ω, andBALCO.

a. This parameter appears for pH measurement when the Electrode is selected as ‘Other’.
b. This parameter appears for ppm measurement, and for pH measurement when theElectrode is selected as ‘Other’.

109

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

For ppm measurement with positive electrode, you must select Valence.

Figure 122. Sample 875PH Analyzer Sensor Screen (ppm Selection)

Field
SensorValence

Entry
Select valence as Monovalent or Divalent from the drop-down list.

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to set measurement units, scale for the measurement
units, and the damping time.

Figure 123. Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (pH Selection)110

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Resolution
Damping
Damping

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the units for measurement. Choose from ppm, mV, pH, andCustom.
This parameter appears only for pH measurement. Set the resolution
as 0.1 or 0.01 from the drop-down list.
Select the damping time from the drop-down list. Choose from None,5, 10, 20, 40, and 120 seconds.

If you choose ppm measurement, you must select scale and chemical compensation.

Figure 124. Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (ppm Selection)

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Scale

ChemicalCompensation

Damping
Damping

Entry
Select the measurement units as ppm.
This parameter appears only for ppm measurement. Select scale fromthe drop-down list. Choose from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and9999.
Select chemical compensation from the drop-down list. Choose fromStandard and Custom.
If you select Custom, specify number of points to plot a measurement
curve, and the base and custom points for the custom units. Refer toFigure 125.
Select the damping time from the drop-down list. Choose from None,5, 10, 20, 40, and 120 seconds.

For Custom measurement units you must specify custom units and select custom scale. You
should also specify the number of points to plot a measurement curve, and the base and custom
points.
111

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 125. Sample 875PH Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (Custom Selection)

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Custom Units
Custom Scale

Entry
Select the units as Custom from the drop-down list.
Specify the custom units.
Select the custom scale from the drop-down list. Choose from 0.9999,
9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and 9999.

Damping
Damping

Select the damping time from the drop-down list. Choose from None,5, 10, 20, 40, and 120 seconds.
Custom Measurement Curve
Number of Points
Specify the number of points to plot a measurement curve. You canspecify from 2 to 21 points. Based on the number of points you
specify, the fields to enter base and custom points are displayed.
Base Point
Specify the base point.
Custom Point
Specify the custom point.
NOTE

A Slope Error is displayed when errors made during the entry of custom tables cause
an invalid slope.

112

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Temperature
The Temperature screen allows you to set units for temperature measurement.

Figure 126. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto)

Field
Temperature
Temperature Units
Temperature Mode

Fail Temperature

Entry
Select units for temperature measurement from the drop-down list.
Choose from degF or degC.
Select the temperature mode from the drop-down list. Choose from
Auto or Manual.
• In Automatic mode, the temperature follows the temperature
input RTD and you can set a temperature fail signal value in case
the RTD fails at the temperature at which you expect the process
to be operating.
• In Manual mode, the temperature can be set at a fixed temperature value and resistance inputs on the temperature terminal are
ignored.
Set a temperature that can be used in case of RTD failure.

If you select Manual mode, specify a value for temperature.

Figure 127. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual)113

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Temperature
ManualTemperature

Entry
Specify a temperature value.

Temperature Compensation
The Temperature Compensation screen allows you to set the temperature compensation for pH,
ppm, and custom measurements.

Figure 128. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen
NOTE

Temperature Compensation is not available for mV measurement.

114

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select the temperature compensation from the drop-down list. The
Compensation
options in this drop-down vary based on the measurement selected.
If pH was chosen as measurement unit, select from Standard,
Ammonia, or Custom.
If ppm was chosen as measurement unit, choose from Standard or
Custom.
If Custom was chosen as the measurement unit, you can customize
units for measurement.
• Standard - assumes a glass or antimony electrode and applies the
Nernst equation. The nominal temperature compensation range
is -5 to +105° C (23 to 221° F).
• Ammonia - compensates for traces of ammonia in addition to
the standard compensation.
• Custom - allows you to specify particular solution characteristics
into the analyzer’s memory. All measurements are corrected backto a reference temperature measurement value. Therefore, youare asked to specify a reference temperature and a number ofpoints to plot a compensation curve.
For custom temperature compensation specify reference temperature and the number of points toplot a custom compensation curve.

Figure 129. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom Selection)115

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select the temperature compensation as Custom.
Compensation
Reference
This parameter appears only for Custom temperature compensation.
Temperature
Set the reference temperature from -20 through + 200°C or -4 through+392°F in increments of 0.1 degree. It should be within the nominal
temperature compensation range.
Custom Compensation Curve
Number of Points
Specify the number of points to plot a compensation curve. You canspecify from 2 to 21 points. Based on the number of points you
specify, the fields to enter base and custom points are displayed.
Temperature (units) Specify the temperature based on the measurement units selected fortemperature.
Value (units)
Specify a value based on the scale selected for the measurement unit.
NOTE

1. The temperature values must be entered in increasing or decreasing order or the
display will read Slope Error.
2. Actual database saving of the compensation table is not performed until the lastpoint pair is entered.
3. The reference temperature should be one of the temperatures listed incompensation table.

OutputAnalog
The Analog screen allows you to configure the analog outputs in the analyzer. There are two
analog outputs - Analog Output 1 (PV), and HART Analog Output (SV), which can be mapped
to different measurements. You can specify the minimum and maximum range values for the
outputs, and a fail-safe signal for each output.

116

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 130. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)Primary Variable
Select a measurement to map the primary variable from the dropMap
down list. Choose from Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, andOff.
Select Off if you are not using the output.
Analog Output 1
Specify the lower range value for Analog Output 1.
LRV
Analog Output 1
Specify the upper range value for Analog Output 1.
URV
Failsafe
Select failsafe mode from the drop-down list. Choose from On, Off,and Pulse.
HART Analog Output (SV)Secondary Variable
Select a measurement to map the secondary variable from the dropMap
down list. Choose from Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, andOff. Select Off if you are not using the output.
HART Analog
Specify the lower range value for HART Analog Output.
Output LRV117

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
HART Analog
Output URV
Failsafe

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry
Specify the upper range value for HART Analog Output.
Select failsafe mode from the drop-down list. Choose On or Off.

NOTE

The measurements mapped to Analog and HART Analog Outputs are updated in“General” and “Digital” sections also.
You can configure the analyzer to deliver fail-safe outputs for all analyzer faults and for certain
sensor diagnostic faults. Select Failsafe as On to specify a fixed output in a failed condition.

Figure 131. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as On)

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV) and HART Analog Output (SV)mA Fail Safe Value
Specify DC mA/Analog output value between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.
Select Failsafe as Pulse if you want the signal outputted with a pulsed saw-tooth waveform.

118

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014.

Figure 132. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as Pulse)

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)AverageSpecify the Average mA/Analog output value between 3.8 and 20.5
mA.
NOTE

The Failsafe (HART) parameter does not have a Pulse selection.

119

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

HART
The HART screen allows you to specify the HART polling address. Polling address is set to zeroby default. If you change it to a non zero value, it will result in loss of communication between the
DTM and the device.
This screen also shows the number of preambles that are sent in the response message.

Figure 133. Sample 875PH Analyzer HART Output Screen

Field
HART
Polling Address
Preambles

120

Entry
Select a polling address between 0 and 15.
This field shows the number of preambles in the response message.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

DigitalThe Digital screen allows you to map measurements to primary, secondary, tertiary, andquaternary variables.

Figure 134. Sample 875PH Analyzer Digital Output Screen

Field
Digital Output
Primary Variable Map

Secondary Variable
Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map

Entry
The primary variable (PV) is the measurement configured for Analog
Output 1. Configure this parameter to represent one of themeasurements in the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, orAbsolute.
Select Off if you are not using the PV.
The secondary variable (SV) is the measurement configured for HART
Analog Output. Configure this parameter to represent one of themeasurements in the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, orAbsolute.
Select Off if you are not using the SV.
Configure the tertiary variable to represent one of the measurements inthe drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, or Absolute.
Select Off if you are not using the TV.
Configure the quaternary variable to represent one of the measurementsin the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, or Absolute.
Select Off if you are not using the QV.

NOTE

1. The measurements mapped to PV and SV are updated in “General” and“Analog” sections also.

121

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Local Display
The Local Display screen is where you can configure the parameters for display.
If you select single mode configuration, you must select the measurements you want to show inthe line 1 of the display.

Figure 135. Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Single Line)122

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Line 1Bargraph Min
Bargraph Max
Display Timeout
Front Panel Timeout
Remote Timeout
Digital Comm
Timeout
LCD Adjust
LCD Adjust Value

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the display format from the drop-down list. Choose from Dual,
Single, or Scan.
• Single: Displays a single measurement title, value, and unit on thelocal display.
• Dual: Displays two measurement titles, values, and units on thelocal display.
• Scan: Displays several selected measurements in sequence in a designated scan time.
This parameter appears if you are in single line mode. Select ameasurement from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.
Specify the minimum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Specify the maximum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Configure front panel timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.
Configure remote timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.
Configure digital communication timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.

This parameter allows you to adjust the brightness of the display. The
numbers (-9 to 0 to +9) shown on the display should only be used for
darkening or lightening the display.

123

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

If you select Dual mode, you must select the measurements you want to show in line 1 and line 2parameters of the display.

Figure 136. Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Dual Line)

Field
Measurement Display
Line 2124

Entry
This parameter appears if you are in dual line mode. Select ameasurement from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Scan mode, you must specify which measurements you want to display in sequence,and the scan time.

Figure 137. Sample 875PH Analyzer Local Display Screen (Scan)

Field
Measurement Display
Scan Time
Scan Data

Entry
Select the scan time from the drop-down list. Choose from 2, 5, 10, and20 seconds.
Select the measurements you want to display in sequence on the local
display. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1,
and HART.

125

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Auto Hold
The Auto Hold screen is where you can configure the analyzer to go into a Hold state incalibration or configuration mode, or upon receiving a digital signal without setting the Holdeach time. It also automatically removes the Hold after calibration or configuration mode.

Figure 138. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Hold Screen

Field
Auto Hold
Auto Hold Mode

Signaled Hold Mode

Signaled Input Trigger

126

Entry
This parameter is used to configure the analyzer to go into Hold mode
when in calibration or configuration mode. Select the auto hold mode
from the drop-down list. Choose from:• On Present - to hold all values and states at their current levels• On Manual - to hold all values and states at desired levels• Off - to release the analyzer from Hold stateThis parameter is used to configure the analyzer to go into Hold mode
upon receiving a digital signal. Select one of the following options fromthe drop-down list:• On Present - to hold all values and states at their current level• On Manual - to set all values and states at the levels specified in
Hold mode• Off - if you choose not to use this feature
Select signaled input trigger from the drop-down list. Choose from Highor Low.
If High, Hold is initiated when input switch is closed. If Low, it isinitiated when the input switch is open.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Configuration
The Diagnostics screen is where you select the diagnostic faults for which the error messages
should be displayed.

Figure 139. Sample 875PH Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen
NOTE

Low Slope, Glass, and Aging options are not available for mV or Custom
measurements.
If you select Glass, Low Slope, Preamp, or Coating, set the diagnostic limits.

127

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 140. Sample 875PH Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen

Field
Diagnostic Limits
Glass Lo Limit

Glass Cut Off

Slope Limit
Preamp Limit
Coat Limit

128

Entry
This parameter limits the message to resistances below a set value. You
can set the glass lo limit from 0.1 through 1.1 MΩ in increments of 0.1
MΩ.
This parameter is used to set a cutoff value at which the fault message
should be displayed. You can set this value from -20 through +200°C or-4 through 392°F in increments of 1 degree.
Set the slope limit from 0 through 100 percent in increments of 1
percent.
Set the preamp limit from 0 through 70 mW in increments of 1 mW.
Set the coat limit from 0 through 100 kΩ.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Passcode Access
The Passcode Access screen allows you to establish or change passcodes for the three levels of
security. Users having access to Level 1 can set or modify these passcodes in configuration mode.

Figure 141. Sample 875PH Analyzer Passcode Access Screen

Field
Passcode
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3

Entry
Specify the passcode for Level 1. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 2. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 3. It can be set from 0 to 9999.

NOTE

1. The table in the screen shows the access permissions of the users to each of thescreens.
‘X’ - user can edit
‘V’ - user can only view
2. The factory default pass code for all three levels is 0800.

129MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Restore Configuration
The Restore Configuration screen allows you to reset all data to default values.

Figure 142. Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 1

Field

Entry

Restore Configuration to Defaults
Restore Configuration Click Restore Configuration to reset the parameters to default values.

Figure 143. Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 2

Figure 144. Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 3
Click Yes to continue the restore process.

1306. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 145. Sample 875PH Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen 4
When the process is completed, click OK. The values are restored.

Auto Service 1
The Auto Service 1 screen allows you automate the process of cleaning and calibrating sensors.
When this service is activated, a signal is sent to the control instrument which automaticallysequences the removal of the sensor from the process, its cleaning, calibration, and reinstallation.

Figure 146. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen131MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Auto Service Type 1
Auto Service Type

Service Initiate
ManualSignaled
ScheduledDiagnostic
Input Trigger

Select Diagnostic
SolutionsUser Solutions
Solution Value 1
Solution Value 2

Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T1)Time in Solution 1(T2)
Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T3)Time in Solution 2(T4)
Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T5)

132

Entry
Select the service type from the drop-down list. Choose from AutoClean, 1 Point Cal, 2 Point Cal, Clean + 1PT Cal, Clean + 2PT Cal, andOff.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Select this method to initiate the auto service manually.
Select this method to initiate the auto service by an input trigger.
Select this method to initiate the auto service by a set date or period. If
you select this method, you must select the schedule.
Select this method to initiate the auto service by a fault.
This parameter is available only for signaled method. Select one of thefollowing options for input trigger.
• High - auto service is initiated when the input switch is closed.
• Low - auto service is initiated when the input switch is open.
This parameter is available only for Diagnostic method. Select Low Slopeor Coat or Aging.
This parameter is not available for the service type ‘Auto-Clean’. You can
set this parameter to User Solutions or Smart Cal Buff.
Smart Cal Buff is available when the measurement is pH and the service
type is 2 Point Cal or Clean + 2PT Cal.
Specify a value for solution 1.
This parameter is not available if the service type is ‘Auto-Clean’.
Specify a value for solution 2.
This parameter is not available if the service type is - ‘Auto-Clean’ or ‘1
Point Cal’ or ‘Clean + 1PT Cal’.
Specify the time for cleaning, purging, and setup.
Specify the time in solution 1.
Specify the time for cleaning, purging, and setup if you are doing acalibration.
Specify the time in solution 2.
Specify the time for cleaning, purging, and setup if you are doing a twopoint calibration.

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Trip State

Service HoldMI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select one of the following options from the drop-down list for alarm
trip state:• Energized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NO (2C
and 2NO) and an open contact between 1C and 1NC (2C and2NC).
• Deenergized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NC (2C
and 2NC) and an open contact between 1C and 1NO (2C and
2NO).
Select one of the following options for service hold:• On Present - holds all values and states at their present level.
• On Manual - sets all values and states at the levels specified in Holdmode.
• Off - select this option if you choose not to use Service Hold feature.

NOTE

Auto Service 1 must be configured Off for Alarm 1 to be available for configuration.
If you select Scheduled method, you must select the schedule for auto service.

Figure 147. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection)133

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Daily from the drop-down list.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

Figure 148. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Weekly from the drop-down list.
Day of Week
Select a day from the drop-down list.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

134

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 149. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Monthly from the drop-down list.
Day of Month
Select a day from 1 to 28 days of the month.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

135

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 150. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Period by Hours from the drop-down list.
Period of Hour
Specify the period of hours from 1 to 8760 hours.
Start Date
Specify a date from 1/01/1999 to 12/31/2098 as a start date.
Start Time
Specify a time from 00:00 to 23:59 hours as start time.

136

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 151. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 1 Screen (Scheduled Method Selection)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Period by Days from the drop-down list.
Period of Day
Specify the period of days from 1 to 365.
Start Date
Specify a start date from 1/01/1999 to 12/31/2098.
Start Time
Specify a start time from 00:00 to 23:59 hours.

137

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Auto Service 2
The Auto Service 2 screen also allows you to automate the process of cleaning and calibrating
sensors. For detailed description on the parameters, refer to “Auto Service 1”.

Figure 152. Sample 875PH Analyzer Auto Service 2 Screen
NOTE

Auto Service 2 must be configured Off for Alarm 2 to be available for configuration.

138

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

RemoteThe Remote screen allows you to configure parameters associated with a remote personal
computer or a printer.

Figure 153. Sample 875PH Analyzer Remote Screen

Field
Update Rate Settings
UpdateFormatPort Settings
Baud Rate
Data and Parity
Stop Bits

Entry
Set the update frequency from the drop-down list. Choose from 5,
10, 30, 60, 120, 300, 600, 1200, 3600, or Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Select the format for the measurements report. Choose from Printer or
Spreadsheet.
Set the baud rate to 300, 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200.
Set the data and parity to 7 Odd, 7 Even, 8 Odd, 8 Even, or 8 None.
Set the stop bits to 1 or 2.

139

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Alarm 1The Alarm 1 screen is where you can configure alarm parameters. Specify the alarm to one of thefollowing measurements or conditions: Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, or On Fault. The
alarm reacts if the measurement exceeds the trip high point or drops below the trip low point.
It uses two controls - Hysteresis and Timed, to minimize chatter around the setpoint. Hysteresis
does this by using the measurement; and Timed, by using time.
NOTE

Auto Service 1 must be configured Off for Alarm 1 to be available for configuration.

Figure 154. Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection)

Field
Alarm 1
Alarm 1

Trip 1

Trip Point 1
Control 1
Trig Time 1

140

Entry
Set the alarm 1 from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, On Fault, or Off.
Select Off if you are not using the alarm.
Select trip 1 from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Trip Low - to active alarm on a low going condition.
• Trip High - to active alarm on a high going condition.
Specify the trip point 1 value.
Select the control as Timed from the drop-down list.
Set the trig time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes. When you specify a trig
time, condition must exist continuously for the specified time period
before the alarm condition is met.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
On Time 1
Off Time 1
Fault Act 1

EntrySpecify the alarm feed time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.
This is the delay time before the alarm can trigger again. Specify thedelay time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.
Select the alarm fault action from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Measurement Value - enables an alarm only when the measurement
exceeds the alarm set point.
• Valid Measurement - enables an alarm when the measurement
exceeds the set point and if one of the selected faults is present.
• Measurement and Fault - validates the cause when the measurement exceeds the setpoint. If the cause is a fault and not process
related, the alarm is disabled. You can select the faults from the listof alarm faults that are displayed below the alarm graph.
NOTE

This parameter is available only for users having accessto Level 1.
Trip State 1

Select the trip state from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Energized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NO (2C
and 2NO) and an open contact between 1C and 1NC (2C and2NC).
• Deenergized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NC (2C
and 2NC) and an open contact between 1C and 1NO (2C and
2NO).

NOTE

The faults appear only when the alarm 1 is set to:
1. On Fault
2. Measurement or Temperature or Absolute and the Fault Act is set to‘Measurement and Fault’.

Field
Alarm Faults
Analyzer Faults
4-20 Range
Glass
Coat
Leakage

Entry
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of analyzer faults.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement mapped to theanalog output is outside the range configured (4-20 mA).
Select this check box to enable alarm if a problem exists in the resistanceof a glass electrode in the sensor.
Select this check box to enable alarm if there is an increase in reference
junction resistance due to a fouled reference junction.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of severe liquid leakage into
the sensor.

141

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Comp Range

Low Slope
ATC ShortandATC Open
Meas Range

PreampComm Faults
Aging

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measured temperature or
absolute conductivity or resistivity measurement is outside thetemperature or chemical compensation curve configured for thecurrently running application.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the analyzer encounters problem
with an aging glass electrode.
Select these check boxes to enable alarm if the resistance of thetemperature compensator is greater or less than the expected resistance ofthe device configured.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement is over or underthe measurable range that is configured for the currently runningapplication.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of failed preamplifier.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of communication faults.
Select this check box to enable alarm for aging glass electrode.

If Control is specified as Hysteresis, you must specify the hysteresis value.

Figure 155. Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)142

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Control 1
Hysteresis 1

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the control as Hysteresis from the drop-down list.
Specify the hysteresis value.

Alarm 2The Alarm 2 screen allows you to configure alarm 2 parameters to represent measurement,
temperature, absolute, or a fault. For detailed description of the parameters in this screen, refer to“Alarm 1”.

Figure 156. Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection)
NOTE

Auto Service 2 must be configured Off for Alarm 2 to be available for configuration.

143

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 157. Sample 875PH Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays complete information of the device. It allows you to set
the tag name, tag number, HART message, location, device name, and date of last calibration.

Figure 158. Sample 875PH Analyzer Device Information Screen

144

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Location
Device Name
Date of Last
Calibration
Model
Sales Order
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
Device Software
Revision
Write Protect
Write Protect Mode

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
This field shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Specify the HART tag name.
Specify the HART tag number.
Specify the HART message.
Specify the location where the measurements are done.
Specify the name of the device.
Set the date of last calibration.
This field shows the model of the device.
This field shows the sales order number.
This field shows the universal command set revision level.
This field shows the field device revision level.
This field shows the software revision level.
This field shows the hardware revision level.
This field shows the device software revision level.

This field shows the write protect status.

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red X (error).
If Configuration Changed does not show a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset
Configuration Changed Flag button on the lower right side of the screen.

145

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 159. Sample 875PH Analyzer HART Status Screen

Calibration
Parameters
The Parameters calibration screen allows you to define the parameters used by the analyzer inchecking for measurement and temperature stability when performing a calibration. You can also
specify the buffers to be used if you are measuring pH and using the Smart solution calibration
feature.

146

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 160. Sample 875PH Analyzer Parameter Calibration Screen

Field

Entry

Calibration Parameters
Smart Calibration
This parameter is available only for pH measurement. Select the smart
Buffers
calibration buffer from the drop-down list. Choose from American,
NIST, European, Buffer 1, Buffer 2, and Buffer 3.
Tolerance
This parameter is available only for pH measurement. Specify a value
from 0.0 to 2.0 pH.
Measurement Stability
Measurement Stability While performing calibration, the analyzer checks the stability inabsolute measurement before accepting the change. Set the measurement
stability as On or Off.
Time to Achieve
This parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured as On.
Stability
Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second increments) toattain stability.
Amount ofThis parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured as On.
Fluctuation
Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time period
and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.
Temperature Stability
Temperature Stability
While performing calibration the analyzer checks the stability intemperature before accepting the change. Set the temperature stability as
On or Off.

147

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Time to Achieve
Stability
Amount ofFluctuation

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry
This parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured as On.
Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second increments) toattain stability.
This parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured as On.
Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time period
and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.

If you select Buffer 1, 2, or 3, specify number of points for Custom pH Buffer.

Figure 161. Sample 875PH Analyzer Parameter Calibration Screen (Custom Selection)

Field
Number of Points
Number of Points
Temperature (Units)
Value (pH)

148

Entry
Specify the number of points between 2 and 21.
Specify a temperature value from -20 to +200°C by 0.1°C or -4 to 392°F
by 0.1 °F.
Specify pH value from -2.00 to +16.00 pH.

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014Bench
The Bench calibration screen allows you to perform a calibration using theoretical inputs or to
return to the stored factory default calibration. This calibration is used if you have a problem
with your analyzer.

Default Calibration
The Default Calibration screen allows you to return to the stored factory default calibration.

Figure 162. Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 1

Field

Entry

Calibration Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Bench Calibration

This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the operator.
Select the calibration as ‘Default’ from the drop-down list.

Figure 163. Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 2

149

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field

Entry

Calibration Setup
Do you want to restore
the default cal?

Select Yes if you want to restore the default calibration. Select No if you
choose not to restore.

If you have selected Yes, click Next to continue the calibration process.

Figure 164. Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 3

Figure 165. Sample 875PH Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 4150

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

User Calibration
The User Calibration screen allows you to alternatively verify the calibration of the analyzer(without the sensor) with theoretical millivolt inputs.

Figure 166. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 1

Field

Entry

Calibration Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Bench Calibration

This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the operator.
Select the calibration as ‘User’ from drop-down list.

Adjust the millivolt supply to the first value.

Figure 167. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 2151

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 168. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 3
If Meas Stability is configured Off, watch for the measurement to stabilize before proceeding. If it
is configured On, the display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. When the message
disappears, click Next.

Figure 169. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 4

Field

Entry

Calibration Setup
Measurement Value
Wait for Some MoreThis parameter shows the measurement value.
Select one of the options from the drop-down list.
• Accept - to accept the displayed measurement value.
• Wait - to wait for another measurement value.

If the displayed reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value (to within 0.01%).

Figure 170. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 51526. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If this part of the calibration is successfully completed, the display prompts you to adjust themillivolt supply to the second value and repeat the procedure.

Figure 171. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 6

Figure 172. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 7

Figure 173. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 8153

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 174. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 9

Figure 175. Sample 875PH Analyzer User Calibration Screen 10
If the calibration is successfully completed, the display reads Calibration Completed.
NOTE

If you are changing from an ISE measurement to a pH measurement, you should
use a bench factory default calibration followed by a 2-point solution calibration.

Solution
The Solution screen allows you to perform a calibration using real solutions. Calibration can bedone using Manual 1 Pt, Manual 2 Pt, Smart Cal, or Temp Adjust calibration types.

Figure 176. Sample 875PH Analyzer Solution Calibration Screen1546. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Calibration Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration Type

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the operator.
Select one of the following calibration types from the drop-down list:• Manual 1 Point• Manual 2 Point• Smart Cal• Temp Adjust

Manual 1 Point
Manual 1 Pt calibration allows calibration at a user entered value. It can be used if you aremeasuring ORP.
Select the calibration type as Manual 1 Point and follow the steps given below:
1. Put the sensor in the solution and click Next.
2. The display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. Then the measurement value isdisplayed. Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value and click Next.
3. If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next.
4. After the process is completed, click OK to return to Calibrate menu.

Figure 177. Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 1

155

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 178. Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 2

Figure 179. Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 3

Field
Solution
Measurement Value
Wait For Some More

Entry
This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value.
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value.

Figure 180. Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 4156

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Solution
Measurement Value
Input New Value

Entry
This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value.
If the reading is not the intended value, edit it to the correct value.

Figure 181. Sample 875PH Analyzer One Point Calibration Screen 5

Manual 2 Point
Manual 2 Point calibration allows calibration at 2 user entered values.
Select the calibration type as Manual 2 Point and follow the steps given below:
1. Put sensor into Solution 1 and click Next.
2. The display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. Then the measurement value isdisplayed. Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value and click Next.
3. If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next.
4. The message advises to immerse your sensor into the second solution.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
6. After the process is completed, click OK to return to Calibrate menu.

Figure 182. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 1

157

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 183. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 2

Figure 184. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 3

Field
Solution
Measurement Value
Wait For Some More

Entry
This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value for solution 1.
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value.

Figure 185. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 4158

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Solution
Measurement Value
Input New Value

This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value for solution 1.
If the reading is not the intended value, edit it to the correct value.

Figure 186. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 5

Figure 187. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 6

Figure 188. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 7

159

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Solution
Measurement Value
Wait For Some More

6. 875PH Analyzer

Entry
This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value for solution 2.
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value.

Figure 189. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 8

Field

Entry

Solution
Measurement Value
Input New Value

This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value for solution 2.
If the reading is not the intended value, edit it to the correct value.

Figure 190. Sample 875PH Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 9

Temp Adjust
Temp Adjust calibration allows you to adjust a value if there is a difference in the temperature in
Status mode and actual temperature of the solution.
Select the calibration type as Temp Adjust and follow the calibration steps mentioned in “Manual
1 Point” calibration.

160

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 191. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1

Figure 192. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2

Field
Solution
Measurement Value
Wait For Some More

Entry
This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value.
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value.

Figure 193. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3161

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Field

Entry

Solution
Measurement Value
Input New Value

This parameter shows the stabilized measurement value.
If the reading is not the intended value, edit it to the correct value.

Figure 194. Sample 875PH Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4

Smart Cal
Smart Cal calibration provides a buffer recognition mechanism which locks in on the buffer value
most closely representing the combination of millivolts and temperature values being reported
from the sensor.
Select the calibration type as Smart Cal and follow the steps given below:
1. Put sensor into solution 1 and click Next.
2. The display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. Then the measurement value isdisplayed. Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or
select Wait to wait for another stabilized value and click Next.
3. The display shows which buffer is applicable. The message advises to immerse yoursensor into the second solution.
4. Repeat the procedure.
5. When complete, click OK to return to Calibrate menu.

Figure 195. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 1

162

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 196. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 2

Figure 197. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 3

Figure 198. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 4163

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 199. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 5

Figure 200. Sample 875PH Analyzer Smart Calibration Screen 6

AnalogThis procedure is used to trim the 4 mA and 20 mA output values of the flow meter to match theoutput of a plant standard measurement device.

Figure 201. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1

Field
Calibration Analog
Select Analog Output
To Trim

Entry
Select the output from the drop-down list. Choose from AO1 and
HART ANALOG.

Click Next to continue the calibration process for analog 4 mA.

164

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 202. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2

Figure 203. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3

Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

Specify a meter value.

Figure 204. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4
Select Yes to continue the process. Calibration will be done for analog 20 mA.
If you select No, enter the reference meter value.

Figure 205. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5165

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Figure 206. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6

Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

Specify a meter value.

Figure 207. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7

Figure 208. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8
Click Yes to save the changes, or No to abort the changes.

Figure 209. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 91666. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 210. Sample 875PH Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10
Click OK after the calibration is completed.

167

MI 020-520 – January 2014

6. 875PH Analyzer

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the main Diagnostic Menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time.

Figure 211. Sample 875PH Analyzer Faults Screen
NOTE

This screen displays a maximum of 100 faults that occurred.

168

6. 875PH Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

History
The history log includes all faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults temporarily suspended.

Figure 212. Sample 875PH Analyzer History Screen 1
NOTE

This screen displays up to 100 of the most current history log entries.

169MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 213. Sample 875PH Analyzer History Screen 2

170

6. 875PH Analyzer

7. 876PH TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 876PH Transmitter with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about this transmitter with HART
communication is available in the following document.


MI 611-262 Model 876PH Intelligent Transmitter for pH, ORP, and ISE
Measurement with HART Communications
NOTE

If you are using HART 7, note that the 876PH devices do no support HART 7
wireless communication.

171

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, and current PV
data.

Figure 214. Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Overview Screen (pH)172

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen displays PV data that is displayed on the Device Overview screen
plus additional measurement information.

Figure 215. Sample 876PH Transmitter Process Variables Screen (pH)

Device Configuration
General Setup Screen

Figure 216. Sample 876PH Transmitter General Setup Screen173

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Field

Entry

Measurement Type

Select the Measurement Type from the drop-down menu. Choose
from pH, ISE Concentration, mV (ORP), pH and ORP.
Select the Temperature Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.
Select the Analog Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, ORP (if Measurement type is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute, Glass Resistance (if glass diagnostic is on andelectrode is glass), Reference Resistance (if coat diagnostic is on), andATC Resistance.
Set the analog output/process variable lower range value.

Temperature Type

AnalogOutput/PV Map

AnalogOutput/PV LRVAnalogOutput/PV URV
Damping
Tag

Set the analog output/process variable upper range value.
Set the damping time in seconds.
Set the Tag name. You can enter up to 8 characters maximum.

SensorSensor configuration enables you to choose pH, ISE Concentration, mV (ORP), and pH and
ORP measurement types. Example screens are provided below for various measurement types.
If you select pH as Measurement Type, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 217.

Figure 217. Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (pH)174

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Measurement TypeElectrode

Select pH from the Measurement Type drop-down menu.
Select the electrode type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Glass, Antimony, and Other. If Other is chosen, enter the informationfor Slope and Isopotential pH as shown in Figure 218.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.

Temperature Type

Figure 218. Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (PH Measurement Type andOther Electrode Option)
Field

Entry

Measurement TypeElectrode

Select the Measurement Type from the drop-down menu.
Select the electrode type from the drop-down menu. Choose pH as
Measurement Type and Other as Electrode.
Enter the Slope. This is measured in mV/pH.
Enter the Isopotential pH.
Select the Temperature Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.

Slope
Isopotential pH
Temperature TypeIf you select ISE Concentration as Measurement Type, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 219.

175

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Figure 219. Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (ISE Concentration)
Field

Entry

Measurement Type

Select ISE Concentration as measurement type from the drop-down
menu.
Select the electrode type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Positive or Negative.
Set the isopotential concentration.
Set the valence value. Choose from Monovalent and Divalent.
Select the Temperature Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.

Electrode
Isopotential
ValenceTemperature TypeIf you select mV (ORP) as Measurement Type, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 220.

176

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 220. Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen mV (ORP)
Field

Entry

Measurement Type
Temperature Type

Select mV (ORP) from the Measurement Type drop-down menu.
Select the Temperature Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.

If you select pH and ORP as Measurement Type, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 221.

Figure 221. Sample 876PH Transmitter Sensor Screen (pH and ORP)

177

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Field

Entry

Measurement Type

Select the measurement type as pH and ORP from the drop-down
menu.
Select the electrode type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Glass, Antimony, and Other. If Other is chosen, enter the informationfor Slope and Isopotential pH as shown in Figure 218.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2 Wire Pt 100, 2 Wire Pt 1000, 3 Wire Pt 100, 3 Wire Pt 1000, and
3k Balco.
Set the slope value.
Set the Isopotential pH value.

Electrode

Temperature Type

Slope
Isopotential pH

Measurement Units Screen
If you select pH or pH and ORP as Measurement Type, select the values for pH resolution anddamping, as shown in Figure 222.

Figure 222. Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (pH/pH and ORP)
Field
pH Resolution
Damping

Entry
Select the pH resolution from the drop-down menu. Choose from0.01 and 0.1.
Set the damping time in seconds.

If you select ISE Concentration as Measurement Type, select the values for ISE units and ISE
scale, as shown in Figure 223.

178

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 223. Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (ISE Concentration
Measurement Type)
Field
Measurement UnitsISE Units

ISE Scale
Custom Label
Damping
Damping

Entry
Select the ISE units from the drop-down menu. Choose from %, ppm,
ppb, or Custom. If you choose Custom, enter the Custom Label namein the field.
Set the ISE scale value. Choose from 0.9990, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, or9999.
If you choose Custom from ISE Units drop-down menu, enter a label
in this field.
Set the damping value in seconds.

If you select mV (ORP) as Measurement Type, set the value for damping, as shown in Figure 224.

Figure 224. Sample 876PH Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Measurement Type ORP)
Field
Measurement Units
Damping

Entry
Set the damping value in seconds.

179

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Temperature
Temperature configuration enables you to choose automate or manual temperature modes.
If you select Auto as temperature mode, the temperature screen appears as shown in Figure 225

Figure 225. Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto)
Field

Entry

Temperature Units

Select the temperature units from the drop-down menu. Choose fromdegC (centigrade) or degF (fahrenheit).
Select Auto as the Temperature Mode from the drop-down menu.
If Temperature Mode is set to auto, set the Fail Temperature to thevalue at which you expect the process to be operating if the RTD fails.

Temperature Mode
Fail Temperature

If you select Manual as temperature mode, the temperature screen appears as shown in
Figure 226.

Figure 226. Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual)
Field

Entry

Temperature Units

Select the Temperature Units from the drop-down menu. Choose
from degC (centigrade) or degF (fahrenheit).
Select the Temperature Mode as Manual from the drop-down menu.
Set the temperature at a fixed temperature value.

Temperature Mode
Manual Temperature1807. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Temperature Compensation
Select the desired temperature compensation from the drop-down menu as shown in Figure 227.

Figure 227. Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Standard)
On selecting Ammonia (shown for measurement types pH and ORP only), enter the reference
temperature, as shown in Figure 228.

Figure 228. Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Ammonia)
If you select Custom from the Temperature Compensation drop-down menu, enter the following
fields as shown in Figure 229.

181

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Figure 229. Sample 876PH Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Reference
Set the reference temperature.
Temperature
Custom Compensation Curve
Number of Points
Set the number of points. The number of points can be specified from
2 to 21 points. Each point specifies a value at certain temperature.
TemperatureEnter the temperature values.
ValuesEnter the values.
If you select ORP as the Measurement Type, the Temperature Compensation screen does notappear.

182

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen
DigitalFigure 230. Sample 876PH Transmitter Digital Output Screen
Field

Entry

Primary Variable Map

Select the primary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP), Temperature, Glass
Resistance (if glass diagnostic is on and electrode is set to glass),
Reference Resistance (if coat diagnostic is on), ATC Resistance, andAbsolute.
Select the secondary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP), Temperature,
Absolute, Glass Resistance (if glass diagnostic is on and electrode is set
to glass), Reference Resistance (if coat diagnostic is on), and ATC
Resistance.
Select the tertiary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP), Temperature,
Absolute, Glass Resistance (if glass diagnostic is on and electrode is set
to glass), Reference Resistance (if coat diagnostic is on), and ATC
Resistance.
Select the quaternary variable map from the drop-down menu.
Choose from the Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute, Glass Resistance (if glass diagnostic is on, andelectrode is set to glass), Reference Resistance (if coat diagnostic is on),and ATC Resistance.

Secondary Variable Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map

183

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Output Screen - Analog

Figure 231. Sample 876PH Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field
Analog Output/PV
Map

Entry
Select analog output (PV map) from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Measurement, ORP (if sensor set to pH and ORP),
Temperature, or Absolute, Glass Resistance (if glass diagnostic is onand electrode is set to glass), Reference Resistance (if coat diagnosticon), and ATC Resistance.
NOTE

Analog Output/PV Map is the same as Primary
Variable Map for Digital Output.
Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
Analog Output Failsafe

184

Set analog output (PV low range value).
Set analog output (PV upper range value).
Select analog output failsafe value from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off, Fail Low, or Fail High. This is visible for HART version 5 ifpolling address set to 0, or for HART version is 6/7 if loop mode is in
active state.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen - HART

Figure 232. Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5)
Field
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select the polling address from the drop-down menu. Choose any
number from 0 to 15.
Displays the number of preambles to be sent in response message fromthe transmitter to the host.
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.

185

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
HART
Communications
Timeout
HART Version

7. 876PH Transmitter

Entry
Set the HART communications timeout. The HART
communications timeout is not visible if timeout mode is chosen as
Never Timeout.
Select HART version 5 from the drop-down menu.

Figure 233. Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 6 or 7)186

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Polling Address
mA Loop Mode
Number of Request
Preambles
Timeout Mode
HART
Communications
Timeout
HART Version

Entry
Select the polling address from the drop-down menu. Choose any
number from 0 to 63.
Select the mA Loop Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose Activeor Multidrop.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in response message fromthe transmitter to the host.
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.
Set the HART communications timeout. The HART timecommunications timeout is not visible if the timeout mode is chosen
as Never Timeout.
Select the HART version from the drop-down menu. Choose from 6
or 7.
NOTE

If you select HART 7, note that HART 7 wirelesscommunication is not supported.

187

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Local Display
You can choose the display format to be in single line, dual line, or triple line, as shown in
Figure 234.

Figure 234. Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Line 1/Line 2/Line 3

Local Display Timeout
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select the Display Format from the drop-down menu. Choose fromSingle Line, Dual Line, or Triple Line. Examples of each of the display
formats are shown to the right of the screen.
Select the line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, or Always Timeout. If you select Never Timeout, theFront Panel Timeout option is not visible.
NOTE

This is the same as the HART timeout mode above.
Front Panel Timeout

188

If there are no key clicks within the configured timeout period, thetransmitter reverts to measurement mode.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Single Line as the Display Format, the screen appears as shown in Figure 235.

Figure 235. Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line)
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format
Line 1

Local Display Timeout
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select Single Line from the Display Format drop-down menu.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.

If you select Dual Line as the Display Format, the screen appears as shown in Figure 236.

189

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Figure 236. Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Dual Line)
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format
Line 1

Line 2

Local Display Timeout
Timeout Mode

190

Entry
Select Dual Line from the Display Format drop-down menu.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the second line reading to be displayed from the drop-downmenu. Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Triple Line as the Display Format, the screen appears as shown in Figure 237.

Figure 237. Sample 876PH Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Triple Line)
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Line 1

Line 2 (If you choose
Dual Line or Triple Linedisplay format)
Line 3 (If you choose
the Triple Line display
format)Local Display Timeout
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select the Display Format from the drop-down menu. Select Triple
Line. Examples of each of the display formats are shown on the rightof the screen.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the second line reading to be displayed from the drop-downmenu. Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the third line reading to be displayed from the drop-downmenu. Choose from Measurement, ORP (if sensor is pH and ORP),
Temperature, Absolute Measurement, and Analog Output.
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.

191

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Auto Hold

Figure 238. Sample 876PH Transmitter Auto Hold Output Screen
Field
Auto Hold Mode

192

Entry
Select Auto Hold Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,On Present, or On Manual.
Auto Hold Mode Off: If you enter into configuration or calibrationmode, output will remain active.
On Present: If you enter into configuration or calibration mode,
output will remain at its current value.
On Manual: If you enter into configuration or calibration mode,
output will set to values specified in troubleshoot- loop Test.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Configuration
Diagnostic page enables you to set the diagnostic limits for all the diagnostic parameters, as shownin Figure 239.

Figure 239. Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Screen
Field
Diagnostic

Diagnostic Limits

Entry
Select the appropriate check box to set the diagnostic
parameters. You can select all of the diagnostic parameters, oreach of the following individually: Leakage, ATC Shot, ATCOpen, Compensation Range, Low Slope, Preamp Failure,
Coated Reference, Broken Glass, and Aging.
If you choose Measurement type as ORP, Aging and Low
Slope options are not visible. Similarly, Broken Glass option
is visible if the Measurement type is pH or pH/ORP, andelectrode is set to glass.
Diagnostic Limits are displayed for the corresponding
diagnostic selection.

If you select Low Slope as the diagnostic parameter, you need to set the diagnostic limits for Slope
Limit, as shown in Figure 239.
If you select Coated Reference as the diagnostic parameter, you will need to set the diagnostic
limit for Coat Limit, as shown in Figure 240.

193

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Figure 240. Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Limit for Coated Reference
If you select Broken Glass as diagnostic parameter, you need to set the diagnostic limit for Glass
Low Limit and Glass Cutoff, as shown in Figure 241.

Figure 241. Sample 876PH Transmitter Diagnostic Limits for Broken Glass194

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Passcode Access
Passcode Access screen enables the two levels of protection. Administrator access permits changing
all parameters in configuration whereas User Code access permits change and viewing access to
those areas specified by the administrator.

Figure 242. Sample 876PH Transmitter Passcode Access Screen
Field
Admin Passcode
User Passcode
User Change Allowed
User View Access

Entry
Set the administrator passcode.
Set the user passcode.
Select the appropriate check box against parameters to allow
the user to change it.
Select the check box to set access level for user to view theparameters.

195

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Device Information

Figure 243. Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
HART Tag
HART Long Tag
HART Descriptor
HART Message
Tag Name
Location
Device Name
Date of Last Calibration
Write Protect Mode

196

Entry
Set the HART tag name.
Set the HART long tag name. It is displayed for HART
version 6 or 7.
Set the HART descriptor.
Set the HART message.
Set the tag name.
Set the name of the location.
Set the name of the device.
Shows the date of last calibration.
Shows the Write Protect status of the device.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Save/Restore Configuration
The Save/Restore Configuration screen allows you to save and restore up to 2 user configurations
as shown in Figure 244.

Figure 244. Sample 876PH Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration screen
Field

Entry

Save/Restore Configuration
Save Configuration
To save the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1 or User Configuration 2 after
you have configured all the DTM parameters.
2. Click Save Configuration.
3. Click OK.
Restore Configuration
To restore the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1, User Configuration 2 orFactory Configuration depending on the configuration you
wish to restore.
2. Click Restore Configuration.
3. Click OK.

197

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of various parameters is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a
yellow triangle (warning), or a red cross mark (error). On most DTMs, if Configuration Changed
does not show a green checkmark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset Configuration Changed
Flag button on the lower left of the screen.

Figure 245. Sample 876PH Transmitter HART Status screen1987. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status Screen
The Device Status screen shows current status of the device. The status of various parameters iseasily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red
cross mark (error).

Figure 246. Sample 876PH Transmitter Device Status Screen
Field

Entry

Device Status for Measurement
Measurement
Shows the measurement status and value.
ORP
Shows the ORP status and value if the measurement type isselected as pH and ORP.
Temperature
Shows the Temperature status and value.
AbsoluteShows the Absolute parameter status and value.
Analog Output
Shows the Analog Output status and value.
Glass ResistanceShows the Glass Resistance status if the Glass diagnostic On
and measure type is chosen as pH or pH and ORP.
Reference Coating
Shows the Reference Resistance status if the Glass diagnostic
is On and measure type is chosen as pH or pH and ORP.
Display Status Detail Page Select this check box to display the Status Tree page.

199

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Status Tree Screen
The Status Tree screen shows the device status and allows to diagnose the device failures. The
screen shows the various parameters and the status of these parameters can be easily recognized by
the color of the parameters. The Green circle indicates the selected user configuration where as
the Grey circle indicates parameters the user has not selected. The Red circle indicates the error in
the device due to that parameters. The status screen appears as shown in Figure 247.

Figure 247. Sample 876PH Transmitter Status Tree Screen2007. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures:Parameters

Figure 248. Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen
Field
Stability
Smart Calibration
Buffers

Entry
Set the stability value in percentage.
Select the smart calibration buffers from the drop-down menu.
Choose from American, NIST, European, DIN, MERCK, JIS 8802,
and User Selectable. If Measurement type is pH, pH and ORP thenthe smart calibration buffers are visible.

201

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

User Selectable
If you select User Selectable as your smart calibration buffer, you can select up to seven buffers asshown in Figure 249.

Figure 249. Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters User Selectable Buffers
Field
User Selectable Buffers
Buffer1
Buffer2
Buffer3
Buffer4
Buffer5
Buffer6
Buffer7

202

pH Values
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.
Select one of the following values: 1.68, 4.01, 4.61, 6.87, 7.00, 9.18,
10.01, 12.45, custom pH or None.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Each buffer can be selected once. You can select Custom pH which requires a nominal value and aminimum of 2-21 points. If you choose a custom buffer, you must enter a nominal pH value forthe buffer and then establish a curve of temperature values and pH values as shown in Figure 250.

Figure 250. Sample 876PH Transmitter Cal Parameters User Selectable Custom pH Buffer

Field
Nominal
Number of Points
Temperature and Value

Entry
Enter the nominal pH.
Enter the number of points.
Enter the temperature and value for each point.

203

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Calibrate
The Calibrate screen enables you to calibrate the device as shown in Figure 251.

Figure 251. Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen
Field
Date of Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibrate
Number of Calibration
PointsType of Calibration

Entry
Displays the date of calibration.
Set the name of the operator.
Select the Calibrate from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, ORP, Restore ORP or Temperature.
Select the Number of Calibration Points from the drop-down menu.
Select the Type of Calibration from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Smart or Manual.

After you set the calibration values, click Next. The screen appears as shown in Figure 252.

Figure 252. Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 2
2047. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Click Next, the screen appears as shown in Figure 253.

Figure 253. Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 3
Click Next, the screen appears as shown in Figure 254.

Figure 254. Sample 876PH Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 4205

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

DAC Trim
In this procedure the transmitter controls the loop current to either 4 mA (zero) or 20 mA (span).
By providing the inputs to the following screens, the values indicated by a suitable reference like adigital multimeter, the transmitter can trim its output. DAC Trim performs 4 mA and 20 mA
calibration points respectively.

Figure 255. Sample 876PH Transmitter DAC Trim Screen

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the main Diagnostic Menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time. The Faults status screen appears
as shown in Figure 256.

Figure 256. Sample 876PH Transmitter Faults Screen206

7. 876PH Transmitter

Field
Suspend Faults
Resume Faults

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Click this button to suspend faults.
Click this button to resume faults.

NOTE

Suspend Faults, Resume Faults, and Clear History operations must be done fromthe front panel.
Faults Suspended state with time details appears as shown in Figure 257.

Figure 257. Sample 876PH Transmitter Faults Suspended State with Time Screen207

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

History Log
The history log includes all faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults temporarily suspended.
The history log appears as shown in Figure 258.

Figure 258. Sample 876PH Transmitter History Log Screen

208

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the analyzer, as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Off

Figure 259. Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Hold)
Field
Hold Mode

Entry
Select the Hold Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,
Hold Present Values and Manual Hold.

Hold Present Values

Figure 260. Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Hold Present Values)
Field
Hold Mode

Entry
Select Hold Present Values from the drop-down menu.

209

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

Manual Hold

Figure 261. Sample 876PH Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold)
Field
Hold Mode
Analog Output
PV Digital
Measurement
SV Digital Measurement
TV Digital
Measurement
QV Digital
Measurement

210

Entry
Select Manual Hold option from the Hold Mode drop-down menu.
Set analog output reading. If the HART mode is selected as
multidrop, then the Analog Output is not shown.
Set PV digital measurement.
Set SV digital measurement.
Set TV digital measurement.
Set QV digital measurement.

7. 876PH Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Firmware Upgrade
The Firmware Upgrade screen allows you to upgrade the firmware of device. It is required to
upload Flasher and Firmware Image file to device to upgrade the device firmware.
The firmware upgrade page appears as shown in Figure 262.

Figure 262. Sample 876PH Transmitter Firmware Upgrade Screen
Field
Communication Flasher
Selected File

Firmware Image File
Selected File

Entry
To upgrade device firmware:
1. Use the browse button and select the communication
flasher file. You need to select .rbin file type to upgrade thedevice.
2. Use the browse button and select the firmware image file.
You need to select .rbin file type to upgrade the device
firmware. The Communication Flasher and Firmware Image
File are necessary to upgrade the device firmware.
3. Click Start Upgrade.

211

MI 020-520 – January 2014

7. 876PH Transmitter

The upgrade normally takes around 90 minutes. The % completed and the Time
Remaining is shown on screen indicating the status of the device firmware upgrade.
! WARNING
Do not cancel the upgrade process while upgrading the device firmware. Interrupting
the upgrade process may cause the instrument to be left in a state where it is only
available for upgrades and may not operate normally.

212

8. 875EC Analyzer
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 875EC Analyzer with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about this Analyzer with HART
communication is available in the following documents

MI 611-224, Model 875EC Intelligent Electrochemical Analyzer for ElectrodelessConductivity Measurements

MI 611-227, 875 Series Intelligent Analyzers - Operation, Configuration, andCalibration Using a HART Communicator213

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information and the device information. The
current measurement, temperature, analog 1 output (PV) and HART analog (SV) data isrepresented in a graph.

Figure 263. Sample 875EC Analyzer Device Overview Screen
Field
HART
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Polling Address
Device Information
Calibration Date

Entry
This field shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of thedevice.
This field shows the tag number.
This field shows the HART message that is sent from the device whenrequested. The message can have a maximum of 32 characters.
This field shows the configured address of the device.
This field shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
NOTE

You can change the calibration date in “Device
Information”.
Device Software Version
Serial Number

214

This field shows the software version of the device.
This field shows the serial number of the device.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014NOTE

The scales for the measurement and temperature graphical representations are
updated based on the scale defined for the selected sensor.

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables and the measured values
assigned to the device variables of the currently running application.

Figure 264. Sample 875EC Analyzer Process Variables Screen

Field
Process Variables
Primary Variable
Temperature
Analog1 Output (PV)
HART Analog (SV)
Absolute
Secondary Variable
Tertiary Variable
Quaternary Variable

Entry
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to primaryvariable.
This field shows the current temperature.
This field shows the current PV value in mA units.
This field shows the current SV value in mA units.
This field shows the absolute value of the measurement in
conductivity units.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to secondary
variable.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to tertiary
variable.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to quaternary
variable.
215

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen is where you can specify a passcode that allows you to access the configurable
device parameters.
This screen shows the applications (such as 1, 2, or 3) that are preconfigured for the analyzer, andallows you to specify parameters for the preconfigured applications.

Figure 265. Sample 875EC Analyzer General Screen
Field
Passcode
Passcode

Level

216

Entry
Specify a passcode (valid) for configuring the device parameters. If you
enter the Level 3 passcode, you can only view the basic configuration
parameters. If you enter the Level 2 passcode, you are allowed to viewor change the basic configuration parameters. If you enter the Level 1
passcode, you can view or change any configuration parameters.
This field shows the passcode level.

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field
Application 1
Analog Output/PV
Map

Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
Damping

Application 2
Analog Output/PV
Map

Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
Damping

Application 3
Analog Output/PV
Map

Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
Damping

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Map a measurement for analog output for application 1 from thedrop-down list. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute,and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Specify the lower range value for analog output of application 1.
Specify the upper range value for analog output of application 1.
Select the damping time that is applied to the current output of
application 1. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, and 300
seconds.
Map a measurement for analog output for application 2 from thedrop-down list. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute,and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Specify the lower range value for analog output of application 2.
Specify the upper range value for analog output of application 2.
Select the damping time that is applied to the current output of
application 2. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, and 300
seconds.
Map a measurement for analog output for application 3 from thedrop-down list. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute,and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Specify the lower range value for analog output of application 3.
Specify the upper range value for analog output of application 3.
Select the damping time that is applied to the current output of
application 3. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, and 300
seconds.

NOTE

The applications are preconfigured in “Application”.

217

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

SensorThe Sensor screen is where you can specify the sensor type and the temperature features that areused for the preconfigured applications.

Figure 266. Sample 875EC Analyzer Sensor Screen

Field
SensorSensor Type

SensorCell Factor
Temperature Type

218

Entry
Select the sensor type from the drop-down list. Choose from 871EC,
871FT English, 871FT Metric, FT10, or Other.
If you choose Other, specify the Cell Factor.
The list of sensors vary for each of the sensor type. Select the sensor
from the drop-down list that is displayed for the selected sensor type.
• For 871EC, choose from SP, HP, LB, UT, RE, BW, TF, NL, EV,
AB, PN, and PX.
• For 871FT English, choose from 1C, 2C, 1D, 2D, 1E, 2E, 1F,
2F, 1G, 2G, 1H, 2H, 1J, 2J, 3C, 4C, 3E, 4E, 3F, 4F, 3G, 4G,
3H, 4H, 3J, and 4J.
• For 871FT Metric, choose from 1C, 2C, 1D, 2D, 1E, 2E, 1F, 2F,
1G, 2G, 1H, 2H, 3E, 4E, 3F, 4F, 3G, 4G, 3H, 4H, 3J, and 4J.
• For FT10, choose from FT10-08, FT10-12, and FT10-16.
This parameter appears if ‘Other’ is chosen as the sensor. Specify thecell factor between 0.0001 and 99.999. Refer to Figure 267.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down list. Choose from
100K Thermistor, RTD 2 Wire 100 Ω, RTD 2 Wire 1000 Ω, RTD 3
Wire 100 Ω, RTD 3 Wire 1000 Ω, 2W 100 Ω MIL, or 3W 100 ΩMIL.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 267. Sample 875EC Analyzer Sensor Screen (Sensor Type as Other)

Temperature
The Temperature screen allows you to configure parameters for temperature measurement for thepreconfigured applications.

Figure 268. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Screen (Manual Selection)

Figure 269. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Screen (Auto Selection)219

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Temperature
Temperature Units

Temperature Mode

Fail Temperature
Manual Temperature

8. 875EC Analyzer

Entry
Select the temperature units from the drop-down list. Choose fromdegC or degF. All references to temperature appear in the specified
units within the analyzer software.
Select the temperature mode from the drop-down list. Choose from
Automatic or Manual.
• In Automatic mode, the temperature follows the temperature
input RTD or thermistor “ATC” and you can set a temperature
Failsafe Signal value (in case the RTD or thermistor fails) at thetemperature at which you expect the process to be operating.
Refer to Figure 269.
• In Manual mode, the temperature can be set at a fixed temperature value and resistance inputs on the temperature terminal are
ignored.
This parameter appears when the temperature mode is set to‘Automatic’. Set a temperature that can be used in case of RTD failure.
This parameter appears if the temperature mode is set to ‘Manual’.
Specify a fixed temperature value.

Application
The Application screen is where you can preconfigure the analyzer for up to three distinct
applications. Each application can have its own (standard or custom) display, temperaturecompensation curve, chemical concentration curve (if applicable), and output configuration.
Each application is assigned an identification number (such as 1, 2, or 3).
If, in using the analyzer, you wish to change from one application to another, you can select theapplication 1, 2, or 3 in Application to Run. The entire application switches to that
preconfigured application. You can also choose ‘Auto’ or ‘Signal’ instead of an application
number.

220

‘Auto’ selection configures the analyzer to switch from one application to anotherwhen triggered by measurements above or below the established limits.

‘Signal’ selection configures the analyzer to change applications from an external
device connected to the analyzer signal inputs.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 270. Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen

Field

Entry

Number of Applications
Number of
Select the number of applications you want to preconfigure from theApplications
drop-down list. Choose from 1, 2, or 3.
Current Application This parameter shows the current application that is running.
Running Application
Application to Run
This parameter appears only if the analyzer is preconfigured to morethan 1 applications. Select the application you want to run from thedrop-down list. Choose from Application 1, Application 2,
Application 3, Auto, or Signal.
Auto

When Application to Run is set to ‘Auto’, you must establish the presets which trigger movementfrom one application to another. The switching from one application to another only takes a few
seconds and once a switch is made, another switch can occur within a few seconds.
Specify the values of Application 1 High, Application 2 Low, Application 2 High, andApplication 3 Low in the measurement units chosen for the application.
When the measurement value exceeds the Application 1 High preset, Application 2
runs.



When the value then exceeds the Application 2 High preset, Application 3 runs.

221

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

When the value decreases below the Application 3 Low preset, Application 2 runs.

When the value decreases below the Application 2 Low preset, Application 1 runs.

Figure 271. Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen (Auto Selection)

Field

Entry

Running Application
Application to Run
Select ‘Auto’ from the drop-down list.
Application 1 High Specify a value for application 1 high limit.
Application 2 Low
Specify a value for application 2 low limit.
Application 2 High Specify a value for application 2 high limit.
Application 3 Low
Specify a value for application 3 low limit.
NOTE

It is assumed that although the ranges of the applications must overlap, application
1 has the lowest conductivity value, application 2 is next, and application 3 has thehighest.
SignalWhen Application to Run is set to ‘Signal’, the analyzer changes applications from an external
device connected to the analyzer signal inputs. When one of the three application switching
inputs Digital Input 1, Digital Input 2, or Digital Input 3 changes from inactive to active state,
the corresponding application 1, 2, or 3 is activated. When first configured, operation starts withthe lowest configured application.

222

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 272. Sample 875EC Analyzer Application Screen (Signal Selection)

Field

Entry

Running Application
Application to Run
Select ‘Signal’ from the drop-down list.
Level
Set the active state level to Direct or Inverted from the drop-down list.
• If Direct, the application becomes active when the input switch
closes.
• If Inverted, it becomes active when the input switch opens.

Application 1
Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen is where you can configure units, scale, damping, and othermeasurement parameters.

Figure 273. Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen223

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units

Scale

Damping

8. 875EC Analyzer

Entry
Select the measurement units from the drop-down list. Choose frommS/cm, %, µS/cm, mS/m, S/m, and Custom.
• If you choose % you need to specify the chemical being measured.
• If you choose Custom you must specify other parameters associated with custom units.
This parameter is available when the measurement units are chosen
as mS/cm, µS/cm, mS/m, or S/m. The scale differs for each of theselected measurement units based on the sensor selected. Select thescale from the drop-down list that is displayed for the selected sensor
and the measurement units.
Select the damping time (in seconds) from the drop-down list. Choose
from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, or 300.

If you select % as the measurement units, you must specify the chemical that is being measured
and the concentration.

Figure 274. Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (% Selection)

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Chemical

224

Entry
Select measurement units as ‘%’ from the drop-down list.
This parameter appears when the measurement units are chosen as‘%’. Select the chemical that is being measured from the drop-downlist. Choose from NaCl, H3PO4, HCl, H2SO4 25C Ref, H2SO430C Ref, H2SO4 50C Ref, Oleum 0-10% Ref, Oleum 42-18% Ref,
HN03, NaOH 25C Ref, NaOH 50C Ref, NaOH 100C Ref, HF 0C
Ref, HF 25C Ref, KOH, KCl, or CH3COOH.

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field
Maximum
Concentration
Damping

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the maximum concentration. Maximum concentration varies
for different chemicals.
Select the damping time (in seconds) from the drop-down list. Choose
from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, or 300.

If you select Custom as the measurement units, you need to first determine if measurement in therange desired is feasible. Then, you need to specify Custom Units, Custom Scale, Base Units, Base
Scale, and the number of points to plot the custom measurement curve.

Figure 275. Sample 875EC Analyzer Measurement Units Screen (Custom Selection)

Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Custom Units
Custom Label

Entry
Select the measurement units as ‘Custom’ from the drop-down list.
Select the custom units from the drop-down list. Choose from %, g/l,
ppm, oz/gal, ppt, User Defined, or None.
This parameter appears for the ‘User Defined’ custom units. Specify aname for the units.
225

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field

Entry

Custom Scale
Base Units
Base Scale
Damping
Number of Points

Base Point
Custom Point

Select the scale for the custom units from the drop-down list. Choose
from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 99.999, 999.9, or 9999.
Select the base units from the drop-down list. Choose from mS/cm,µS/cm, mS/m, or S/m.
Select the scale for the base units from the drop-down list. Choose
from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, or 9999.
Select the damping time (in seconds) from the drop-down list. Choose
from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, or 300.
Specify the number of points to plot the compensation curve. You canspecify from 2 to 21 points. Based on the number of points you
specify, the entry fields are displayed to enter base and custom points.
Specify the base point within the scale specified for the base units.
Specify the custom point within the scale specified for the custom
units.

Temperature Compensation
The Temperature Compensation screen is where you can configure the temperaturecompensation for the chemical being measured. Temperature compensation adjusts themeasurement to a conductivity reading equivalent to that at the reference temperature.

Figure 276. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation

226

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select the compensation that represents your process application
Compensation
most closely. Choose from NaCl, Sea Water, NaOh 25C Ref, NaOh
50C Ref, NaOh 100C Ref, KOH, H3PO4, HCl, HNO3, KCl,
CH3COOH, H2SO4 25C Ref, H2SO4 30C Ref, H2SO4 50C Ref,
Oleum, HF 0C Ref, HF 25C Ref, Linear, Custom, Grn Liquor, Blk
Liquor, Absolute, or Dilute NaCl.
Select Absolute if temperature compensation is not used.
NOTE

If your application is not covered in the choices
available, you may use either Linear or Custom
temperature compensation.
NOTE

Temperature Compensation does not appear if measurement units was configured
as percent (%) since the analyzer applies the appropriate compensation
automatically.
Linear compensation can be used for a simple binary solution or when other compensation
choices are not appropriate for your application. By entering a linear slope value that isrepresentative of your solution’s conductivity change with temperature, the analyzer multiplies thefactor entered by the temperature deviation times the absolute conductivity. Therefore, if you
select Linear, enter the reference temperature and specify the slope of the linear compensation
curve (Lin Slope) between 0.5 and 5.0 %/°C.

Figure 277. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation (Linear Selection)

Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select ‘Linear’ as temperature compensation from the drop-downCompensation
list.
ReferenceSpecify the reference temperature.
Temperature
Linear Slope
Specify the linear slope between 0.5 and 5%/°C.

227

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

If you select Custom, you need to specify the number of points to plot the compensation curve.
To prepare the curve, you must select a solution of typical concentration and measure its
conductivity in precisely controlled temperature increments.

Figure 278. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temperature Compensation (Cusotom Selection)

Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select ‘Custom’ as temperature compensation from the drop-downCompensation
list.
ReferenceSpecify the reference temperature.
Temperature
Number of Points
Specify the number of points to plot temperature compensation curve.
Each point specifies a conductivity value at a certain temperature. You
can specify from 2 to 21 points. Based on the number of points you
specify, the entry fields to enter temperature and value points are
displayed.
Temperature (units) Specify the temperature based on the units selected fortemperature.
Value (units)
Specify a value based on the scale selected for the measurement unit.
It can be specified from 0 to five times the scale value chosen.

228

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

NOTE

1. The temperature values must be entered in increasing or decreasing order or the
display will read Slope Error.
2. Actual database saving of the compensation table is not performed until the lastpoint pair is entered.

OutputAnalog

The Analog screen allows you to configure the analog outputs in the analyzer. There are two
analog outputs - Analog Output 1 (PV), and HART Analog Output (SV), which can be mapped
to different measurements. You can specify the minimum and maximum range values for the
outputs, and a fail-safe signal for each output.

Figure 279. Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Analog (Failsafe as On)229

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)Primary Variable
Select a measurement to map the primary variable. Choose from
Map
Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, and Off.
Select Off if you are not using the output.
mA MinimumSpecify mA minimum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Analog Output 1
Specify the lower range value for Analog Output 1.
LRV
mA Maximum
Specify mA maximum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Analog Output 1
Specify the upper range value for Analog Output 1.
URV
Failsafe
Select failsafe mode from the drop-down list. Choose from On, Off,and Pulse.
mA Failsafe Value
This parameter appears only if the failsafe mode is ‘On’. Specify a failsafe output that is to be delivered for the analyzer faults and for criticalcell diagnostic faults when so configured.
HART Analog Output (SV)Secondary Variable
Select a measurement to map the secondary variable. Choose from
Map
Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, and Off.
Select Off if you are not using the output.
mA MinimumSpecify mA minimum value between 4mA and 20mA.
HART Analog
Specify the lower range value for HART Analog Output.
Output LRVmA Maximum
Specify mA maximum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
HART Analog
Specify the upper range value for HART Analog Output.
Output URV
Failsafe
Select failsafe mode from the drop-down list. Choose from On or Off.
NOTEThe Failsafe (HART) parameter does not have a‘Pulse’ option.
mA Failsafe Value

This parameter appears when the failsafe mode is ‘On’. Specify a failsafe output that is to be delivered for the analyzer faults and for criticalcell diagnostic faults when so configured.

NOTE

1. If a non-zero value is configured as the polling address, the HART Analog
Output (SV) displays only the ‘Secondary Variable Map’. Other parameters of
HART Analog Output will not be shown.

230

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Select the failsafe as ‘Pulse’ if you want to have the analyzer failure signal outputted with a pulsed
saw-tooth waveform of 0.5 mA. The waveform has a frequency of 10 Hz with 10 steps of 0.1 mA
increments.

Figure 280. Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Analog (Failsafe as Pulse)

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)Average
This parameter appears when the failsafe mode is ‘Pulse’. Specify
average output between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.
NOTE

1. The Failsafe (HART) parameter does not have a Pulse option.
2. mA Minimum and mA Maximum parameters are displayed when Number ofApplications > 2.

231

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

DigitalThe Digital screen allows you to map measurements to primary, secondary, tertiary, andquaternary variables.

Figure 281. Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Digital

Field
Digital Output
Primary Variable Map

Secondary Variable
Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map

232

Entry
The primary variable (PV) is the measurement configured for Analog
Output 1. Configure this parameter to represent one of themeasurements in the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, orAbsolute.
Select Off if you are not using the PV.
The secondary variable (SV) is the measurement configured for HART
Analog Output. Configure this parameter to represent one of themeasurements in the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, orAbsolute.
Select Off if you are not using the SV.
Configure the tertiary variable to represent one of the measurements inthe drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, or Absolute.
Select Off if you are not using the TV.
Configure the quaternary variable to represent one of the measurementsin the drop-down list: Measurement, Temperature, or Absolute.
Select Off if you are not using the QV.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Local Display

The Local Display screen is where you can configure the parameters for display.
If you select single mode configuration, you must select the measurements you want to show inthe line 1 of the display.

Figure 282. Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Single Line)233

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Line 1Bargraph Min
Bargraph Max
Display Timeout
Front Panel Timeout
Remote Timeout
Digital Comm
Timeout
LCD Adjust
LCD Adjust Value

234

8. 875EC Analyzer

Entry
Select the display format from the drop-down list. Choose from Dual,
Single, or Scan.
• Single: Displays a single measurement title, value, and unit on thelocal display.
• Dual: Displays two measurement titles, values, and units on thelocal display.
• Scan: Displays several selected measurements in sequence in a designated scan time.
This parameter appears if you are in single line mode. Select ameasurement from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.
Specify the minimum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Specify the maximum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Configure front panel timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.
Configure remote timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.
Configure digital communication timeout between 5 to 999 seconds.

This parameter allows you to adjust the brightness of the display. The
numbers (-9 to 0 to +9) shown on the display should only be used for
darkening or lightening the display.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Dual mode, you must select the measurements you want to show in line 1 and line 2parameters of the display.

Figure 283. Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Dual Line)

Field
Measurement Display
Line 2

Entry
This parameter appears if you are in dual line mode. Select ameasurement from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.

235

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

If you select Scan mode, you must specify which measurements you want to display in sequence,and the scan time.

Figure 284. Sample 875EC Analyzer Local Display (Scan)

Field
Measurement Display
Scan Time
Scan Data

236

Entry
Select the scan time from the drop-down list. Choose from 2, 5, 10, and20 seconds.
Select the measurements you want to display in sequence on the local
display. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1,
and HART.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Auto Service
The Auto Service screen allows you automate the process of cleaning and calibrating sensors.
When this service is activated, a signal is sent to the control instrument which automaticallysequences the removal of the sensor from the process, its cleaning, calibration, and reinstallation.
The Auto Service feature is available only if Number of Applications = 1.

Figure 285. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen

Field
Auto Service
Auto Service Type

Service Initiate
ManualSignaled
Scheduled
Input Trigger

Entry
Select the service type from the drop-down list. Choose from 1 Point
Offset, 1 Point Span, 2 Point Sol, 2 Point Bench, and Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Select this method to initiate the auto service manually.
Select this method to initiate the auto service by an input trigger.
Select this method to initiate the auto service by a set date or period. If
you select this method, you must select the schedule.
This parameter appears only for Signaled method. Select one of thefollowing options for input trigger.
• High - auto service is initiated when the input switch is closed.
• Low - auto service is initiated when the input switch is open.
237

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
User Solutions
Solution Value 1
Solution Value 2

Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T1)Time in Solution 1(T2)
Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T3)Time in Solution 2(T4)
Cleaning, Purging
Setup Time (T5)
Trip State

Service Hold

8. 875EC Analyzer

Entry
Specify a value for calibration solution 1.
This parameter is not available if the service type is ‘Auto-Clean’.
Specify a value for calibration solution 2.
This parameter appears if the auto service is chosen as 2 Point Sol or 2
Point Bench.
Set cleaning and purging setup time.
Specify the hold time in solution 1.
Set cleaning and purging setup time.
Specify the hold time in solution 2.
This parameter appears if the auto service is chosen as 2 Point Sol or 2
Point Bench.
Set cleaning and purging setup time.
This parameter appears if the auto service is chosen as 2 Point Sol or 2
Point Bench.
Select one of the following options from the drop-down list for alarm
trip state:• Energized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NO (2C
and 2NO) and an open contact between 1C and 1NC (2C and2NC).
• Deenergized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NC (2C
and 2NC) and an open contact between 1C and 1NO (2C and
2NO).
Select one of the following options for service hold:• On Present - holds all values and states at their present level.
• On Manual - sets all values and states at the levels specified in Holdmode.
• Off - select this option if you choose not to use Service Hold feature.

If you select Scheduled method, you must select the schedule for auto service.

238

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 286. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Daily)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Daily from the drop-down list.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

239

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 287. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Weekly)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Weekly from the drop-down list.
Day of Week
Select a day from the drop-down list.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

240

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 288. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Monthly)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Monthly from the drop-down list.
Day of Month
Select a day from 1 to 28 days of the month.
Time of Day
Specify the scheduled time from 00:00 to 23:59 in the format hh:mm.

241

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 289. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Period by Hours)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Period by Hours from the drop-down list.
Period of Hour
Specify the period of hours from 1 to 8760 hours.
Start Date
Specify a date from 1/01/1999 to 12/31/2098 as a start date.
Start Time
Specify a time from 00:00 to 23:59 hours as start time.

242

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 290. Sample 875EC Analyzer Auto Service Screen (Schedule - Period by Days)

Field

Entry

Service Schedule Configuration
Service Schedule
Select the service schedule as Period by Days from the drop-down list.
Period of Day
Specify the period of days from 1 to 365.
Start Date
Specify a start date from 1/01/1999 to 12/31/2098.
Start Time
Specify a start time from 00:00 to 23:59 hours.

243

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Alarm 1The Alarm 1 screen is where you can configure alarm parameters. Specify the alarm to one of thefollowing measurements or conditions: Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, or On Fault. The
alarm reacts if the measurement exceeds or drops below the set point.
It uses two controls - Hysteresis and Timed, to minimize chatter around the setpoint. Hysteresis
does this by using the measurement; and Timed, by using time.

Figure 291. Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection)

Field
Alarm 1
Alarm 1

Trip 1

Set Point 1
Control 1
Trig Time 1

On Time 1

244

Entry
Set the alarm 1 from the drop-down list. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, On Fault, or Off.
Select Off if you are not using the alarm.
Select trip 1 from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Trip Low - to active alarm on a low going condition.
• Trip High - to active alarm on a high going condition.
Specify the value at which you want the alarm to activate.
Select the control as Timed from the drop-down list.
Set the trig time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes. When you specify a trig
time, condition must exist continuously for the specified time period
before the alarm condition is met.
Specify the alarm feed time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Off Time 1
Fault Act 1

Entry
This is the delay time before the alarm can trigger again. Specify thedelay time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.
Select the alarm fault action from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Measurement Value - enables an alarm only when the measurement
exceeds the alarm set point.
• Valid Measurement - enables an alarm when the measurement
exceeds the set point and if one of the selected faults is present.
• Measurement and Fault - validates the cause when the measurement exceeds the setpoint. If the cause is a fault and not process
related, the alarm is disabled. You can select the faults from the listof alarm faults that are displayed below the alarm graph.
NOTE

This parameter is available only for users having accessto Level 1.
Trip State 1

Select the trip state from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Energized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NO (2C
and 2NO) and an open contact between 1C and 1NC (2C and2NC).
• Deenergized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NC (2C
and 2NC) and an open contact between 1C and 1NO (2C and
2NO).

NOTE

The alarm faults are displayed in the following two conditions:
Condition 1: Alarm is set to ‘On Fault’Condition 2: Alarm is set to ‘Measurement’ or ‘Temperature’ or ‘Absolute’ and theFault Act is set to ‘Measurement and Fault’.

Field
Alarm Faults
Analyzer Faults
4-20 Range
LeakageComp Range

ATC ShortandATC Open

Entry
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of analyzer faults.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement mapped to theanalog output is outside the range configured (4-20 mA).
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of severe liquid leakage into
the sensor.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measured temperature or
absolute conductivity or resistivity measurement is outside thetemperature or chemical compensation curve configured for thecurrently running application.
Select these check boxes to enable alarm if the resistance of thetemperature compensator is greater or less than the expected resistance ofthe device configured.
245

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Meas Range

Comm Faults

8. 875EC Analyzer

Entry
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement is over or underthe measurable range that is configured for the currently runningapplication.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of communication faults.

If Control is specified as Hysteresis, you must specify the hysteresis value.

Figure 292. Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)

Field
Control 1
Hysteresis 1

Entry
Select the control as Hysteresis from the drop-down list.
Specify the hysteresis value.

Alarm 2The Alarm 2 screen allows you to configure alarm 2 parameters to represent measurement,
temperature, absolute, or a fault. For detailed description of the parameters in this screen, refer to“Alarm 1”.

246

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 293. Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection)

Figure 294. Sample 875EC Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)247

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

NOTE

Each of the preconfigured applications can have its own measurement, display,temperature compensation, output, and alarm configuration. The applications must
be configured separately before use.

OutputHARTThe HART screen allows you to specify the HART polling address. Polling address is set to zeroby default. If you change it to a non zero value, it will result in loss of communication between the
DTM and the device.
This screen also shows the number of preambles that are sent in the response message.

Figure 295. Sample 875EC Analyzer Output HART

Field
HART
Polling Address
Preambles

Entry
Select a polling address between 0 and 15.
This field shows the number of preambles in the response message.

Auto Hold
The Auto Hold screen is where you can configure the analyzer to go into a Hold state while incalibration or configuration. It also automatically removes the Hold after calibration orconfiguration.

248

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 296. Sample 875EC Analyzer Output Autohold

Field
Auto Hold
Auto Hold Mode

Entry
This parameter is used to configure the analyzer to go into Hold mode
when in calibration or configuration. Select the auto hold mode from thedrop-down list. Choose from:• On Present - to hold all values and states at their current level• On Manual - to hold all values and states at desired levels• Off - to release the analyzer from Hold state

RemoteThe Remote screen allows you to configure parameters associated with a remote personal
computer or a printer.

Figure 297. Sample 875EC Analyzer Remote Screen249

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field
Update Rate Settings
UpdateFormatPort Settings
Baud Rate
Data and Parity
Stop Bits

Entry
Set the update frequency from the drop-down list. Choose from 5,
10, 30, 60, 120, 300, 600, 1200, 3600, or Off.
Select Off if you choose not to use this feature.
Select the format for the measurements report. Choose from Printer or
Spreadsheet.
Set the baud rate to 300, 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200.
Set the data and parity to 7 Odd, 7 Even, 8 Odd, 8 Even, or 8 None.
Set the stop bits to 1 or 2.

Diagnostic Configuration
The Diagnostics screen is where you select the diagnostic faults for which the error messages
should be displayed.

Figure 298. Sample 875EC Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen2508. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Passcode Access
The Passcode Access screen allows you to establish or change passcodes for the three levels of
security. Users having access to Level 1 can set or modify these passcodes in configuration mode.

Figure 299. Sample 875EC Analyzer Passcode Access Screen

Field
Passcode
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3

Entry
Specify the passcode for Level 1. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 2. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 3. It can be set from 0 to 9999.

NOTE

1. The table in the screen shows the access permissions of the users to each of thescreens.
‘X’ - user can edit
‘V’ - user can only view
2. The factory default pass code for all three levels is 0800.

251

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Restore Configuration
The Restore Configuration screen allows you to reset all data to default values.

Figure 300. Sample 875EC Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen

Field

Entry

Restore Configuration to Defaults
Restore Configuration Click Restore Configuration to reset the parameters to default values.

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays complete information of the device. It allows you to set
the tag name, tag number, HART message, location, device name, and date of last calibration.

Figure 301. Sample 875EC Analyzer Device Information Screen252

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Location
Device Name
Date of Last
Calibration
Model
Sales Order
Date
Time
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
Device Software
Revision
Write Protect
Write Protect Mode

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
This field shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Specify the HART tag name.
Specify the HART tag number.
Specify the HART message.
Specify the location where the measurements are done.
Specify the name of the device.
Set the date of last calibration.
This field shows the model of the device.
This field shows the sales order number.
This field shows the current date.
This field shows the current time.
This field shows the universal command set revision level.
This field shows the field device revision level.
This field shows the software revision level.
This field shows the hardware revision level.
This field shows the device software revision level.

This field shows the write protect status.

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red X (error).
If Configuration Changed does not show a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset
Configuration Changed Flag button on the lower right side of the screen.

253

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 302. Sample 875EC Analyzer HART Status Screen

Calibration
Parameters
The Parameters calibration screen allows you to define the parameters used by the analyzer inchecking for measurement and temperature stability when performing a calibration.

254

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 303. Sample 875EC Analyzer Parameters Calibration Screen

Field

Entry

Measurement Stability
Measurement Stability While performing calibration, the analyzer checks the stability inabsolute measurement before accepting the change. Set the measurement
stability as On or Off.
Time to Achieve
This parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured as
Stability‘On’. Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second
increments) to attain stability.
Amount ofThis parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured as
Fluctuation‘On’. Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time
period and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.
Temperature Stability
Temperature Stability
While performing calibration the analyzer checks the stability intemperature before accepting the change. Set the temperature stability as
On or Off.
Time to Achieve
This parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured as ‘On’.
Stability
Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second increments) toattain stability.
Amount ofThis parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured as ‘On’.
Fluctuation
Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time period
and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.
255

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Field

Entry

Local AC Power
Local AC Power

If the analyzer uses 24 V dc supply voltage, you must specify Local AC
Power as 50 Hz or 60 Hz from the drop-down list, to best filter thereadings.

NOTE

The Local AC Power can be specified from the front panel display or the PC-Basedconfigurator. It cannot be done from a HART Communicator.

Bench
The Bench calibration is used to perform a calibration using theoretical inputs or to return to thestored factory default calibration. It is a sensor/analyzer calibration accomplished by using specificresistance values input via a decade box or discrete resistors. This calibration is not subject toimpurities in a solution or temperature variations.

Figure 304. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 1
Step 1:
Specify the following parameters and click Next.

Field
Calibration Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Bench Calibration

256

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
From the drop-down list of preconfigured applications, select theapplication to perform the calibration.

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 305. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 2
Step 2:
Suspend the sensor in air and away from all objects and click Next. If Measurement Stability is
configured Off, the display reads Stability Off. If Measurement Stability is configured On, thedisplay reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. Then the measurement value is displayed.

Figure 306. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 3
Step 3:
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or select Wait to wait foranother stabilized value, and click Next.

Figure 307. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 4
Step 4:
If the reading is not correct, adjust it to the correct value and click Next.

257

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 308. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 5
Step 5:Click Next and repeat steps 3 and 4 for the following screens.

Figure 309. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 6

Figure 310. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 7

Figure 311. Sample 875EC Analyzer Bench Calibration Screen 8
Step 6:After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to the Calibration menu.
258

8. 875EC Analyzer

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Solution
The Solution calibration is used to perform a calibration using real solutions. This process allows
you to calibrate the cell and analyzer together based upon solution conductivity. It enables you toenter or edit the conductivity values of your solution.
Before doing a solution calibration, check that the temperature in Status mode agrees with theactual temperature of your solution. If there is a difference, the actual temperature should beentered before beginning your calibration. After specifying the temperature, you can perform asingle point offset calibration, or a single point span calibration, or 2-point solution calibration.
NOTE

A 2 Point calibration must be done before using a 1 Pt Offset or 1 Pt Spancalibration.

1 Pt Offset
The One Point Offset calibration can be used if you are correcting for a shift in system zero to bias
the measurement by a constant value.

Figure 312. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 1
Step 1:
Specify the following parameters and click Next. The Display advises to put the sensor in thesolution.

Field
Solution Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration Type
Solution Calibration

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
Select the calibration as ‘1 Pt Offset’ from the drop-down list.
From the drop-down list of preconfigured applications, select theapplication to perform the calibration.

259

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 313. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 2
Step 2:
Put the sensor in the solution and click Next. The display reads Stabilizing until stability isachieved. Then the measurement value is displayed.

Figure 314. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 3
Step 3:
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or select Wait to wait foranother stabilized value and click Next.

260

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 315. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 4
Step 4:
If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next.

Figure 316. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Offset Calibration Screen 5
Step 5:After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to Calibration menu.

1 Pt Span
The 1 Pt Span calibration can be used to correct for a shift in system span and should be used at
the higher end of the measurement range chosen.
Select the calibration type as ‘1 Pt Span’ and follow the calibration steps mentioned for “1 Pt
Offset” calibration.

261

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 317. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 1

Figure 318. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 2

Figure 319. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 3262

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 320. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 4

Figure 321. Sample 875EC Analyzer One Point Span Calibration Screen 5

2 Point
The 2 Point calibration allows calibration at 2 user entered values.

Figure 322. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 1263

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Step 1:
Specify the following parameters and click Next. The Display advises to put the sensor in thesolution 1.

Field
Solution Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration Type
Solution Calibration

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
Select the calibration as ‘2 Point’ from the drop-down list.
From the drop-down list of preconfigured applications, select theapplication to perform the calibration.

Figure 323. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 2
Step 2:
Put sensor into Solution 1 and click Next. The display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved.
Then the measurement value is displayed.

Figure 324. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 3264

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Step 3:
Select Accept from the drop-down list to accept the stabilized value or select Wait to wait foranother stabilized value and click Next.

Figure 325. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 4
Step 4:
If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next. The message advises toimmerse your sensor into Solution 2.

Figure 326. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 5
Step 5:
Put the sensor in Solution 2 and repeat steps 3 and 4 for the following screens.

265

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 327. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 6

Figure 328. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 7

Figure 329. Sample 875EC Analyzer Two Point Calibration Screen 8
Step 6:After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to Calibration menu.

266

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Temp Adjust
Temp Adjust calibration allows you to adjust a value if there is a difference in the temperature in
Status mode and actual temperature of the solution. You can specify values between -20 to 200°C
or -4 to +392°F.
Select the calibration type as ‘Temp Adjust’ and follow the calibration steps mentioned for “1 Pt
Offset” calibration.

Figure 330. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1

Figure 331. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2

Figure 332. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3267

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 333. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4

Figure 334. Sample 875EC Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 5

Analog
The Analog calibration allows you to tune the 4 mA and 20 mA values of the analog outputs.

Figure 335. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1

Field
Calibration Analog
Select Analog Output
To Trim

Entry
Select the output from the drop-down list. Choose from AO1 and
HART ANALOG.

Click Next to continue the calibration process for analog 4 mA.

268

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 336. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2

Figure 337. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3
Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

Specify a meter value.

Figure 338. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4
Select Yes to continue the process. Calibration will be done for analog 20 mA.
If you select No, enter the reference meter value.

Figure 339. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5269

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

Figure 340. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6
Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

Specify a meter value.

Figure 341. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7

Figure 342. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8
Click Yes to save the changes, or No to abort the changes.

Figure 343. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 9270

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 344. Sample 875EC Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10
Click OK after the calibration is completed.

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the main Diagnostic Menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time.

Figure 345. Sample 875EC Analyzer Faults Screen
NOTE

This screen displays a maximum of 100 faults that occurred.

271

MI 020-520 – January 2014

8. 875EC Analyzer

History
The history log includes all faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults temporarily suspended.

Figure 346. Sample 875EC Analyzer History Screen 1
NOTE

This screen displays up to 100 of the most current history log entries.

272

8. 875EC Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 347. Sample 875EC Analyzer History Screen 2273

MI 020-520 – January 2014274

8. 875EC Analyzer

9. 876EC TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 876EC Transmitter with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about this transmitter with HART
communication is contained in the following document.


MI 611-261 Model 876EC Intelligent Electrochemical Transmitter for ElectrodelessConductivity Measurements with HART Communications

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, and current PV
data.

Figure 348. Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Overview Screen275

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen displays the PV data along with additional information that isavailable on the Device Overview screen.

Figure 349. Sample 876EC Transmitter Process Variables Screen (Measurement)

Device Configuration
General Setup Screen
The General Setup screen enables you to select the sensor type, temperature type, and set the tag
name.

Figure 350. Sample 876EC Transmitter General Setup Screen276

9. 876EC Transmitter

Field
GeneralPassword
Sensor Type
Temperature TypeTag
Application 1
Analog Output/PV
Map
Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
Damping

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Enter the password.
Select the sensor type from the drop-down menu. Choose from871EC, 871FT English, 871FT Metric, FT10, and Other.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000, Mil
RTD, and 100K Thermistor.
Set the tag name. You can enter a maximum of 8 characters.
Select the analog output from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, and ATC
Resistance.
Set the analog output/process variable lower range value.
Set the analog output/process variable upper range value.
Set the damping time in seconds.

If you have selected more than one application, the screen appears as shown in Figure 351.

Figure 351. Sample 876EC Transmitter General Setup Screen (3 Applications)277

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

SensorThe Sensor screen enables you to select the Sensor type, Temperature Type, and 871EC Type.
Example screens are provided below for various sensor types.
If sensor type 871EC is selected, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 352.

Figure 352. Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (871EC)
Field
Sensor Type871EC Type
Temperature Type

Entry
Select 871EC as the sensor type from the drop-down menu.
Select the 871EC type from the drop-down menu. Choose from SP,
HP, LB, UT, RE, BW, TF, NL, EV, AB, PN, and PX.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000, Mil
RTD, and 100K Thermistor.

If sensor type 871FT English or 871FT Metric is selected, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 353.

278

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 353. Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (871FT Type)
Field

Entry

Sensor Type
871FT Type

Temperature Type

Select 871FT English or 876FT Metric as the sensor type from thedrop-down menu.
Select the 871FT type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
871FT-1C, 871FT-2C, 871FT-1D, 871FT-2D, 871FT-1E,
871FT-2E, 871FT-1F, 871FT-2F, 871FT-1G, 871FT-2G, 871FT-1H,
871FT-2H, 871FT-1J, 871FT-2J, 871FT-3C, 871FT-4C, 871FT-3E,
871FT-4E, 871FT-3F, 871FT-4F, 871FT-3G, 871FT-4G, 871FT-3H,
871FT-4H, 871FT-3J, and 871FT-4J.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000, Mil
RTD, and 100K Thermistor.

If sensor type EP307 is selected, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 354.

Figure 354. Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (EP307)

Field
Sensor Type
Temperature Type

Entry
Select EP307 as the sensor type from the drop-down menu.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000, Mil RTD,
and 100K Thermistor.

279

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

If sensor type FT10 is selected, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 355.

Figure 355. Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (FT10 Type)
Field

Entry

Sensor Type
FT10 Type
Temperature Type

Select FT10 as the sensor type from the drop-down menu.
Select the FT10 type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
FT10-08, FT10-12, and FT10-16.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000,
Mil RTD, and 100K Thermistor.

If sensor type Other is selected, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 356.

Figure 356. Sample 876EC Transmitter Sensor Screen (Other)
Field
Sensor Type
Temperature Type

280

Entry
Select the sensor type as Other from the drop-down menu.
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100, 3Wire Pt 1000,
Mil RTD, and 100K Thermistor.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Applications
The Applications screen enables you to select up to three distinct applications you want topreconfigure. Each application will have its own measurement, temperature configuration,
temperature compensation curve, display, and output configuration.
The Number of Applications screen appears as shown in Figure 357.

Figure 357. Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications Screen
Field
Number ofApplications

Entry
Select the number of applications you want to preconfigure from thedrop-down menu. Choose from 1, 2, and 3.

If the number of applications is selected as 2, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 358.

Figure 358. Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications Screen (with 2 Applications)281

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

9. 876EC Transmitter

Entry

Number of Applications
Number of
Select the number of applications as 2 from the drop-down menu.
Applications
Application 1 NameEnter the application 1 name.
Application 2 NameEnter the application 2 name.
Running Application
Application to Run
Specify the application you want to use by selecting the application
number as 1, 2, or Auto from the drop-down menu. If Auto isselected, enter the information for App 1 High Trigger and App 2 Low
Trigger as shown in Figure 358.
Establish the preset that will trigger the application movement fromone application to another. Enter the value for application 1 highlimit. This is measured in mS/cm.
Enter the value for application 2 lowest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.
If the number of applications is selected as 3, the following fields appear as shown in Figure 359.

Figure 359. Sample 876EC Transmitter Number of Applications - Running Application Selection
Screen (with Auto Selected for Application to Run)282

9. 876EC Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Number of Applications
Number of
Select the number of applications as 3 from the drop-down menu.
Applications
Application 1 NameEnter the application 1 name.
Application 2 NameEnter the application 2 name.
Application 3 NameEnter the application 3 name.
Running Application
Application to Run
Specify the application, by selecting Auto from the drop-down menu.
App 1 High Trigger
Establish the preset that will trigger the application movement fromone application to another. Enter the value for application 1 highlimit. This is measured in mS/cm.
App 2 Low Trigger
Enter the value for application 2 lowest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.
App 2 High Trigger
Enter the value for application 2 highest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.
App 3 Low Trigger
Enter the value for application 3 lowest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.

Measurement
The Measurement Units screen enables you to select the measurement unit and base display scale
as shown in Figure 360.

Figure 360. Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen
Field
Measurement Units
Units
Base Display Scale

Entry
Select a measurement unit from the drop-down menu. Choose from
µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, S/m, %, and Custom.
Set base display scale value from the drop-down menu. Choose from0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and 9999.
283

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

If you select % from the Units drop-down menu, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 361.

Figure 361. Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Units % Selection)
Field

Entry

Measurement Units
Units
Base Measurement
Units

Select % from the Units drop-down menu.
Set Base Measurement Units value from the drop-down menu. Choose
from µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, and S/m.

ChemicalCompensation

Damping

Select chemical compensation value from the drop-down menu.
Choose from NaCl, KCl, CH3COOH, H3PO4, HCI, H2SO4,
Oleum, HNO3, NaOH, KOH, and HF.
If you select H2SO4, Oleum, NaOH or HF, the Conc Range fieldappears as shown in Figure 362.
Enter Damping.

Figure 362. Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Units % Selection - Conc
Range)

284

9. 876EC Transmitter

Field
Conc Range

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
If you select H2SO4 as Chemical Compensation, choose 25C Ref,
30C Ref, or 50C Ref from the Conc Range drop-down menu.
If you select Oleum as Chemical Composition, choose 42-18% or
0-10% from the Conc Range drop-down menu.
If you select NaOH as Chemical Composition, choose 25C Ref,
50C Ref, or 100C Ref from the Conc Range drop-down menu.
If you select HF as Chemical Composition, select 0C Ref or 20C
Ref from the Conc Range drop-down menu.

If you select Custom from the Units drop-down menu, the following fields appear as shown in
Figure 363.

Figure 363. Sample 876EC Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Number of Points Selection)285

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

9. 876EC Transmitter

Entry

Measurement Units
Units
Custom Units

Select Custom from the Units drop-down menu.
Select Custom Units from the drop-down menu. Choose from %, g/l,
ppm, oz/gal, ppt, user defined, and none.
Custom Units Scale
Select the Custom Units Scale from the drop-down menu. Choose
from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and 9999.
Base Measurement
Set Base Measurement Units value from the drop-down menu. Choose
Unitsfrom µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, and S/m.
Base Display Scale
Set the base display scale value from the drop-down menu. Choose
from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and 9999.
Custom Concentration Table
Number of Points
Specify the number of points to plot the concentration curve. The
number of points can be specified from 2 to 21.

Temperature
The Temperature configuration enables you to select auto or manual temperature modes.
If you select Auto as Temperature Mode, the temperature screen appears as shown in Figure 364.

Figure 364. Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Screen (Auto as Temperature Mode)
Field

Entry

Temperature Units

Select the temperature units from the drop-down menu. Choose fromdegC (Centigrade) or degF (Fahrenheit).
Select Auto from the Temperature Mode drop-down menu.
If Temperature Mode is set to Auto, set the Fail Temperature to thevalue at which you expect the process to operate if the RTD fails.

Temperature Mode
Fail Temperature

If you select Manual as Temperature Mode, the temperature screen appears as shown in
Figure 365.

286

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 365. Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual)
Field

Entry

Temperature Units

Select the temperature units from the drop-down menu. Choose fromdegC (Centigrade) or degF (Fahrenheit).
Select Manual from the drop-down menu.
Set the temperature at a fixed temperature value.

Temperature Mode
Manual Temperature

Temperature Compensation
Select the desired Temperature Compensation from the drop-down menu as shown in Figure .

Figure 366. Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen287

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Temperature
Compensation

9. 876EC Transmitter

Entry
Select the temperature compensation from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Absolute, dilute NaCl, NaCl, Sea Water, KCl,
CH3COOH, H3PO4, HCI, H2SO4, Oleum, HNO3, NaOH, KOH,
HF, Green Liquor, Black Liquor, Linear, and Custom.

If you select Linear from the Temperature Compensation drop-down menu, enter the values forthe other fields as shown in Figure 367.

Figure 367. Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Linear)

Field
Temperature
Compensation
Reference
Temperature
Linear Slope

Entry
Select Linear from the drop-down menu.
Select the reference temperature from the drop-down menu. Choose
from 0.0 degC Ref, 20 decC Ref, 25 decC Ref, 30 decC Ref, 50 decCRef, and 100 decC Ref.
Set the Linear Slope.

If you select Custom from the Temperature Compensation drop-down menu, the following fields
appear as shown in Figure 368.

288

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 368. Sample 876EC Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Reference
Select the reference temperature from the drop-down menu. Choose
Temperaturefrom 0.0 degC Ref, 20 degC Ref, 25 degC Ref, 30 degC Ref, 50 degCRef, and 100 degC Ref.
Custom Compensation Curve
Number of Points
Set the number of points. The number of points can be specified from
2 to 21 points. Each point specifies a value at certain temperature.
TemperatureEnter the temperature values.
ValuesEnter the values.

289

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

OutputOutput Screen - Digital

Figure 369. Sample 876EC Transmitter Digital Output Screen
Field

Entry

Primary Variable Map

Select the primary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, and ATC
Resistance.
Select the secondary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration and ATC
Resistance.
Select the tertiary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, and ATC
Resistance.
Select the quaternary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, and ATC
Resistance.

Secondary Variable Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map

290

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen - Analog

Figure 370. Sample 876EC Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field

Entry

Analog Output/PV Map

Select analog output (PV Map) from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, and ATC
Resistance.
NOTE

Analog Output/PV Map is the same as Primary
Variable Map for Digital Output.
Analog Output/PV LRVAnalog Output/PV URV
Analog Output Failsafe

Set analog output (PV low-range value).
Set analog output (PV upper-range value).
Select analog output failsafe value from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off, Fail Low, and Fail High. This is visible for HART version 5
if polling address is set to 0, or for HART version 6/7 if loop mode isin active state.

291

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Transmitter Display
You can choose the display format to be in single line, double line, or triple line as shown in
Figure 371.

Figure 371. Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Entry

Select the display format from the drop-down menu. Choose fromSingle Line, Double Line, or Triple Line. Examples of each of thedisplay formats are shown on the right side of the screen.
Line 1/Line 2
Select the line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute Measurement,
Concentration, and Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, and Always Timeout. If you select Never Timeout, theFront Panel Timeout option is not visible. Invensys recommends
Always Timeout.
Front Panel Timeout
If there is no user action on the keys within the configured timeout
period, the transmitter reverts to measurement mode.

292

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select single line in the display format, the local display screen appears as shown in
Figure 372.

Figure 372. Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line)

Field

Entry

Measurement Display
Display Format
Line 1

Select Single Line from the drop-down menu.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute Measurement,
Concentration, and Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, and Always Timeout.
Front Panel Timeout
Enter the time in seconds for the front panel timeout.

293

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

If you select Triple Line for the Display Format, the local display screen appears as shown in
Figure 373.

Figure 373. Sample 876EC Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Triple Line)
Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Entry

Select the display format from the drop-down menu. Select Triple
Line. Examples of each of the display formats are shown on the rightside of the screen.
Line 1/Line 2/Line 3
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute Measurement,
Concentration, and Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, and Always Timeout.
Front Panel Timeout
Enter the time in seconds for the front panel timeout.

294

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Output Screen - HART

Figure 374. Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5)295

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Field
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select the polling address from the drop-down menu. Choose anumber from 0 to 15.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in the response message
from the transmitter to the host.
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, and Always Timeout.
NOTE

This is the same as the timeout mode for the front
panel.
HART
Communications
Timeout
HART Version

Set the HART communications timeout. The HART
communications timeout is not visible if timeout mode option
selected is Never Timeout.
Select HART version 5 from the drop-down menu.

If HART version 6 or 7 is selected, the screen appears as shown in Figure 375.

296

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 375. Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 6 or 7)
Field
Polling Address
mA Loop Mode
Number of Request
Preambles
Timeout Mode

Entry
Select the polling address from the drop-down menu. Choose any
number from 0 to 63.
Select the mA Loop Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Active and Multidrop.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in response message fromthe transmitter to the host.
Select the timeout mode. Choose from Never Timeout, Online
Timeout Only, and Always Timeout.

297

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Field

Entry

HART
Communications
Timeout
HART Version

Set the HART communications timeout. The HART
communications timeout is not visible if the timeout mode option
selected is Never Timeout.
Select the HART version from the drop-down menu. Choose from 6
and 7.
NOTE

If you select HART 7, note that HART 7 wirelesscommunication is not supported.

Auto Hold

Figure 376. Sample 876EC Transmitter Auto Hold Output Screen
Field
Auto Hold Mode

298

Entry
Select the Auto Hold Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Off, On Present, or On Manual.
Auto Hold Mode Off: If you enter into configuration or calibrationmode, output will remain active.
On Present: If you enter into configuration or calibration mode,
output will remain at its current value.
On Manual: If you enter into configuration or calibration mode,
output will be set to values specified in troubleshoot-loop Test.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Configuration
The Diagnostic configuration enables you to configure the fault messages that appear on yourdisplay.

Figure 377. Sample 876EC Transmitter Diagnostic Configuration Screen299

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Passcode Access
The Passcode Access screen provides two levels of protection. Administrator access permitschanging all parameters in the configuration, whereas User Code access permits changing andviewing access to those areas as specified by the administrator as shown in Figure .

Figure 378. Sample 876EC Transmitter Diagnostics Configuration

Field
Admin Passcode
User Passcode
User Change Allowed
User View Access

300

Entry
Set the administrator passcode.
Set the user passcode.
Select the check box against each of the individual parameters
to allow the user to change it.
Select the required check box against individual parameter to
set access for a user to view the parameters.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Information

Figure 379. Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
HART Tag
HART Long Tag
HART Descriptor
HART Message
Tag Name
Location
Device Name
Date of Last Calibration
Write Protect Mode

Entry
Displays the application manufacturer name.
Set the HART tag name.
Set the HART long tag name. It is displayed for HART
version 6 or 7.
Set the HART descriptor.
Set the HART message.
Set the tag name.
Set the name of the location.
Set the name of the device.
Shows the date of last calibration.
Shows the Write Protect status of the device.

301

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Save/Restore Configuration
The Save/Restore Configuration screen allows you to save and restore up to 2 user configurations
as shown in Figure 380.

Figure 380. Sample 876EC Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration Screen
Field

Entry

Save/Restore Configuration
Save Configuration
To save the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1 or User Configuration 2 after
you have configured all the DTM parameters.
2. Click Save Configuration.
3. Click OK.
Restore Configuration
To restore the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1, User Configuration 2, orFactory Configuration depending on the configuration you
want to restore.
2. Click Restore Configuration.
3. Click OK.

302

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red cross mark (error). On most DTMs, if Configuration Changed does
not show a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset Configuration Changed Flagbutton on the lower left side of the screen.

Figure 381. Sample 876EC Transmitter HART Status Screen303

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Device Status
The Device Status screen shows current status of the device. The status of each parameter is easily
recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red crossmark (error).

Figure 382. Sample 876EC Transmitter Device Status Screen
Field
Measurement Status
Measurement
Temperature
Absolute
Analog Output
ATC Resistance
Display Status Detail Page

304

Entry
Shows the measurement status and value.
Shows the Temperature status and value.
Shows the Absolute parameter status and value.
Shows the Analog Output status and value.
Shows the ATC Resistance status and value.
Select this check box to display the Status Tree page.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Status Tree Screen
The Status Tree screen shows the device status and allows to diagnose the device failures. The
screen shows various parameters and the status of each of these parameters can be easily
recognized by their color. A green circle indicates the selected user configuration and a grey circle
indicates parameters the user has not selected. A red circle indicates that there is an error.

Figure 383. Sample 876EC Transmitter Status Tree Screen

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures:Parameters
The Cal Parameters screen allows you to set the Stability Factor in terms of percentage as shownin Figure 384.

305

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Figure 384. Sample 876EC Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen
Field

Entry

Stability

The Stability parameter sets the measurement and temperaturestability. It can be set from 25 through 1000%. 25% produces themost stable measurement and temperature measurements. Therefore it
causes the longest calibration time. Invensys recommends 100% for
new installations.

Calibrate
The Calibrate screen enables you to calibrate a device as shown in Figure 385.

Figure 385. Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen
Field
Date of Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibrate
Number of Calibration
PointsType of Calibration

306

Entry
Shows the date of calibration.
Set the name of the operator.
Select the Calibrate from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement and Temperature.
Select the number of calibration points from the drop-down menu.
Select the type of calibration from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Process and Manual.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

After you set the calibration values, click Next. The screen appears as shown in Figure 386.

Figure 386. Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 2
Click Next, the screen appears as shown in Figure 387.

Figure 387. Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 3
Enter known calibration value and click Next, the screen appears as shown in Figure 388.

307

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Figure 388. Sample 876EC Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen 4

DAC Trim
In this procedure, the transmitter controls the loop current to either 4 mA (zero) or 20 mA (span).
By providing the inputs to the following screens, the values indicated by a suitable reference like adigital multimeter, the transmitter can trim its output. DAC Trim performs 4 mA and 20 mA
calibration points.

Figure 389. Sample 876EC Transmitter DAC Trim Screen308

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the Troubleshooting menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time. The Faults status screen appears
as shown in Figure 390.

Figure 390. Sample 876EC Transmitter Faults Screen309

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

History Log
The history log includes all the faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults that are temporarily suspended.
The history log appears as shown in Figure 391.

Figure 391. Sample 876EC Transmitter History Log Screen

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the analyzer as a calibration source for checking other
instruments in the loop.

Off

Figure 392. Sample 876EC Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Off)Field
Hold Mode

310

Entry
Select the hold mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,
Hold Present Values, and Manual Hold.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Manual Hold

Figure 393. Sample 876EC Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold)
Field
Hold Mode
Analog Output

PV Digital
Measurement
SV Digital Measurement
TV Digital
Measurement
QV Digital
Measurement

Entry
Select Manual Hold option from the drop-down menu.
Set analog output reading. If the mA Loop Mode in the HART
screen is selected as multidrop, then the Analog Output is notshown.
Set the PV digital measurement.
Set the SV digital measurement.
Set the TV digital measurement.
Set the QV digital measurement.

311

MI 020-520 – January 2014

9. 876EC Transmitter

Firmware Upgrade
The Firmware Upgrade screen allows you to upgrade the firmware of device. The firmware
upgrade page appears as shown in Figure 394.

Figure 394. Sample 876EC Transmitter Firmware Upgrade Screen
Field
Communications Flasher
Selected File

Firmware Image File
Selected File

312

Entry
To upgrade device firmware:
1. Use the Browse button and select the communication
flasher file. You need to select .rbin file type to upgrade thedevice.
2. Use the Browse button and select the firmware image file.
You need to select .rbin file type to upgrade the device
firmware. The Communications Flasher and Firmware
Image File are necessary to upgrade the device firmware.
3. Click Start Upgrade.

9. 876EC Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

The upgrade normally takes around 90 minutes to complete. The % Completed and theTime Remaining are shown on screen indicating the status of the device firmware
upgrade.
! WARNING
Do not cancel the upgrade process when the system is upgrading the device firmware.
Interrupting the upgrade process may cause the instrument to be left in a state where
it is only available for upgrades and may not operate normally.

313

MI 020-520 – January 2014314

9. 876EC Transmitter10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 875CR Analyzer with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about this analyzer can be found in thefollowing documents:

MI 611-222 - Model 875CR Intelligent Electrochemical Analyzer for Contacting
Conductivity and Resistivity Measurements

MI 611-227 - 875 Series Intelligent Analyzers - Operation, Configuration, andCalibration Using a HART Communicator315

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information and the device information. The
current measurement, temperature, analog 1 output (PV) and HART analog (SV) data isrepresented in a graph.

Figure 395. Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Overview Screen (Single Cell)
Field
HART
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Polling Address
Device Information
Date of Last Calibration
Device Software Version
Serial Number

316

Entry
Shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of the device.
Shows the tag number.
Shows the HART message that is sent from the device when requested.
The message can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Shows the configured address of the device.
Shows the last calibrated date.
Shows the software version of the device.
Shows the serial number of the device.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

In Dual and Redundant cell configuration, the last calibration date of cell 1 as well as cell 2 aredisplayed; and the graph represents the current measurement, and temperature, of cell 1 andcell 2.

Figure 396. Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Overview Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell)
Field
Device Information
Cell 1 Date of Last
Calibration
Cell 2 Date of Last
Calibration

Entry
Shows the date of last calibration of Cell 1.
Shows the date of last calibration of Cell 2.

317

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables and the measured values
assigned to the device variables of the currently running application.

Figure 397. Sample 875CR Analyzer Process Variables Screen (Single Cell)
Field
Process Variables
Primary Variable
Measurement
Temperature
Analog1 Output (PV)
HART Analog (SV)
Absolute
Secondary Variable
Tertiary Variable
Quaternary Variable
ATC Resistance

318

Entry
Shows the current measurement mapped to primary variable.
Shows the process measurement.
Shows the process temperature.
Shows the current PV value in mA units.
Shows the current SV value in mA units.
Shows the uncompensated conductivity or resistivity signal.
Shows the current measurement mapped to secondary variable.
Shows the current measurement mapped to tertiary variable.
Shows the current measurement mapped to quaternary variable.
Shows the resistance of temperature compensator from 0.0000 to9999.9.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

In Dual and Redundant cell configuration, the measurement, temperature, uncompensatedconductivity, and the ATC resistance of cell 1 as well as cell 2 are displayed as shown below.

Figure 398. Sample 875CR Analyzer Process Variables Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell)319

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen is where you can specify a passcode that allows you to access the configurable
device parameters. It also allows you to specify the parameters for the applications (such as 1, 2, or3) that are preconfigured for the analyzer.

Figure 399. Sample 875CR Analyzer General Screen
Field
Passcode
Passcode

Entry

Specify a valid passcode for configuring the device parameters. A Level 1
passcode allows you to modify all the configuration parameters and a
Level 2 passcode allows you to modify only the basic configuration
parameters. With a Level 3 passcode, you can only view the basic
configuration parameters.
Level
Shows the passcode level.
Application 1, Application 2, and Application 3
Analog Output/PV
Map a measurement for analog output. Choose from Measurement,
Map
Temperature, Absolute, and Off.

320

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Analog Output/PV
LRV
Analog Output/PV
URV
DampingSpecify the lower range value for analog output.
Specify the upper range value for analog output.
Select the damping time that is applied to the current output of theapplication. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40, 120, and 300 seconds.

In case of Dual cell operation, enter damping time for cell 1 and cell 2.

Figure 400. Sample 875CR Analyzer General Screen (Dual Cell)
Field
Application
Analog Output/PV
Map

Cell 1 Damping
Cell 2 Damping

Entry
Map a measurement for analog output. Choose from: Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute 2,% Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement Difference, andOff.
Select the damping time for cell 1. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40,
120, and 300 seconds.
Select the damping time for cell 2. Choose from None, 5, 10, 20, 40,
120, and 300 seconds.

321

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Cell Configuration
The analyzer has a two cell capability. The Cell Configuration screen is where you can configure
the analyzer for one of following three modes:Single

DualRedundant

Single mode operation allows up to three applications without math operations.

Figure 401. Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Single Mode)
Field
Cell Configuration
Cell Mode
Cell Parameters
Cell Constant
Cell Factor
Temperature Type

Entry
Configure one of the following three modes: Single, Dual, or Redundant.
Specify the cell constant. Choose from 0.1, 10, or Other.
If you choose Other, specify the cell factor.
Specify the cell factor between 0.0001 and 99.999.
Select the temperature type. Choose from 100K Thermistor, RTD 2 Wire
100 Ω, RTD 2 Wire 1000 Ω, RTD 3 Wire 100 Ω, RTD 3 Wire 1000 Ω,
RTD 2 Wire MIL, RTD 3 Wire MIL.

For using cell 1 and cell 2 independently, select Dual cell operation. This selection allows each cella single application with math operations (% rejection, ratio, measurement average, measurement
difference, temperature difference).
In this mode, specify cell constant, cell factor, and cell temperature type for cell 1 and for cell 2.

322

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 402. Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Dual Mode)
The Redundant cell operation is used to switch over to the primary or backup cell in case of
faults. One cell is designated as primary and the other is a backup. If the primary cellmeasurement becomes suspect or fails, the backup cell can take over. This mode allows up to
three applications but both cells must be configured identically.
Configure the analyzer for either manual or automatic switchover.

Figure 403. Sample 875CR Analyzer Cell Configuration Screen (Redundant Mode)323

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Cell Configuration
Switch OverPrimary Cell

10. 875CR Analyzer

Entry
Configure the analyzer for Manual or Automatic switchover and specify
one of the cells as primary cell.
• Manual - the cell selected as the primary cell is analyzed until you
manually change your configuration selection.
• Automatic - a cell fault (leakage, ATC short, or ATC open) causes
the configured backup cell to replace the primary cell.
Configure either cell 1 or cell 2 as the primary cell. Then the other cell
will act as a backup.

Temperature
The Temperature screen allows you to configure temperature parameters.
The temperature mode can be set to Manual or Auto. If set to Automatic mode, the temperature
follows the temperature input RTD or thermistor “ATC” and you can set a temperature fail-safe
signal value. If set to Manual mode, the temperature can be set at a fixed temperature value andresistance inputs on the temperature terminal are ignored.

Figure 404. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual)

Figure 405. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto)324

10. 875CR Analyzer

Field
Temperature
Temperature Units
Temperature Mode
Fail Temperature
Manual Temperature

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the temperature units. Choose from degC or degF.
Select the temperature mode. Choose Manual or Auto.
Set the failsafe temperature at which you expect the process to be
operating.
This parameter appears if the temperature mode is set to ‘Manual’.
Specify a fixed temperature value.

For Dual cell operation, configure temperature parameters for cell 1 and cell 2.

Figure 406. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Screen (Dual Cell Configuration)325

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Application
You can preconfigure the analyzer for up to three distinct applications. Each application can haveits own display, temperature compensation curve, chemical concentration curve (if applicable),
output configuration, and alarm configuration. Each application is assigned an identification
number such as 1, 2, or 3.
If you wish to change from one application to another, you can select the application 1, 2, or 3 inRunning Application. The entire application switches to that preconfigured application. You canalso choose Auto or Signal instead of an application number.
NOTE

This section is not availabe for Dual cell configuration.

Figure 407. Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen
Field

Entry

Number of Applications
Number of
Select the application number. Choose 1, 2, or 3.
Applications
Current Application
Shows the current application that is running.
Running Application
Application to Run
This parameter appears only if the analyzer is preconfigured with morethan one application. Select the application you want to run. Choose
from Application 1, Application 2, Application 3, Auto, or Signal.

326

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Selecting Auto in Application to Run configures the analyzer to switch from one application toanother when triggered by measurements above or below the established limits.

Figure 408. Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen (Auto Selection)
Field
Running Application
Application to Run
Application 1 HighApplication 2 Low
Application 2 HighApplication 3 Low

Entry
Set Application to Run as Auto.
Specify a value for application 1 high limit.
Specify a value for application 2 low limit.
Specify a value for application 2 high limit.
Specify a value for application 3 low limit.

327

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Selecting Signal in Application to Run configures the analyzer to change applications from anexternal device connected to the analyzer signal inputs.

Figure 409. Sample 875CR Analyzer Application Screen (Signal Selection)
Field

Entry

Running Application
Application to Run
Set Application to Run as Signal.
Level
Set the active state level to Direct or Inverted.
• When set to Direct, the application becomes active when the
input switch closes.
• When set to Inverted, the application becomes active when the
input switch opens.

328

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement
The Measurement screen allows you to specify the measurement units, scale, and damping time.

Figure 410. Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen
Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units

Scale
Damping
Damping

Entry
Select the measurement units.
• If Cell Constant was configured as 0.1, choose from MΩ*cm,
kΩ*cm, µS/cm, mS/cm, mS/m, and Custom.
• If the Cell Constant was configured as 10, choose from kΩ*cm,µS/cm, mS/cm, mS/m, S/m, %, and Custom.
Select the scale for the measurement unit. The scale differs based on the
Cell Constant and the Measurement Units selected.
Set the damping response time. Choose from 5, 10, 20, 40, 120 and
None.

NOTE

Damping applies only to measurement data, not to temperature data.

329

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

If Measurement Units = %, specify the maximum concentration according to the chemical being
measured.

Figure 411. Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen (% Selection)

Field
Measurement Units
ChemicalMaximum
Concentration

330

Entry
Select the chemical as H3PO4 or CH3COOH.
Specify the maximum concentration for the selected chemical.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If Measurement Units = Custom, specify the chemical compensation, and the relationshipbetween the base units and the custom units.

Figure 412. Sample 875CR Analyzer Measurement Screen (Custom Selection)
Field
Measurement Units
Measurement Units
Custom Units
Custom Label
Custom Scale
Base Units
Base Scale

Entry
Select Custom as the Measurement Units.
Select the custom units. Choose from %, g/l, ppm, oz/gal, ppt, User
Defined, and None.
Specify a name for the custom units.
Set the custom scale. Choose from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and9999.
Select the base units. Choose from MΩ*cm, kΩ*cm, µS/cm, mS/cm,
mS/m, or S/m.
Set the base scale. Choose from 0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, and 9999.
NOTE

Availability of the base scale options depends on the baseunits selected.

331

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

10. 875CR Analyzer

Entry

Damping
Damping

Set the damping response time. Choose from 5, 10, 20, 40, 120 andNone.
Custom Measurement Curve
Number of Points
Specify the number of points to plot the compensation curve. The
number of points can be specified from 2 to 21. For each of the point
specified to plot compensation curve, specify the base and custom points.
Base Point
Specify base point.
Custom Point
Specify custom point.

Temperature Compensation
The Temperature Compensation screen allows you to specify temperature compensation for yourapplication. Temperature compensation adjusts the conductivity and resistivity measurements to areading equivalent to that at the reference temperature.

Figure 413. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Low Conductivity)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
TemperatureSpecify the temperature compensation.
Compensation• If Measurement Units = kΩ*cm, µS/cm, mS/cm, mS/m, or S/m,choose temperature compensation from one of the following
options: Absolute, Low Conductivity, Cation, NaCl, Linear,
H3PO4, CH3COOH, USP23/24, Ammonia, Morpholine, andCustom.
• If Measurement Units = MΩ*cm, choose temperature compensation from the following options: Absolute, UltraPure, USP23/24,
and Custom.
Low Conductivity
Select the conductivity. Choose from Ions and Ions+H2O.
(appears if• Ions - this selection causes the conductivity reading to remove theTemperature
conductivity due to water
Compensation = Low• Ions + H2O - this selection causes the conductivity reading to
Conductivity)
include the conductivity due to water and impurities332

10. 875CR Analyzer

Field
Ions + H2O(appears if Low
Conductivity =Ions+H2O)

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the pure water curve. Choose from T.Light, Foxboro/Light, and
M&S.

NOTE

1. If Cell Mode = Dual, Temperature Compensation 1 and Temperature
Compensation 2 apply.
2. ‘Temperature Compensation’ does not appear if measurement units is
configured as percent (%).
If the Temperature Compensation = Linear, enter the reference temperature and specify the slopeof the linear compensation curve.

Figure 414. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Linear)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Set Temperature Compensation to Linear.
Compensation
ReferenceSpecify the reference temperature.
Temperature
Linear Slope
Specify the slope of the linear compensation curve between 0.5%/°C and
5.0%/°C.

333

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

If the Temperature Compensation = Ultra Pure, specify one of the pure water curves.

Figure 415. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Ultra Pure)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Set Temperature Compensation to Ultra Pure.
Compensation
UltraPure
Specify the pure water curve. Choose from T.Light, Foxboro/Light,
M & S, and High Temp.
If Temperature Compensation = Custom, specify the number of points to plot the compensation
curve. To prepare the curve, select a solution of typical concentration and measure its conductivity
in precisely controlled temperature increments.

334

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 416. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temperature Compensation Screen (Custom)
Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Set Temperature Compensation to Custom.
Compensation
ReferenceSpecify the reference temperature.
Temperature
Custom Compensation Curve
Number of Points
Specify the number of points from 2 to 21, to plot the compensation
curve.
Temperature (Units) Specify the temperature between -20 and +200°F or -4 to+392°C in 0.1°
increments.
Value (Units)
Specify the value from 0 to 5 times the scale value chosen.
NOTE

1. The compensation table is not saved to the database until the last point pair isentered.
2. The temperature values must be entered in increasing or decreasing order or the
display will read Slope Error.

335

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

OutputAnalog
The Analog screen allows you to configure the analog outputs, Analog Output 1 (PV) and HART
Analog Output (SV), in the analyzer. Each analog output is configured independently. You canspecify what measurement or calculation each analog output reflects, the minimum andmaximum range values for the outputs specified, and a failsafe signal for each output.

Figure 417. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen

33610. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)Primary Variable
Select a measurement to map the primary variable. Choose from
Map
Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1, Temperature
1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute 2, % Rejection,
Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement Difference, and Off.
Select Off if you are not using the output.
mA MinimumSpecify mA minimum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Analog Output / PV Specify the lower range value for Analog Output 1.
LRV
mA Maximum
Specify mA maximum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Analog Output / PV Specify the upper range value for Analog Output 1.
URV
Failsafe
Select failsafe mode. Choose from On, Off, and Pulse.
HART Analog Output (SV)Secondary Variable
Select a measurement to map the secondary variable. Choose from
Map
Temperature, Measurement, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1, Temperature
1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute 2, % Rejection,
Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement Difference, and Off.
Select Off if you are not using the output.
mA MinimumSpecify mA minimum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
HART Analog
Specify the lower range value for HART Analog Output.
Output LRVmA Maximum
Specify mA maximum value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
HART Analog
Specify the upper range value for HART Analog Output.
Output URV
Failsafe
Select failsafe mode. Choose On or Off.
NOTE

Pulse option is not available for HART Analog Output
1 (SV).
NOTE

mA Minimum and mA Maximum are available only when
1. Number of Applications > 1AND
2. Cell Mode = Single or Redundant337

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

You can configure the analyzer to deliver fail-safe outputs for all analyzer faults and for certain
sensor diagnostic faults. Select Failsafe as On to specify a fixed output in a failed condition.

Figure 418. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as On)
Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV) and HART Analog Output (SV)mA Fail Safe Value
Specify DC mA/Analog output value between 3.8 and 20.5 mA.

338

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Select Failsafe as Pulse if you want the signal outputted with a pulsed saw-tooth waveform of 0.5
mA for greater visibility on a chart recorder or data display.

Figure 419. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Output Screen (Failsafe as Pulse)
Field

Entry

Analog Output 1 (PV)AverageSpecify the Average mA/Analog output value between 3.8 and 20.5
mA.

HART
The HART screen allows you to specify the polling address and it shows the number of preambles
in the response message.

Figure 420. Sample 875CR Analyzer HART Output Screen339

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

10. 875CR Analyzer

Entry

HART
Polling Address
Preambles

Select a polling address between 0 and 15.
This parameter shows the number of preambles in the response message.
The preambles value is between 5 and 255.

DigitalThe Digital screen allows you to map measurements to primary, secondary, tertiary, andquaternary variables.

Figure 421. Sample 875CR Analyzer Digital Output Screen
Field
Digital Output
Primary Variable
Map

Secondary Variable
Map

Tertiary Variable
Map

340

Entry
Configure a measurement for Analog 1. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute
2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement
Difference, and Off.
Configure a measurement for HART Analog. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute
2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement
Difference, and Off.
Configure a measurement for Tertiary Variable. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute
2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement
Difference, and Off.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Quaternary Variable
Map

Configure a measurement for Quaternary Variable. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, and Off.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute
2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average, Measurement
Difference, and Off.

Local Display
The Local Display screen is where you can configure the parameters for display.
For single cell configuration, select the measurements you want to show in line 1 of the display.

Figure 422. Sample 875CR Analyzer Local Display Screen (Dual Selection)341

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Measurement Display
Display Format

Line 1Bargraph Min
Bargraph Max
Line 2(does not appear for
single display format)

Display Timeout
Front Panel Timeout
Remote Timeout
Digital Comm
Timeout
LCD Adjust
LCD Adjust Value342

10. 875CR Analyzer

Entry
Select the display format. Choose from Dual, Single, or Scan.
• Single: Displays a single measurement title, value, and unit on thelocal display.
• Dual: Displays two measurement titles, values, and units on thelocal display.
• Scan: Displays several selected measurements in sequence in adesignated scan time.
Select a measurement to be displayed in Line 1. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from:
Measurement 1, Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2,
Temperature 2, Absolute 2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average,
Measurement Difference, Temperature Difference, Analog 1 (PV), and
HART Analog (SV).
Specify the minimum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Specify the maximum bargraph value. This parameter does not appear if
Line 1 is configured to Analog 1 or HART.
Select a measurement to be displayed in Line 2. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1, and HART.
For Dual cell configuration, choose from:
Measurement 1, Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2,
Temperature 2, Absolute 2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average,
Measurement Difference, Temperature Difference, Analog 1 (PV), and
HART Analog (SV).
Configure front panel timeout between 5 and 999 seconds.
Configure remote timeout between 5 and 999 seconds.
Configure digital communication timeout between 5 and 999 seconds.

This parameter allows you to adjust the brightness of the display. The
numbers (-9 to 0 to +9) shown on the display should only be used for
darkening or lightening the display.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Scan as the display format, specify which measurements you want to display insequence, and the scan time.

Figure 423. Sample 875CR Analyzer Local Display Screen (Scan Selection)
Field
Measurement Display
Scan Time
Scan Data

Entry
Select the scan time. Choose from 2, 5, 10, and 20 seconds.
Select the measurements you want to display in sequence on the local
display. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Analog 1(PV), and HART Analog (SV).
For Dual cell configuration, the options for Scan Data are:Measurement 1, Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2,
Temperature 2, Absolute 2, % Rejection, Ratio, Measurement Average,
Measurement Difference, Temperature Difference, Analog 1 (PV), and
HART Analog (SV).

343

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Auto Hold
The Auto Hold screen allows you to configure the analyzer to go into a Hold state when in
Calibration or Configuration mode without setting the Hold each time. Hold is automaticallyremoved when the Calibration or Configuration are done.

Figure 424. Sample 875CR Analyzer Auto Hold Screen
Field
Auto Hold
Auto Hold Mode

Entry
Select the auto hold mode. Choose from:• On Present - to hold all values and states at their current level• On Manual - to hold all values and states at desired levels• Off - to release the analyzer from Hold state

Alarm 1The Alarm screen allows you to specify the alarm to measurements, calculations, or conditions.
The alarm reacts if the measurement exceeds the trip high point or drops below the trip low point.
It uses two controls - Hysteresis and Timed, to minimize chatter around the setpoint. Hysteresis
does this by using the measurement; and Timed, by using time.

344

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 425. Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Timed Selection)
Field
Alarm 1
Alarm 1

Trip 1

Trip Point 1
Control 1
Trig Time 1

On Time 1
Off Time 1

Entry
Set the alarm 1 to one of the following: Measurement, Temperature,
Absolute, On Fault, and Off.
If the cell is configured to Dual mode, choose from Measurement 1,
Temperature 1, Absolute 1, Measurement 2, Temperature 2, Absolute 2,% Rejection, Ratio, Meas Average, Measurement Difference,
Temperature Difference, and On Fault.
Select Off if you are not using the alarm.
Specify trip 1. Choose from:• Trip Low - to active alarm on a low going condition.
• Trip High - to active alarm on a high going condition.
Specify the trip point 1 value.
Select the Control as Timed.
Set the trig time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes. When you specify a trig
time, condition must exist continuously for the specified time period
before the alarm condition is met.
Specify the alarm feed time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.
This is the delay time before the alarm can trigger again. Specify the delay
time from 00.00 to 99.99 minutes.

345

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Fault Act 1

Trip State 1

10. 875CR Analyzer

Entry
Select the alarm fault action. Choose from:• Measurement Value - enables an alarm only when the measurement
exceeds the alarm set point.
• Valid Measurement - validates the cause for the alarm when themeasurement exceeds the set point. If one of the selected faults ispresent but is not process related, the alarm is disabled.
• Measurement and Fault - enables an alarm when the measurement
exceeds the setpoint and/or if one of the selected faults is present.
You can select the faults from the list of alarm faults that are
displayed below the alarm graph.
Select the trip state. Choose from:• Energized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NO (2C
and 2NO) and an open contact between 1C and 1NC (2C and2NC).
• Deenergized - provides a contact closure between 1C and 1NC (2C
and 2NC) and an open contact between 1C and 1NO (2C and
2NO).

NOTE

The faults appear only when the alarm 1 is set to:
1. On Fault
2. Measurement or Temperature or Absolute and the Fault Act is set to‘Measurement and Fault’.

Field
Alarm Faults
Analyzer Faults
Comm Faults
Leakage
ATC ShortandATC Open
4-20 Range
Comp Range

Meas Range

346

Entry
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of analyzer faults.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of communication faults.
Select this check box to enable alarm in case of severe liquid leakage into
the sensor.
Select these check boxes to enable alarm if the resistance of thetemperature compensator is greater or less than the expected resistance ofthe device configured.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement mapped to theanalog output is outside the range configured (4-20 mA).
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measured temperature or
absolute conductivity or resistivity measurement is outside thetemperature or chemical compensation curve configured for thecurrently running application.
Select this check box to enable alarm if the measurement is over or underthe measurable range that is configured for the currently runningapplication.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If the Control is specified as Hysteresis, enter the hysteresis value.

Figure 426. Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 1 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)
Field
Control 1
Hysteresis 1

Entry
Select the Control as Hysteresis.
Specify the hysteresis value.

347

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Alarm 2The Alarm 2 screen allows you to configure alarm 2 parameters to measurements, calculations, orconditions. For details of the parameters in this screen, refer to “Alarm 1” on page 344.

Figure 427. Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Timed Selection)

Figure 428. Sample 875CR Analyzer Alarm 2 Screen (Hysteresis Selection)348

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

RemoteThe Remote screen allows you to configure parameters so that the analyzer can be operated via aremote personal computer program on a PC.
The analyzer updates the remote port with measurement information at the configured update
rate.

Figure 429. Sample 875CR Analyzer Remote Screen
Field
RemoteUpdate Rate Settings
UpdateFormatPort Settings
Baud Rate
Data and Parity
Stop Bits

Entry

Set the update frequency. Choose from 5, 10, 30, 60, 120, 300, 600,
1200, or 3600 seconds.
This parameter is used to produce a log of your measurements. Set theFormat to Printer or Spreadsheet.
Set the Baud Rate to 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200.
Set the Data Parity to 7 Odd, 7 Even, 8 Odd, 8 Even, or 8 None.
Set the Stop Bits to 1 or 2.

349

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Diagnostic Configuration
The Diagnostic Configuration screen allows you to choose the faults for which you want the error
messages to be displayed.

Figure 430. Sample 875CR Analyzer Diagnostic Configuration Screen

35010. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Passcode Access
The Passcode Access screen allows you to establish or change passcodes for the three levels of
security provided to the analyzer through front panel, remote control, or digital communicationinterfaces. Users having access to Level 1 can set or modify these passcodes in configuration mode.

Figure 431. Sample 875CR Analyzer Passcode Access Screen
Field
Passcode
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3

Entry
Specify the passcode for Level 1. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 2. It can be set from 0 to 9999.
Specify the passcode for Level 3. It can be set from 0 to 9999.

NOTE

1. The table in the screen shows the access permissions of the users to each of thescreens. Access permissions are indicated by ‘X’ or ‘V’‘X’ - user can edit
‘V’ - user can only view
2. The factory default pass code for all three levels is 0800.

351

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Restore Configuration
The Restore Configuration screen allows you to reset all data to default values.

Figure 432. Sample 875CR Analyzer Restore Configuration Screen

Device Information
The Device Information screen complete information of the device. It allows you to set the tag
name, tag number, HART message, location, device name, and date and time of last calibration.

Figure 433. Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Information Screen (Single Cell)352

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Tag Name
Tag Number
Message
Location
Device Name
Calibration Person
Date of Last
Calibration
Calibration TypeCalibration
Temperature Type
Model
Sales Order
Date
Time
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
Device Software
Revision
Write Protect
Write Protect Mode

Entry
Shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Specify a name for HART tag.
Specify the HART tag number.
Specify the HART message.
Specify the location where the measurements are done.
Specify the name of the device.
Shows the name of the last calibrator.
Set the date of last calibration.
Shows the type of calibration (bench, solution, factory default).
Shows the temperature calibration type of last calibration (default,
custom, solution, failsafe, manual).
Shows the model number of the analyzer.
Shows the analyzer sales order number.
Set the current date.
Set the current time.
Shows the universal command set revision level.
Shows the field device revision level.
Shows the software revision level.
Shows the hardware revision level.
Shows the device software revision level.

Shows the write protect status.

353

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

For Dual cell configuration, the details of cell 1 and cell 2 are displayed as shown in the screen
below.

Figure 434. Sample 875CR Analyzer Device Information Screen (Dual and Redundant Cell)

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red X (error).
If Configuration Changed does not show a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset
Configuration Changed Flag button on the lower right side of the screen.

354

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 435. Sample 875CR Analyzer HART Status Screen

Calibration
Parameters
The Parameters calibration screen allows you to define the parameters used by the analyzer inchecking for measurement and temperature stability when performing a calibration.

355

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 436. Sample 875CR Analyzer Parameters Calibration Screen
Field

Entry

Measurement Stability
Measurement Stability While performing calibration, the analyzer checks the stability inabsolute measurement before accepting the change. Set the measurement
stability as On or Off.
Time to Achieve
This parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured ‘On’.
Stability
Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second increments) toattain stability.
Amount ofThis parameter is available if Measurement Stability is configured ‘On’.
Fluctuation
Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time period
and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.
Temperature Stability
Temperature Stability
While performing calibration the analyzer checks the stability intemperature before accepting the change. Set the temperature stability as
On or Off.
Time to Achieve
This parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured ‘On’.
Stability
Specify the time between 5 and 60 seconds (in 5-second increments) toattain stability.

356

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Amount ofFluctuation

This parameter is available if Temperature Stability is configured ‘On’.
Specify the amount of fluctuation between 1 and 9. A longer time period
and a smaller measurement value assures more stability duringcalibration.

Deviation
Calibration Deviation

Local AC Power
Local AC PowerSpecify the amount of deviation from the factory calibration you cantolerate during your instrument calibration. Choose from 1%, 2%, 5%,10%, or 20%.
Choose Off to disengage this feature.
If the analyzer uses 24 V dc supply voltage, specify the Local AC Power
as 50 Hz or 60 Hz, to best filter the readings.

Bench
The Bench calibration is an analyzer only calibration and is accomplished with the use of discrete
components or by returning to the stored “factory default” calibration.

Default Calibration
The Default Calibration screen allows you to return to the stored factory default calibration.

Figure 437. Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 1
Field
Bench Calibration
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration TypeBench Calibration

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the operator.
Select Default as the calibration type.
Select the application for calibration.

357

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 438. Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 2
Select Yes if you want to restore the default calibration. Select No if you choose not to restore. If
you have selected Yes, click Next.

Figure 439. Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 3
Click Next again to complete the calibration process.

Figure 440. Sample 875CR Analyzer Default Calibration Screen 4358

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

User Calibration
The User Calibration screen allows you to perform calibration by connecting your calibrating
resistors to the analyzer.

Figure 441. Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 1
Field

Entry

Bench Calibration
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration TypeBench Calibration

This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the operator.
Select User as the calibration type.
Select the application for calibration.

Figure 442. Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 2
Connect the resistor to cell input 1.

359

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 443. Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 3
If Measurement Stability is configured Off, watch for the measurement to stabilize before
proceeding. If it is configured On, the display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved. Whenthe message disappears, click Next.

Figure 444. Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 4
Click Next again to complete the calibration process.

Figure 445. Sample 875CR Analyzer User Calibration Screen 5360

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Solution
The Solution screen allows you to perform a calibration using real solutions. This calibration canbe done using 1 Pt Offset, 1 Pt Span, 2 Point, or Temp Adjust calibration types.

1 Pt Offset
This calibration is used if correcting for a shift in system zero.

Figure 446. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 1

Field
Solution Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration Type
Solution Calibration

Entry
Shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
Select the calibration as ‘1 Pt Offset’.
From the drop-down list of preconfigured applications, select theapplication to perform the calibration.

Click Next. The Display advises to put the sensor in the solution.

361

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 447. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 2
Put the sensor in the solution and click Next. The display reads Stabilizing until stability isachieved. Then the measurement value is displayed.

Figure 448. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 3
Select Accept to accept the stabilized value or select Wait to wait for another stabilized value andclick Next.

Figure 449. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 4
If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next.

362

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 450. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Offset Calibration Screen 5
After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to Calibration menu.

1 Pt Span
1 Pt Span calibration is used to correct for a shift in system span and should be used at the higher
end of the measurement range chosen.
Select the calibration type as ‘1 Pt Span’ and follow the calibration steps mentioned for “1 Pt
Offset” calibration.

Figure 451. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 1363

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 452. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 2

Figure 453. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 3

Figure 454. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 4364

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 455. Sample 875CR Analyzer 1 Point Span Calibration Screen 5

2 Point
The 2 Point calibration allows calibration at 2 user entered values.

Figure 456. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 1

Field
Solution Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibration Type
Solution Calibration

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
Select the calibration as 2 Point.
From the drop-down list of preconfigured applications, select theapplication to perform the calibration.

Click Next. The Display advises to put the sensor in the solution 1.

365

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 457. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 2
Put sensor into solution 1 and click Next. The display reads Stabilizing until stability is achieved.
Then the measurement value is displayed.

Figure 458. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 3
Select Accept to accept the stabilized value or select Wait to wait for another stabilized value andclick Next.

Figure 459. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 4
If the reading is not correct, edit it to the correct value and click Next. The message advises toimmerse your sensor into solution 2.
366

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 460. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 5
Put the sensor in solution 2 and repeat the above steps for solution 2.

Figure 461. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 6

Figure 462. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 7367

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 463. Sample 875CR Analyzer 2 Point Calibration Screen 8
After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to Calibration menu.

Temp Adjust
Temp Adjust calibration allows you to adjust a value if there is a difference in the temperature in
Status mode and actual temperature of the solution. You can specify values between -20 to 200°C
or -4 to +392°F.
Select the calibration type as ‘Temp Adjust’ and follow the calibration steps mentioned for “1 Pt
Offset” calibration.

Figure 464. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 1368

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 465. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 2

Figure 466. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 3

Figure 467. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 4369

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 468. Sample 875CR Analyzer Temp Adjust Calibration Screen 5

Pure H2O
The Pure H2O calibration process allows you to measure purity of water by checking the
conductivity in µS/cm or resistivity in MΩ*cm. It enables you to enter the specific cell factor andtemperature cell factor calibration values of your sensor from qualification testing done at thefactory.

Figure 469. Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 1
Field
Solution Setup
Date of Last
Calibration
Name of Operator
Pure H2O Calibration

Entry
This parameter shows the date of last calibration.
Specify the name of the calibrator.
Select application or cell for calibration.

Click Next. Change the temperature cell factor (TCF), and the cell factor (CF).

370

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 470. Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 2
Click Next again to continue the calibration process.

Figure 471. Sample 875CR Analyzer Pure H2O Calibration Screen 3
After the calibration is completed, click OK to return to Calibration menu.

Custom Temp
Custom Temp calibration can only be accessed via a Level 1 passcode.
Select the calibration type as ‘Custom Temp’ and follow the calibration steps mentioned for “2Point” calibration.

Figure 472. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 1371

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 473. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 2

Figure 474. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 3

Figure 475. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 4

Figure 476. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 5372

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 477. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 6

Figure 478. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 7

Figure 479. Sample 875CR Analyzer Custom Temp Calibration Screen 8373

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Analog
The Analog calibration allows you to tune the 4 mA and 20 mA values of the analog outputs.

Figure 480. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 1
Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Select Analog Output
to Calibrate

Select the output. Choose from AO1 and HART ANALOG.

Click Next to continue the calibration process for analog 4 mA.

Figure 481. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 2

Figure 482. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 3

Field
Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

374

Entry
Specify a meter value.

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 483. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 4
Select Yes to continue the process. Calibration will be done for analog 20 mA.
If you select No, enter the reference meter value.

Figure 484. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 5

Figure 485. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 6
Field

Entry

Calibration Analog
Enter Meter Value

Specify a meter value.

Figure 486. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 7375

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

Figure 487. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 8
Click Yes to save the changes, or No to abort the changes.

Figure 488. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 9

Figure 489. Sample 875CR Analyzer Analog Calibration Screen 10
Click OK after the calibration is completed.

376

10. 875CR Analyzer

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the main Diagnostic Menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time.

Figure 490. Sample 875CR Analyzer Faults Screen
NOTE

This screen displays a maximum of 100 faults that occurred.

377

MI 020-520 – January 2014

10. 875CR Analyzer

History
The history log includes all faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults temporarily suspended.

Figure 491. Sample 875CR Analyzer History Screen
NOTE

This screen displays up to 100 of the most current history log entries.

378

11. 876CR TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using 876CR Transmitter with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about these transmitters with HART
communication is contained in the following document.


MI 611-260 Model 876CR Intelligent Electrochemical Transmitter for Contacting
Conductivity and Resistivity Measurements with HART Communications

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, and current PV
data.

Figure 492. Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Overview Screen379

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the PV data that is available on the Device Overview screen
and additional measurement information.

Figure 493. Sample 876CR Transmitter Process Variables Screen

38011. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen allows you to set Password, select the Cell Type and Temperature Type, andset the device tag. You can also set Analog Output and its lower and upper range values.

Figure 494. Sample 876CR Transmitter General Setup Screen
Field

Entry

GeneralPassword
Cell TypeSet the password.
Select the Cell Type. Choose from Foxboro 0.1, Foxboro 1.0,
Foxboro 10, or Other.
Temperature Type
Select the Temperature Type. Choose from 10K Thermistor,
100K Thermistor, 2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000, 3Wire Pt 100,or 3Wire Pt 1000.
Tag
Set the Tag name. You can enter up to 8 characters maximum.
Application 1/Application 2/Application 3a
Analog Output/PV Map Select the analog output. Choose from Measurement,
Temperature, Absolute, ATC Resistance, or Cell Resistance.
Analog Output/PV LRV Set the analog output/process variable lower range value.
Analog Output/PV URV Set the analog output/process variable upper range value.

381

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Field
Damping

Entry
Set the damping time in seconds.

a. The number of application that appear depends on the selection made in the Applications
screen. For more information on selecting applications, see “Applications” on page 383.

Cell Configuration
Cell Configuration allows you to select Cell Type and Temperature Type.

Figure 495. Sample 876CR Transmitter Cell Configuration Screen
Field
Cell Type
Temperature Type

Entry
Select the Cell Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Foxboro 0.1, Foxboro 1.0, Foxboro 10, or Other.
Select the Temperature Type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
10K Thermistor, 100K Thermistor, 2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000,
3Wire Pt 100, or 3Wire Pt 1000.

If you select Other as Cell Type, the Cell Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 496.

Figure 496. Sample 876CR Transmitter Cell Configuration Screen (Nominal Cell Factor)
Field
Cell Type
Nominal Cell Factor

382

Entry
Choose Other from the Cell Type drop-down menu.
Set the Nominal Cell Factor.

11. 876CR Transmitter

Field
Temperature TypeMI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the temperature type from the drop-down menu. Choose from
10K Thermistor, 100K Thermistor, 2Wire Pt 100, 2Wire Pt 1000,
3Wire Pt 100, or 3Wire Pt 1000.

Applications
Applications screen allows you to select up to three distinct applications you wish to preconfigure.
Each application has its own measurement, temperature configuration, temperaturecompensation curve, display, and output configuration.

Figure 497. Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications Screen
Field

Entry

Number of Applications
Number of Applicationsa Select the Number of Applications you want to preconfigure from thedrop-down menu. Choose from 1, 2, and 3.
Application 1 NameEnter the name for application 1.
Application 2 NameEnter the name for application 2.
Application 3 NameEnter the name for application 3b.
Running Application
Application to Run
Select the Application to Run from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Application 1, Application 2, Application 3c, or Auto.
a. The application name fields appear depending on the number of applications selected. If you
select 1, then no application name fields appear, see Figure 499.
b. This field will not appear if the Number of Applications selected is 2.
c. This option will not appear if the number of applications is 2.

383

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

If you select Auto as Application to Run, the screen appears as shown in Figure 498.

Figure 498. Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications - Auto Selection Screen
Field
Running Application
Application to Run
App 1 High Trigger

App 2 Low Trigger
App 2 High Trigger
App 3 Low Trigger

384

Entry
Select Auto from the Application to Run drop-down menu.
Establish the preset which triggers the application movement from one
application to another. Enter the value for application 1 high limit.
This is measured in mS/cm.
Enter the value for application 2 lowest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.
Enter the value for application 2 highest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.
Enter the value for application 3 lowest limit. This is measured in
mS/cm.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 499. Sample 876CR Transmitter Number of Applications (1) Screen

Measurement
Measurement screen enables you to select the Measurement Unit, Base Display Scale, andDamping.

Figure 500. Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen
Field
Measurement Units
Units
Base Display Scale a
Base Measurement
Unit
ChemicalComposition
Damping

Entry
Select the Units from the drop-down menu. Choose from KO*cm,µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, S/m, %, or Custom.
Set Base Display Scale value from the drop-down menu. Choose from0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9 or 9999.
Select Base Measurement Scale from the drop-down menu. Choose
from KO*cm, µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, or S/m.
Select the Chemical Composition from the drop-down menu. Choose
from NaCl, KCl, CH3COOH, or H3PO4.
Set the damping value in seconds.

a. This field appears if you select Measurement Units as KO*cm, µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm,
mS/m, or S/m. See Figure 501.

385

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Figure 501. Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Base Display Scale)
If you select Measurement Units as Custom, the screen appears as shown in Figure 502.

Figure 502. Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Number of Points Selection)
Field
Measurement Units
Units
Custom Units
Custom Scale

Base Measurement
Units
386

Entry
Select Units as Custom from the drop-down menu.
Select Custom Units from the drop-down menu. Choose from %, g/l,
ppm, oz/gal, ppt, user defined, or none.
Select Custom Scale from the drop-down menu. Choose from 0.9999,
0.99999, 9.999, 9.9999, 99.99, 99.999, 999.9, 999.99, 9999, 9999.9,
or 99999.
Select the Base Measurement Units from the drop-down menu.
Choose from MO*cm, KO*cm, µS/cm, µS/m, mS/cm, mS/m, or S/m.

11. 876CR Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Base Display Scale

Set Base Display Scale value from the drop-down menu. Choose from0.9999, 9.999, 99.99, 999.9, or 9999.
Damping
Set the damping value in seconds.
Custom Concentration Table
Number of Points
Specify number of points to plot the concentration curve. The
Number of Points can be specified from 2 to 21.
Measurement
Enter the Measurement values.
Concentration
Enter the Concentration values.
If you select more than 2 as Number of Points, the screen appears as shown in Figure 503.

Figure 503. Sample 876CR Transmitter Measurement Units Screen (Measurement andConcentration)387

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Temperature
Temperature configuration screen allows you to select auto or manual temperature modes.

Figure 504. Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Auto)
Field
Temperature Unit
Temperature Mode
Fail Temperature

Entry
Select the Temperature Units from the drop-down menu. Choose
from degC (Centigrade) or degF (Fahrenheit).
Select the Temperature Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Auto or Manual.
Set the Fail Temperature to the value at which you expect the process
to operate if the RTD fails.

If you select Temperature Mode as Manual, the temperature screen appears as shown in
Figure 505.

Figure 505. Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Screen (Temperature Mode as Manual)
Field
Manual Temperature

388

Entry
Set the temperature at a fixed temperature value.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Temperature Compensation
The Temperature Compensation screen allows you to select the appropriate temperaturecompensation.

Figure 506. Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Compensation Screen
Field
Temperature
Compensation
Reference Temperaturea
Linear Slopea

Entry
Select the Temperature Compensation from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Absolute, NaCl, KCl, Ions Only, Cation, Linear,
H3PO4, CH3COOH, Ammonia, Morpholine, or Custom.
Set the reference temperature.
Set the linear slope.

a. The Reference Temperature field appears if Linear is selected as Temperature Compensation.
If you select Custom as Temperature Compensation, the screen appears as shown in Figure 507.

389

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Figure 507. Sample 876CR Transmitter Temperature Compensation (Custom) Screen

Field

Entry

Temperature Compensation
Temperature
Select Custom from the Temperature Compensation drop-downCompensation
menu.
Reference Temperature
Set the reference temperature.
Custom Compensation Curve
Number of Points
Specify number of points to plot the concentration curve. The
Number of Points can be specified from 2 to 21.
TemperatureEnter the Measurement values.
ValueEnter the Concentration values.

39011. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

OutputDigitalThe Output - Digital screen allows you to select the primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary
variable maps.

Figure 508. Sample 876CR Transmitter Digital Output Screen
Field

Entry

Primary Variable Map

Select the primary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, ATCResistance, or Cell Resistance.
Select the secondary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, ATCResistance, or Cell Resistance.
Select the tertiary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, ATCResistance, or Cell Resistance.
Select the quaternary variable from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, ATCResistance or Cell Resistance.

Secondary Variable Map

Tertiary Variable Map

Quaternary Variable
Map

391

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

AnalogThe Output - Analog screen allows you to select the analog output, set minimum and maximum
analog values, and set PV lower and upper range values.

Figure 509. Sample 876CR Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field

Entry

Analog Output/PV Map

Select analog output (PV Map) from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration, ATCResistance, or Cell Resistance.
Set the minimum analog value.
Set analog output (PV low range value).
Set the maximum analog value.
Set analog output (PV upper range value).
Select analog output failsafe value from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Off, Fail Low, and Fail High. This is visible for HART version 5
if polling address is set to 0, or for HART version 6/7 if loop mode isin active state.

Minimum Analog Value
Analog Output/PV LRVMaximum Analog Value
Analog Output/PV URV
Analog Output Failsafe

39211. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Display
The Measurement Display screen allows you to select the display format to be in single line,
double line, or in triple line as shown in Figure 510.

Figure 510. Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen
Field

Entry

Measurement Display
Display Format

Select the Display Format from the drop-down menu. Choose fromSingle Line, Double Line, or Triple Line. (Examples of each of thedisplay formats are shown on the right side of the screen.)Line 1/Line 2/Line 3
Select the line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration,or Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, and Always Timeout.
aEnter the time in seconds, after which the transmitter
Front Panel Timeout
reverts to measurement mode.
a. The Front Panel Timeout field will appear if you select Always Timeout as Timeout Mode.

393

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

If you select Single Line in the Display Format field, the Measurement Display screen
appears as shown in Figure 511.

Figure 511. Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Single Line)
Field

Entry

Measurement Display
Display Format
Line 1

Select Single Line from the drop-down menu.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration,or Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.
aEnter the time in seconds, after which the transmitter
Front Panel Timeout
reverts to measurement mode.
a. The Front Panel Timeout field will appear if you select Always Timeout as Timeout Mode.

394

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Double Line in the Display Format field, the local display screen appears asshown in Figure 512.

Figure 512. Sample 876CR Transmitter Local Display Output Screen (Double Line)
Field

Entry

Measurement Display
Display Format
Line 1

Select Double Line from the drop-down menu.
Select the first line reading to be displayed from the drop-down menu.
Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute, Concentration,or Analog Output.
Line 2
Select the second line reading to be displayed from the drop-downmenu. Choose from Measurement, Temperature, Absolute,
Concentration, or Analog Output.
Local Display Configuration Timeout
Timeout Mode
Select the Timeout Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.
a
Front Panel Timeout
Enter the time in seconds, after which the transmitter
reverts to measurement mode.
a. The Front panel Timeout field will appear if you select Always Timeout as Timeout Mode.

395

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

HART
The HART screen allows you to select the Polling Address, mA Loop Mode, and Timeout Mode.
It also allows you to set the HART timeout and select the HART version.

Figure 513. Sample 876CR Transmitter HART Output Screen (HART Version 5)396

11. 876CR Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Polling Address

mA Loop Modea
Number of Request
Preambles
Timeout Mode
HART
Communications
Timeout
HART Version

Select the polling address from the drop-down menu. Choose any
number from 0 to 15.
If you select HART version as 6 or 7, choose any number from 0 to
63.
Select the loop mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Multidrop or Active.
This field shows the number of preambles to be sent in response
message from the transmitter to the host.
Select the timeout mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Never Timeout, Online Timeout Only, or Always Timeout.
Set the HART communications timeout. The HART
communications timeout is not visible if Timeout Mode is chosen as
Never Timeout.
Select HART Version from the drop-down menu. Choose from 5, 6,
or 7.

a. The mA Loop Mode field appears if you select HART Version as 6 or 7.

Auto Hold

Figure 514. Sample 876CR Transmitter Output Auto Hold Screen
Field
Auto Hold Mode

Entry
Select the Auto Hold Mode from the drop-down menu. Selectfrom Off, On Present, or On Manual.

397

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Diagnostic Configuration
Diagnostic configuration screen allows you to configure the fault messages that appear on yourdisplay.

Figure 515. Sample 876CR Transmitter Diagnostics Configuration
Field
Diagnostics

398

Entry
Select the check boxes to set diagnostic parameters. You can selectany or all of the following: Leakage, ATC Short, ATC Open,
Compensation Range, Measurement Range, or USP 645
Diagnostic.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Passcode Access
Passcode Access screen provides two levels of permissions. Administrator access permits changing
all parameters in configuration where as User Code access permits changing and viewing access to
those areas as specified by the administrator.

Figure 516. Sample 876CR Transmitter Passcode Access Screen
Field
Admin Passcode
User Passcode
User Change Allowed
User View Access

Entry
Set the administrator passcode.
Set the user passcode.
To allow users to modify parameters, select the appropriate
parameters in the User Change Allowed section.
To allow users to view parameters (but not change them),
select the appropriate parameters in the User View Accesssection.

399

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Device Information
The Device Information screen allows you to set HART tags, descriptor, and message. It also
displays the revision information.

Figure 517. Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
HART Tag
HART Long Tag
HART Descriptor
HART Message
Tag Name
Location
Device Name
Date of Last Calibration
Write Protect Mode

400

Entry
This field shows the application manufacturer name.
Set the HART tag name.
Set the HART long tag name. This field is only applicable for
HART versions 6 and 7.
Set the HART descriptor.
Set the HART message.
Set the tag name.
Set the name of the location.
Set the name of the device.
This field shows the date of last calibration.
This field shows the Write Protect status of the device.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Save/Restore Configuration
The Save/Restore Configuration screen allows you to Save and Restore up to 2 user configurations
as shown in Figure 518.

Figure 518. Sample 876CR Transmitter Save/Restore Configuration Screen
Field

Entry

Save/Restore Configuration
Save Configuration
To save the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1 or User Configuration 2 after
you have configured all the DTM parameters.
2. Click Save Configuration.
3. Click OK.
Restore Configuration
To restore the current configuration:
1. Select User Configuration 1, User Configuration 2, orFactory Configuration depending on the configuration you
want to restore.
2. Click Restore Configuration.
3. Click OK.

401

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Device Status
HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red X (error). On most DTMs, if Configuration Changed does notshow a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset Configuration Changed Flagbutton on the lower left side of the screen.

Figure 519. Sample 876CR Transmitter HART Status Screen40211. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status
The Device Status screen shows current status of the device. The status of each parameter is easily
recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 520. Sample 876CR Transmitter Device Status Screen
Field

Entry

Device Status for Measurement
Measurement
This field shows the Measurement status and value.
Concentration
This field shows the Concentration status and value.
TemperatureThis field shows the Temperature status and value.
Absolute
This field shows the Absolute parameter status and value.
Analog Output
This field shows the Analog Output status and value.
ATC ResistanceThis field shows the ATC Resistance status and value.
Cell ResistanceThis field shows the Cell Resistance status and value.
Display Status Detail Page Select this check box to display the Status Tree page.

403

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Status Tree Screen
The Status Tree screen shows the device status and allows to diagnose the device failures. The
screen shows various parameters and the status of each of these parameters can be easily
recognized by their color. A green circle indicates the selected user configuration and a grey circle
indicates parameters the user has not selected. A red circle indicates that there is an error.

Figure 521. Sample 876CR Transmitter Status Tree Screen40411. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures:Parameters

Figure 522. Sample 876CR Transmitter Cal Parameters Screen
Field

Entry

Stability

Set the stability value in percentage.

Calibrate
The Calibrate screen enables you to calibrate the device as shown in Figure 523.

Figure 523. Sample 876CR Transmitter Calibration Setup Screen
Field
Date of Calibration
Name of Operator
Calibrate

Entry
This field shows the date of calibration.
Set the name of the operator.
Select the Calibrate option from the drop-down menu. Choose from
Measurement or Temperature.

405

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

Field

Entry

Number of Calibration
PointsApplication

Select the Number of Calibration Points from the drop-down menu.
Choose from 1 or 2.
Select the Application from the drop-down menu. Choose from 1, 2,
or 3.
Select the Type of Calibration from the drop-down menu. Choose
from Smart and Manual.

Type of Calibration

Calibrate - Pure H2O
The Calibrate pure H2O enables you to calibrate the device on pure water as shown in
Figure 524.

Figure 524. Sample 876CR Transmitter Calibrate Pure H2O Calibration Screen
Field
Date of Calibration
Name of Operator
Application

406

Entry
This field shows the date of calibration.
Set the name of the operator.
Select the Application from the drop-down menu. Choose from 1, 2,
or 3.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
FaultsFault status is displayed in the Troubleshooting Menu. You can suspend faults from themeasurement status for one hour and resume faults at any time. The Faults status screen appears
as shown in Figure 525.

Figure 525. Sample 876CR Transmitter Faults Screen
Field
Suspend Faults
Resume Faults

Entry
Click this button to suspend faults.
Click this button to resume faults.

407

MI 020-520 – January 2014

11. 876CR Transmitter

History Log
The history log includes all the faults, power restore, entries and exits from Configuration,
Calibration and Hold, and Faults that are temporarily suspended.
The history log appears as shown in Figure 526.

Figure 526. Sample 876CR Transmitter History Log Screen

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the analyzer, as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Figure 527. Sample 876CR Transmitter Loop Test Screen

Field
Hold Mode

408

Entry
Select the Hold Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from Off,
Hold Present Values, or Manual Hold.

11. 876CR Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you select Manual Hold as Hold Mode, the screen appears as shown in Figure 528.

Figure 528. Sample 876CR Transmitter Loop Test Screen (Manual Hold)
Field
Hold Mode
Analog Outputa
PV Digital Measurement
SV Digital Measurement
TV Digital Measurement
QV Digital Measurement

Entry
Select Manual Hold option from the drop-down menu.
Set analog output reading.
Set PV digital measurement.
Set SV digital measurement.
Set TV digital measurement.
Set QV digital measurement.

a. If mA Loop Mode is selected as Multidrop in the Output - HART screen, then Analog Output
field does not appear.

409

MI 020-520 – January 2014410

11. 876CR Transmitter12. I/A Series Pressure TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using the PC50 Field Device Tool with
I/A Series Pressure Transmitter with HART communication protocol. Additional information
about these transmitters and HART communication can be found in the following documents.
Table 6.
MI IDP10-T
MI IAP10-T/IGP10-T
MI IAP20-T/IGP20-T
MI IDP25-T/IDP50-T
MI IGP25-T/IGP50-T

IDP10-T Differential Pressure Transmitters
IAP10-T Absolute Pressure Transmitters and
IGP10-T Gauge Pressure Transmitters
IAP20-T Absolute Pressure Transmitters and
IGP20-T Gauge Pressure Transmitters
IDP25-T and IDP50-T Differential Pressure Transmitters
IGP25-T and IGP50-T Gauge Pressure Transmitters411

MI 020-520 – January 2014

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, and current PV
data.

Figure 529. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen provides the PV and totals data that was displayed on the Device
Overview screen plus additional measurement and device information.

Figure 530. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen41212. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status Screen
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of various parameters
is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X(error).
In the Error Reason section of the screen, the reason for the error is given.
NOTE

Error Reason indicates the last error reason. It is possible that the condition has
since been cleared.

Figure 531. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an I/A Series Pressure Transmitter using
the PC50 Field Device Tool:

PV Rerange



SV Rerange

Zero Trim

Scaled DAC Trim

Lower Sensor TrimUpper Sensor Trim413

MI 020-520 – January 2014

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

Setup
General Setup Screen

Figure 532. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter General Setup Screen

Field
Tag
PV LRVPV URV
Damping
PV Mode

Entry
Enter maximum of 8 characters. Optional, used for reference only.
Enter the Lower Range Value.
Enter the Upper Range Value.
Select the damping time between 0 and 32 seconds.
Select Linear, SqRt Cutoff <1% DP, SqRt Linear <4% DP,
SqRt Cutoff 0-20% Flow.

Measurement Units Screen

Figure 533. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units Screen

Field
PV Units
SV Units

414

Entry
Select the PV Units from the list presented.
Select the SV Units from the list presented.

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Process Parameters Screen

Figure 534. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Parameters Screen

Field
PV ModePV Offset
PV Square Root
CutoffPV Flow URV
Damping
Electronics
Temperature Failure
External Zero
Pushbutton
Final Assembly
Number
SV ModeSV Offset

Entry
Select Linear, SqRt Cutoff <1% DP, SqRt Linear <4% DP,
SqRt Cutoff 0-20% Flow.
Enter any PV Offset value (Linear mode only).
Enter the PV Square Root Cutoff in percent flow
(Sq Rt Cutoff 0-20%Flow mode only).
Enter the PV Flow URV in percent flow (square root modes only).
Select the damping time between 0 and 32 seconds.
Select Fatal or Non-Fatal.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Enter the Final Assembly Number(number associated with the overall transmitter).
Select Linear, SqRt Cutoff <1% DP, SqRt Linear <4% DP,
SqRt Cutoff 0-20% Flow.
Enter any SV Offset value.

415

MI 020-520 – January 2014

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

Field

Entry

SV Square Root
Cutoff
SV Flow URVEnter the SV Square Root Cutoff in percent flow
(Sq Rt Cutoff 0-20%Flow mode only).
Enter the SV Flow URV in percent flow (square root modes only).

Analog Output Screen

Figure 535. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Output Screen

Field
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URV

Entry
Shows the current PV Analog Output
Shows the PV LRVShows the PV URV

Alarm Output Screen
In this parameter, select Fail Low or Fail High for output to go fully downscale or fully upscale in
the event of a failure.

Figure 536. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Alarm Output Screen

Field
Output Alarm Code

416

Entry
Select Fail High or Fail Low.

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

HART Output Screen

Figure 537. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen

Field

Entry

Polling Address

Select an address between 0 and 15. A nonzero number applies tomultidrop applications.
Number of Request Preambles Select a number of preambles to be sent in a response message
from the flowmeter to the host of between 3 and 20.

Device Information

Figure 538. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen417

MI 020-520 – January 2014

12. I/A Series Pressure Transmitter

Field

Entry

Manufacturer
Distributor
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of last Calibration
Device ID
PV Sensor Serial Number
Physical Signaling Mode
Write Protect Mode

Shows the manufacturer as Foxboro.
Shows the distributor as Foxboro.
Enter the Tag (8 characters maximum).
Enter the Descriptor (16 characters maximum).
Enter the Message (32 characters maximum).
Select the Date of Last Calibration.
Shows the Device ID.
Shows the PV Sensor Serial Number.
Shows the Physical Signaling Mode.
Shows whether the transmitter is write protected.

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the transmitter as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Figure 539. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Loop Test Screen

Field
PV Analog Output
Override Analog Value
Override Measurement

418

Entry
Shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Select 4 mA or 20 mA.
Check/uncheck to activate/end override of measurement.

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure
TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using I/A Series Advanced Pressure
Transmitter with HART communication protocol. Additional information about thesetransmitters and their functions with HART communication can be found in the following
document.


MI 020-600 Enterprise Control System Component Pressure Transmitter Series Models IDP15D, IDP31D, IDP32D, and IGP60G with HART Communication419

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays HART information, Device Information, current PV, PV as% of Span, and PV range data.

Figure 540. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen displays the PV data such as primary variable, analog output, sensor
temperature, PV range, and PV % range.

Figure 541. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen
42013. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen displays the tag, PV range, damping, and PV mode.

Figure 542. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter General Configuration Screen
Field
Tag
PV LRVPV URV
Damping
PV ModeEntry
Set the Tag name. You can enter up to 8 characters maximum.
Set the Process Variable Lower Range Value.
Set the Process Variable Upper Range Value.
Set the Damping time between 0 to 128 seconds.
Select Linear or Square root from the drop-down menu.

421

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Measurement Units
Measurement Units enables you to configure the pressure and temperature units.

Figure 543. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units
Field
Pressure Units

Temperature Units

Entry
Select the pressure units from the drop-down menu. Choose frommmH2O, mH2O, inH2O, kPa, MPa, Pa, hPa, bar, mbar, nmHg,
inHg, g/cm2, kg/cm2, atm, Torr, and psi.
Select the temperature units from the drop-down menu. Choose from
degC, degF, degR, and Kelvin.

Signal Condition
Signals
Signals Condition screen displays the cutoff mode and cutoff point.

Figure 544. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Signals Screen

Field
Cutoff Mode
Cutoff Point

422

Entry
Shows the CutOff Mode.
Shows the Cutoff Point.

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Cutoff Mode
Cutoff Mode screen enables you to run Cutoff Mode method.

Figure 545. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Cutoff Mode Screen

Zero Value
Zero Value screen enables you to calibrate the 4 mA pressure value.

Figure 546. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Zero Value Screen

Span Value
Span Value screen enables you to calibrate the 20 mA pressure value.

Figure 547. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Span Value Screen423

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Set LRV
Set LRV screen enables you to run Set LRV method.

Figure 548. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Set LRV Screen

Alarm
Alarm screen enables you to configure the alarm output, and set the lower and upper output
alarm values.

Figure 549. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Alarm Screen
Field
OutputSensor Temperature
Lower Output
Upper Output
Lower Sensor Temperature
Upper Sensor Temperature

424

Entry
Select the Output from the drop-down menu. Choose from No
Alarm, Lower Limit, Upper Limit, and Lower/Upper Limit.
Select the Sensor Temperature from the drop-down menu. Choose
from No Alarm, Lower Limit, Upper Limit, and Lower/Upper Limit.
Set the Lower Output alarm value. This is measured in percentage.
Set the Upper Output alarm value. This is measured in percentage.
Set the Lower Sensor Temperature alarm value.
Set the Upper Sensor Temperature alarm value.

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Simulation Mode
Failure Alarm

Figure 550. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Failure Alarm Screen
Field
Direction

Failure Alarm
Simulation Mode

Entry
Defines the Analog Output response when the Field Device detects theAnalog Output is not tracking the associated Field Device Variable.
Since the direction is read from the device, you cannot change thedirection.
Simulates the output when the device is in a critical state.

425

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

OutputAnalogFigure 551. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Analog Output Screen
Field
Low Limit
High Limit

Entry
Set the Lower limit value.
Set the Higher limit value.

HART

Figure 552. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen
Field
Polling Address
Number of Request Preambles

426

Entry
Select Polling Address between 0 and 15. A nonzero number
applies to multidrop applications.
Shows the Number of Request Preambles to be sent in a response
message from the flowmeter to the host of between 3 and 20.

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Local Display
Local Display screen enables you to configure the local display of the device.

Figure 553. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Local Display Screen

Field
Display Mode
Display Function
PV ModeUnits Low
Units High
Display Unit

User Unit
Exponent

Entry
Select the Display Mode from the drop-down menu. Choose from %,Scale, and pressure.
Select Display Function from the drop-down menu. Choose fromLinear or Square root.
Shows the PV Mode.
Set the Units Low value.
Set the Units High value.
Select the Display Unit from the drop-down menu. Choose frommmH2O, mmAq, mH2O, inH2O, fTH2O, kPa, MPa, Pa, hPa,kPaG, MPaG, kPa abs, Pa abs, hPa abs, bar, mbar, barG, mbarG,
mmHg, inHg, mmHg, inHg, mmHg abs, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2, g/cm2,kg/cm2, kgf/cm2G, kgf/cm2 abs, atm, Torr, psi, g/cm3, kg/m3, m3, I,
kl, mi/h, l/h, kl/h, skl/h, Sm3/h, t/h, kl/h, t/h, m3/h, km3/h, Nm3/h,
kNm3/h, l/min, kl/min, m3/min, Nml/min, kl/d, m3/d, t/d, Nm3/d,
kg/h, gal/min, gal/h, mm, m, %, t, kg, None, and user defined unit.
If the Display Unit is selected as user defined unit, enter the User Unit
value.
Select the Exponent from the drop-down menu. Choose from X1,
X10, X100, and X1000.

427

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Device Information
Device Information screen shows the complete device information configured.

Figure 554. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen

Field
Manufacturer
Model
Device ID
Hardware Write Protect
Sensor Serial Number
Measurement TypePROM Number
Software Version
Hardware Equipment
Software Version
Descriptor

428

Entry
Shows the manufacturer as Foxboro.
Shows the Model Number.
Shows the device identification number.
Shows the whether the hardware is write protected.
Shows the Serial Number of the Sensor.
Shows the Measurement Type.
Shows the PROM number value.
Shows the Software Version.
Shows the Hardware Equipment.
Shows the Software Version.
Enter the Descriptor (16 characters maximum).

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Field
Tag
Message
Date of last Calibration
Final Assembly Number
Software Write Protect

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Enter the Tag (8 characters maximum).
Enter the Message (32 characters maximum).
Select the Date of Last Calibration.
Shows the Final Assembly number
Shows whether the transmitter is write protected.

Device Status
The Device Status screen shows current status of the device. The status of various parameters iseasily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X(error).

Figure 555. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen429

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of various parameters is easily recognized by the use of a green checkmark (good), a
yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error). On most DTMs, if Configuration Changed does notshow a green checkmark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset Configuration Changed Flag buttonon the lower left of the screen.

Figure 556. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter HART Status Screen

Alarm Status

Figure 557. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Alarm Status Screen

43013. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Status Record
Status Record screen shows the status of the device.

Figure 558. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Status Record Screen

Calibration
You can perform the following calibration procedures on an I/A Series Advanced Pressure
Transmitter:

Zero Trim
Makes the sensor input to the new zero input reference. After Zero Trim calibration, the process
variable is set to zero.

Figure 559. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Screen431

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Correct Input LRVCalibrates LRV (Lower Range Value) based on current input value. After the Correct Input LRV
calibration, the process variable is set to LRV.

Figure 560. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Correct Input LRV Screen

Correct Input URV
Calibrates URV (Upper Range Value) based on current input value. After the Correct Input URV
calibration, the process variable is set to URV.

Figure 561. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Correct Input URV Screen

Reset Corrects
Discards the calibration data.

Figure 562. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Reset Corrects Screen43213. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

DAC Trim
This procedure is used to trim the 4 mA (zero) and 20 mA (span) output values of the device tomatch the output of a plant standard measurement device. A suitable reference, like a digital
multimeter, is used to calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA points respectively.

Figure 563. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter DAC Trim Screen

Scaled DAC Trim
This procedure is the same as the DAC Trim procedure described above except that the 4 and 20
mA points are scaled to whatever units are required by the readout or control devices. For
example, if the readout device is a voltmeter, across a 250 Ω resistor, the 4 and 20 mA points
would correspond to 1 and 5 volts respectively.

Figure 564. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen433

MI 020-520 – January 2014

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

Troubleshooting
Restore Factory Settings
The Restore Factory Settings resets all data to factory default values. This helps in troubleshooting
the tasks.

Figure 565. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Restore Factory Settings screen

Self Test
In the Troubleshooting parameter, press the Start button to perform the transmitter self test. It
displays the status of the self-diagnosis of the device.

Figure 566. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Self Test Screen43413. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to override the analog output (mA) value.

Figure 567. Sample I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter Loop Test Screen

Field
PV Analog Output
Override Analog Value
Override Measurement

Entry
Shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Set the Analog Value between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Check/uncheck to activate/end override of measurement.

435

MI 020-520 – January 2014436

13. I/A Series Advanced Pressure Transmitter14. I/A Series Pressure S Series
TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using the PC50 Field Device Tool with
I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter with HART communication protocol. Additional
information about this transmitter and HART communication is available in the following
document:

MI 020-601: IAP10S Absolute Pressure and IGP10S Gauge Pressure with HART
Communication437

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Device Overview Screen
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information, the device information, and thecurrent primary variable (PV) data. The PV graph shows the current PV value and the percentageof the PV value.

Figure 568. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Overview Screen

Field
HART
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Polling Address
Device Information
Date of Last Calibration

Entry
Shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of the device. The
tag is limited to 8 characters.
Shows the HART description for the device. It can have a maximumof 16 characters.
Shows the HART message that is sent from the device when requested.
The message can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Shows the configured address of the device which can be between 0 to
63.
Shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
NOTE

The date of last calibration can be remotely displayed
and reconfigured, using the PC-Based Configurator.
Device Software Version

438

Shows the software version of the device.

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Field
Device ID
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URVMI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Shows the serial number of the device.
Shows the current PV analog output.
Shows the current lower range value of the primary variable.
Shows the current upper range value of the primary variable.

Process Variables Screen
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables and the measured values
assigned to the device variables.

Figure 569. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Variables Screen

Field
Process Variables
Primary Variable
PV% Span
SV
TV
QV
PV Analog Output
PV LRV

Entry
Shows the value of the primary variable (PV).
Shows the current PV value in percentage.
Shows the value of the secondary variable (SV).
Shows the value of the tertiary variable.
Shows the value of the quaternary variable.
Shows the current PV value in mA units.
Shows the PV lower range value.
439

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Field

Entry

PV URVPV LRL
PV URLPV Minimum SpanShows the PV upper range value.
Shows the PV lower range limit.
Shows the PV upper range limit.
Shows the smallest allowable difference between the upper and lower
range values.

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen is where you can specify the tag, and the upper and lower range values of the
primary variable. You can also enter the damping time and the PV mode.

Figure 570. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter General Screen

Field
GeneralTag
PV LRVPV URV
Damping

PV Mode440

Entry
Enter the tag. You can use up to 8 characters.
Enter the lower range value.
Enter the upper range value.
Select the damping time constant applied to both the digital value
representation and the analog value of the respective analog output.
Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds.
Select the PV mode as Linear.

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to set units for the primary and secondary variables.

Figure 571. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Measurement Units Screen
Field
Measurement UnitsPV Units

SV Units

Entry
Select the PV units. Choose from the following: psi, inH2O, inHg,
ftH2O, mmH2O, mmHg, bar, mbar, g/Sqcm, Pa, kPa, MPa, torr,
atm, inH2O@60degF, mH2O, inH2O4, or mmH2O4.
Select the SV units. Choose from the following: psi, inH2O, inHg,
ftH2O, mmH2O, mmHg, bar, mbar, g/Sqcm, Pa, kPa, MPa, torr,
atm, inH2O@60degF, mH2O, inH2O4, or mmH2O4.

Process Parameters
The Process Parameters screen allows you to configure the process parameters.

Figure 572. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Process Parameters Screen441

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Process Parameters
PV ModePV Offset
Damping

Electronics
Temperature Failure

External Zero
Pushbutton

Final Assembly
Number
Display

SV ModeSV Offset

442

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Entry
Select the PV mode as Linear.
Set the PV offset for display and digital output. The value can be edited
only if both PV and SV are in linear mode, otherwise it must be 0.0.
Select the damping time constant applied to both the digital value
representation and the analog value of the respective analog output.
Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds.
This feature allows you to specify action (or no action) for thetransmitter in case of electronics temperature circuit failure.
• Select Fatal if you want the output go to the value configured in
Outfail.
• Select Nonfatal to continue operation with a temperature circuit
failure.
This feature allows calibration at zero pressure or at the lower range
value pressure without removing the electronics compartment cover.
Select Enable to use this feature or select Disable if the feature is not
required.
Enter the number associated with the overall transmitter.
This parameter allows you to configure the local indicator display.
Select one of the following options:• M1 EGU - to display the primary measurement values.
• M2 EGU - to display the secondary measurement values.
• Toggle - to toggle the display between primary and secondary
measurement values.
Select the SV mode as Linear.
Set the SV offset for display and digital output. The value can be edited
only if both PV and SV are in linear mode, otherwise it must be 0.0.

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

OutputAnalog
The Analog Output screen displays the lower and upper range values of the PV and the current
value of PV analog output.

Figure 573. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Output Screen

Field
Analog Output
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URV

Entry
Shows the current PV Analog Output.
Shows the lower range value of the primary variable.
Shows the upper range value of the primary variable.

Alarm
The Alarm screen is where you can select Fail Low or Fail High for the output to go fully
downscale or fully upscale in the event of a failure.

Figure 574. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Alarm Output Screen

Field
Output Alarm
Output Alarm Code

Entry
Select Fail High or Fail Low.
443

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

HART
The HART screen allows you to specify the polling address, and set the mA loop mode. This
screen also shows the number of preambles that are sent in the response message.

Figure 575. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Output Screen
Field
HART
Polling Address

Entry

Select the transmitter polling address between 0 and 63.
An address of 0 is used in a standard point-to-point configuration
with a 4 to 20 mA output signal. Addresses 1 through 63 are used
for multidrop mode.
mA Loop Mode
Select the mA loop mode as Enable or Disable.
• If set to Enable, the transmitter will operate with a 4 to 20
mA output signal.
• If set to Disable the transmitter’s milliamp output is locked
at a fixed value of 4.0 mA.
Number of Request Preambles Shows the number of preambles to be sent in a request message
from the transmitter to the host.

444

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays the complete information of the device. It allows you to
set the tag, long tag, descriptor, HART message, and date of last calibration.

Figure 576. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Information Screen

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Distributor
TagLong Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of Last Calibration
Device ID

PV Sensor Serial Number

Entry
Shows the name of the company that manufactured thetransmitter.
Shows the name of the distributor.
Enter the tag. The tag is the primary identifier whencommunicating with a transmitter using the HART
communicator. It is limited to 8 characters.
Enter the long tag limited to 32 characters.
Enter the description limited to 16 characters.
Enter the HART message limited to 32 characters.
Select the date of last calibration.
Shows the identification number of the transmitter. This ID
identifies the transmitter when combined with the manufacturer
identification and device type.
Shows the serial number of the sensor from which the digital value
representation or transmitter variable is primarily derived.

445

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Physical Signaling CodeWrite Protect Mode
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Entry
Shows the type of physical layer that has been implemented in the
hardware that is responsible for the HART communication port.
Shows whether the transmitter is write protected.
Shows the revision level of the universal device description thatthe transmitter conforms to.
Shows the revision level of the specific transmitter description.
Shows the software revision number.
Shows the hardware revision number.

Device Status
Device Status
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 577. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Device Status Screen44614. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART and the field device status. The status of eachparameter is recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a
red cross mark (error). If Configuration Changed does not show a green check mark, click Reset
Configuration Changed Flag button to reset the configuration.

Figure 578. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter HART Status Screen

Calibration
PV Rerange
PV Rerange allows you to perform calibration by defining new values for the LRV and URV of
the primary variable.
In this calibration you can modify the PV Offset which causes both the PV and mA output tohave an offset without changing either the LRV or URV.

447

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Figure 579. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The current lower and upper range values of the PV are displayed.

Figure 580. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 2
Click Next. The following screen is displayed.

Figure 581. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 3
Select Yes to modify the LRV and URV. Then click Next.
NOTE

If you select No, you are prompted to enter PV offset and the last calibration date.

448

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 582. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 4
Select Yes to change the LRV and click Next.

Figure 583. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 5
Enter the LRV and click Next.

Figure 584. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 6
Select Yes to change the URV and click Next.

449

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Figure 585. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 7
Enter the URV and click Next. PV Offset and PV Flow URV are displayed.

Figure 586. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 8
Click Next to advance to the subsequent screen.

Figure 587. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 9
Select Yes if you want to change the PV Offset.
NOTE

If you select No, you are prompted to enter the date of last calibration.

450

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 588. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 10
Enter the PV Offset value and click Next.

Figure 589. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 11
Select the date of last calibration and click Next to complete the calibration process.

Figure 590. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter PV Rerange Calibration Screen 12
Click OK when the calibration process is completed.

451

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

SV Rerange
In SV Rerange calibration, a new value is set for SV Offset to perform the calibration.

Figure 591. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The current SV Offset value is displayed.

Figure 592. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 2
Click Next. The following screen is displayed.

Figure 593. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 3
Select Yes to change the SV Offset value. Then click Next.

Figure 594. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 4Enter the SV Offset value and click Next.

452

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 595. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter SV Rerange Calibration Screen 5
Click OK after the calibration process is completed.

Zero Trim
The Zero Trim calibration procedure is used for adjusting the lower trim point to compensate forpositioning effects.
Zero trim has no effect on the LRV.
NOTE

Do not use Zero Trim on an absolute pressure transmitter unless the transmitter has
full vacuum applied.

Figure 596. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The sensor is stabilized to zero.

Figure 597. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 2

Figure 598. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Zero Trim Calibration Screen 3
Click OK when the calibration is completed.
453

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Scaled DAC Trim
The Scaled DAC Trim procedure is used to trim the 4 and 20 mA points to whatever units are
required by the readout or control devices. For example, if the readout device is a voltmeter, acrossa 250 Ω resistor, the 4 and 20 mA points would correspond to 1 and 5 volts respectively.

Figure 599. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The mA low output value as 4 mA and mA high output value as 20 mA. You can edit
these values as required.

Figure 600. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the subsequent screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 601. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3454

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 602. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4

Figure 603. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5
Enter the meter value (low) for scaled DAC trim and click Next.

Figure 604. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6

Figure 605. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7
Click Yes if the meter value matches the scaled output value, and then click Next to continue thecalibration process.

455

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Figure 606. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8

Figure 607. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9Enter the meter value (high) for scaled DAC trim and click Next.

Figure 608. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10

Figure 609. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 11
Click Yes if the meter value matches the scaled output value, and then click Next to continue thecalibration process.

456

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 610. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 12
Click OK when the calibration is completed.

Lower Sensor Trim
This calibration procedure is used to trim the LRV and perform calibration at the applied pressure
value.

Figure 611. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The current PV LRV is displayed.

Figure 612. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 2
Click Next. You are prompted to enter the applied pressure value.

Figure 613. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 3
Enter the applied pressure value and click Next in the subsequent screens to continue thecalibration process.
457

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Figure 614. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 4

Figure 615. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Lower Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 5
Click OK when the calibration is completed.

Upper Sensor Trim
This calibration can be used to trim the URV and perform calibration at the applied pressure
value.

Figure 616. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 1
Click Next. The current PV URV is displayed.

Figure 617. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 2
Click Next. You are prompted to enter the applied pressure value.

458

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 618. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 3
Enter the applied pressure value and click Next in the subsequent screens to continue thecalibration process.

Figure 619. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 4

Figure 620. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Upper Sensor Trim Calibration Screen 5
Click OK when the calibration is completed.
NOTE

If you perform Upper Sensor Trim Calibration while the Multiple Calibration isOn, Multiple Calibration turns Off automatically.

Time in Service Meter
The Time in Service Meter calibration process is used to track the time that a particulartransmitter has been in service. The time can be tracked in two ways:


Total Days

User Days459

MI 020-520 – January 2014

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

Figure 621. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Time in Service Meter Calibration Screen

Field
Time in Service Meter
User Days
Total Days
Reset User Days

Entry
Is the number of days the transmitter has been powered up since thelast Time in Service meter reset.
Is a non-configurable value that represents the number of days thetransmitter has been powered up in the field over its lifetime.
Click Reset User Days to reset the user days to ‘0’.

Multiple Calibration
The Multiple Calibration feature enables the transmitters to use multiple calibrated ranges thatare stored in on-board memory to perform the calibration. The calibrated ranges are preset in thefactory and cover the full pressure range of the transmitter. During operation, a real-time,
seamless transition from one calibrated range to another maintains digital accuracy as a percent ofreading from 3% to 100% of the upper range limit (URL).

Figure 622. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Multiple Calibration Screen

Field
Multiple Calibration
Multiple Calibration

Entry
Select On to enable, or Off to disable the Multiple Calibration.

NOTE

If you perform Upper Sensor Trim Calibration while the Multiple Calibration isOn, Multiple Calibration turns Off automatically.

460

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
Analog Output
The Analog Output screen allows you to override analog value, and the measurement.

Figure 623. Sample I/A Series Pressure Transmitter Override Analog Output Screen

Field

Entry

Override Analog Output
PV Analog Output
This field shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Override Analog Value
Specify a value that overrides the analog value.
Override Measurement Select this check box to override the analog value. Deselect it if
override is not required.

461

MI 020-520 – January 2014462

14. I/A Series Pressure S Series Transmitter15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series
Transmitters
This chapter provides information that is exclusive to using IMV25 and IMV31 Transmitterswith HART communication protocol. The IMV25 Multivariable Transmitter measures absoluteand differential pressure, sensor and electronic temperature, and process temperature from an
RTD. It also provides transmission of all the measured values. The IMV31 Electronic
Multivariable Level Transmitter measures absolute and differential pressure, sensor and electronics
temperature, and process temperature (from an RTD). When used for level measurement, itcalculates level compensated for density changes that occur due to pressure and temperaturechanges and provides transmission of all the measured and calculated values.
Additional information about these transmitters with HART communication is available in thefollowing documents.


MI 020-382 - I/A Series® Intelligent Electronic Multivariable Transmitters
IMV25-T and IMV30-T with HART or 4 to 20 mA Output Signals Installation,
Calibration, Configuration, and Maintenance Style A



MI 020-383 - I/A Series® Intelligent Electronic Multivariable Transmitter
IMV31-T Density Compensated Level Transmitters with HART or 4 to 20 mA
Output Signals



MI 020-496 - PCMV Intelligent Field Device Configurator for use with IMV25-D,
IMV25-T, IMV30-D, and IMV30-T Multivariable Transmitters

MI 020-497 - PCMV Intelligent Field Device Configurator for use with IMV31
Density Compensated Level Transmitters463

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Create Pre-Configuration File
The Pre-Configuration screen enables you to create a new configuration file from one of several
default databases, or from the configuration of a connected device. You can then download the
new configuration to a connected device or save it to a file.
Follow the steps given below to create a new configuration file:
1. Double click the IMV series Device DTM. Create Pre-Configuration File window
appears.
2. Select the Device Type from the drop-down list and select the device model.
3. Click OK. The device DTM appears.
4. Configure the selected device parameters.
5. To save the configuration use Save As in the File menu and save the configuration with
.PW4 file extension.
The following figure shows the Pre-Configuration screen for the IMV31.

Figure 624. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Create Pre-Configuration File464

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

The following figure shows the Pre-Configuration screen for the IMV25.

Figure 625. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Create PreConfiguration File
NOTE

To access a pre-configuration file you must not be connected to a device.

465

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information, device information, and thecurrent primary variable (PV) data. Each time the PV is mapped to a different measurement the
PV data and the graphical representation of the PV data are updated accordingly.
The following figure shows the Device Overview screen for the IMV31.

Figure 626. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Device Overview Screen46615. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

The following figure shows the Device Overview screen for the IMV25.

Figure 627. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Device Overview Screen

Field
HART
Tag
Descriptor
Message

Polling Address
Device Information
Date of Last Calibration

Entry
This field shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of thedevice. The tag name has a character limit of maximum 8 characters.
This field shows the HART descriptor. The descriptor has a character
limit of maximum 16 characters.
This field shows the HART message that is sent from the device whenrequested. The message has a character limit of maximum 32
characters.
This field shows the configured address of the device.
This field shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
NOTE

You can change the calibration date in “Device
Information”.
Device Software Version
Device ID

This field shows the software version of the device.
This field shows the unique identification number of the device.

467

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field

Entry

Primary Variable
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URVThis field shows the current PV analog output in mA.
This field shows the lower range value of the measurement that is
mapped to PV in the selected measurement units.
This field shows the upper range value of the measurement that is
mapped to PV in the selected measurement units.

NOTE

The Upper Range Value (URV) and Lower Range Value (LRV) are displayed in themeasurement units that are selected for the PV. If you change the measurement
units for PV, the LRV and URV are converted to the units that are selected.

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables, and the measured values
assigned to the device variables in the selected engineering units.
The following figure shows the Process Variables screen for the IMV31.

Figure 628. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Process Variables Screen

46815. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

The following figure shows the Process Variables screen for the IMV25.

Figure 629. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Process Variables Screen
NOTE

The measurements for the primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables are
mapped in the “General” screen, and the units for the measurements are selected in
the “Measurement Units” screen.

Field
Process Variables
Primary Variable
Secondary Variable
Tertiary Variable
Quaternary Variable
PV Analog Output
PV as % of Range

Entry
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to primaryvariable.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to secondary
variable.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to tertiary
variable.
This field shows the value of the measurement mapped to quaternary
variable.
This field shows the PV analog output value.
This field shows the current PV value in percentage with respect to therange defined by LRV and URV.
469

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Differential Pressure(DP)
Pressure (AP)(IMV25 only)
Tank Pressure (M2)
(IMV31 only)
Sensor Temperature
Electronics
Temperature
RTD TemperatureDensity(IMV31 only)
Level(IMV31 only)

Entry
This field shows differential pressure measurement.
This field shows the absolute pressure measurement.
This field shows the tank pressure measurement. This is different fromabsolute pressure because it is density compensated.
This field shows the sensor temperature measurement.
This field shows the electronics temperature measurement.
This field shows the RTD temperature measurement.
This field shows the density measurement of the fluid.
This field shows the fluid level measurement.

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen allows you to map measurements to primary, secondary, tertiary, andquaternary variables. It displays the upper and lower range limits and the upper and lower range
values of the measurement mapped to the PV.
The upper range value (URV) and lower range value (LRV) are configurable. You can set values
within the configurable limits for these parameters.
The following figure shows the General screen for the IMV31.

470

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 630. Sample IMV31 Transmitter General Screen
The following figure shows the General screen for the IMV25.

Figure 631. Sample IMV25 Transmitter General Screen471

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
GeneralPV MapSV Map

TV MapQV Map

PV URLPV LRL
PV URVPV LRVmA Output Failsafe

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Select a measurement for PV mapping from the drop-down list.
For IMV31, choose from Differential Pressure, Tank Pressure, Level,
and Density. 4-20 mA output of PV map should always be Level.
For IMV25, choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, and RTD Temperature.
Select a measurement for SV mapping from the drop-down list.
For IMV31, choose from Differential Pressure, Tank Pressure, Sensor
Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTDa, Level, and Density.
For IMV25, choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, and RTD Temperature.
Select a measurement for TV mapping from the drop-down list.
For IMV31, choose from Differential Pressure, Tank Pressure, Sensor
Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD, Level, and Density.
For IMV25, choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, and RTD Temperature.
Select a measurement for QV mapping from the drop-down list.
For IMV31, choose from Differential Pressure, Tank Pressure, Sensor
Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD, Level, and Density.
For IMV25, choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, and RTD Temperature.
This field shows the upper range limit of the measurement mapped toprimary variable.
This field shows the lower range limit of the measurement mapped toprimary variable.
Specify the PV upper range value within the specified limits for PV.
Specify the PV lower range value within the specified limits for PV.
This is the mA output delivered for transmitter faults and criticalsensor faults. Choose Up Scale or Down Scale from the drop-down
list.

a. RTD measurement will be available in IMV31 if RTD is turned "on". Do not map RTD
if the measurement is turned "off".
NOTE

The measurement units for PV URL, PV LRL, PV URV, and PV LRV are updated
each time you change the measurement units for the primary variable.

472

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to set engineering units for each process parameter inthe device. It also allows you to define custom units.
The following figure shows Measurement Units screen for IMV31.

Figure 632. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen473

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

The following figure shows Measurement Units screen for IMV25.

Figure 633. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen

Field
Measurement Units
Differential Pressure
Units

Absolute Pressure Units

Temperature Units(IMV31 only)
Sensor Temperature
Units(IMV25 only)
Electronic Temperature
Units(IMV25 only)
RTD Temperature Units(IMV25 only)

474

Entry
Select the differential pressure units from the drop-down list. Choose
from psi, inHg, ftH2O, inH2O, atm, bar, mbar, MPa, kPa, Pa,
kg/Sqcm, g/Sqcm, cmHg, mmHg, torr, mH2O, cmH2O, mmH2O,
and hW60.
Select the absolute pressure units from the drop-down list. Choose
from psia, inHga, ftH2Oa, inH2Oa, atma, bara, mbara, MPaa, kPaa,
Paa, kg/Sqcma, g/Sqcma, cmHga, mmHga, torra, mH2Oa, cmH2Oa,
mmH2Oa, and hW60a.
If you select the Pressure Type as ‘Gauge’ the above list of options
changes accordingly. For ‘Gauge’ pressure type, choose from psi, inHg,
ftH2O, inH2O, atm, bar, mbar, MPa, kPa, Pa, kg/Sqcm, g/Sqcm,
cmHg, mmHg, torr, mH2O, cmH2O, mmH2O, and hW60.
Select the temperature units from the drop-down list. Choose from
degC, K, degF, and degR.
Select the sensor temperature units from the drop-down list. Choose
from degC, K, degF, and degR.
Select the electronic temperature units from the drop-down list.
Choose from degC, K, degF, and degR.
Select the RTD temperature units from the drop-down list. Choose
from degC, K, degF, and degR.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Level Units(IMV31 only)

Select the units to measure level. Select one of the following options
from the drop-down list:in, ft, mm, cm, and m.
Density Units
Select the units to measure density. Select one of the following options(IMV31 only)
from the drop-down list:kg/m3, g/cm3, oz/in3, lb/ft3, lb/yd3, LT/yd3, ST/yd3, lb/gal, and kg/l.
Tank Dimensional Units Select units to measure tank dimensions. Select one of the following(IMV31 only)
options from the drop-down list:in, ft, mm, cm, and m.
DP Custom Engineering Units
Label - Custom Values
Specify a label for the custom units. The label specified will be added
to the Differential Pressure drop-down list.
Label - Reference Values Select a reference unit that is convenient for conversion to the custom
unit.
URV - Custom Values
Specify the value in custom units equal to the URV value in thereference units selected.
URV - Reference Values
This field displays the upper range reference value.
LRV - Custom Values
Specify the value in custom units equal to the LRV value in thereference units selected.
LRV - Reference Values
This field displays the lower range reference value.
Level Custom Engineering Units and Density Custom Engineering Units (IMV31 only)
Label - Custom Values
Specify a name for the custom units.
Label - Reference Values Select a reference unit that is convenient for conversion to yourcustom unit.
Ref - Custom Values
Specify the value in custom units equal to the reference value inreference units.
Ref - Reference Values
The value of the URV in the units selected appears as a default
value. You can change this to a number that is convenient foryour conversion.
URV - Custom Values
Specify the URV custom value.
URV - Reference Values
Specify the URV reference value.
LRV - Custom Values
Specify the LRV custom value.
LRV - Reference Values
Specify the LRV reference value.

Differential Pressure
The Differential Pressure screen displays the upper and lower range values and the upper andlower range limits set for the differential pressure.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
URL and LRL.

475

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

The following screen shows Differential Pressure(DP) screen for IMV31.

Figure 634. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen
The following screen shows Differential Pressure(DP) screen for IMV25.

Figure 635. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen

Field
Differential Pressure
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Damping

476

Entry
This field shows the upper range limit.
This field shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.
Select the damping time. Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and
32 seconds.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Transfer Function(IMV25 only)

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the differential mode from the following drop-down list:• Linear• Square Root Linear < 20% Flow
• Square Root Cutoff < 10% Flow

Absolute Pressure
The Absolute Pressure screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for the absolutepressure.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
URL and LRL.

Figure 636. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen (IMV31 shown)

Field
Pressure (AP)Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Damping
Pressure Type
Absolute Reference
ATM Pressure

Entry
This field shows the upper range limit.
This field shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.
Select the absolute pressure damping time. Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5,
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32 seconds.
Select the pressure type from the drop-down list. Choose from
Absolute or Gauge.
This field is enabled only when Gauge is selected as the pressure type.
Specify the ambient atmospheric pressure.

477

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

NOTE

Gauge pressure is equal to the measured absolute pressure minus the value enteredin Reference ATM Pressure. It is not referenced to varying atmospheric pressure.

Sensor Temperature (IMV25 Only)
The Sensor Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for the sensor
temperature.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
URL and LRL.

Figure 637. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Screen
Field
Sensor Temperature
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

Entry
This field shows the upper range limit.
This field shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.

Electronics Temperature (IMV25 Only)
The Electronics Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for theelectronics temperature.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
URL and LRL.

478

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 638. Sample IMV25 Transmitter Electronic Temperature Screen
Field

Entry

Electronics Temperature
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

This field shows the upper range limit.
This field shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.

RTD Temperature (IMV25 Only)
The RTD Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits for the RTD
temperature, and allows you to set the upper and lower values to measure RTD temperature.

Figure 639. Sample IMV25 Transmitter RTD Temperature Screen479

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field

Entry

RTD Temperature
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Measurement

This field shows the upper range limit for the RTD temperature.
This field shows the lower range limit for the RTD temperature.
Specify the upper range value for RTD temperature.
Specify the lower range value for RTD temperature.
Select On to turn on the RTD measurement, and Off to turn off the
RTD measurement.

Temperature (IMV31 Only)
The Temperature screen displays the status of the RTD measurement. You can turn on or turn off
the RTD measurement. You can also set a default value for the device to use in case of RTD
failure.

Figure 640. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Temperature Screen
Field
Temperature
Measurement

Entry
Select one of the options - On or Off to turn on or turn off the RTD
measurement.
NOTE

The On and Off options are dimmed if the RTD is
selected as source in “Application Design Conditions(IMV31 Only)”.
Strategy

Strategy Default Value

480

Select one of the following options for the device to react in case of
RTD failure:• Never Use Default - device will not use the default value• Use Default on RTD Failure - device uses the default value specified.
Specify the default value for RTD failure.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

NOTE

RTD measurement will be available in IMV31 if RTD is turned "on". Do not map
RTD if the measurement is turned "off".

Density (IMV31 Only)
The Density screen displays the upper and lower range limits for density measurement, and allows
you to set upper and lower range values to measure density.

Figure 641. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Density Screen
Field
Density
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

Entry
This field shows the upper range limit for the density measurement.
This field shows the lower range limit for the density measurement.
Specify the upper range value for density measurement.
Specify the lower range value for density measurement.

Level (IMV31 Only)
The Level screen displays the upper and lower range limits for level measurement, and allows you
to set upper and lower range values. Setting the upper and lower range values defines the 4 and20 mA span limits for liquid level applications.

Figure 642. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Screen481

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Level
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
This field shows the upper range limit to measure the level of the fluid.
This field shows the lower range limit to measure the level of the fluid.
Specify the upper range value to measure level of the fluid.
Specify the lower range value to measure level of the fluid.

NOTE

The graphical representation shows the percentage of the upper and lower range
values set for level measurement.

OutputHARTThe HART screen allows you to select HART polling address. It displays the number of request
preambles, and allows you to enter the response preambles.

Figure 643. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Output HART Screen (IMV31 shown)482

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
HART
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles
Number of Response
Preambles

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the HART polling address from the drop-down list. You canselect from a range of 0 to 15.
This field shows the number of preambles to be sent in a response
message from the transmitter to the host.
Specify the number of response preambles.

Local Display Access
The Local Display Access screen is where you can set password that allows you to change theconfiguration and calibration at the local display.

Figure 644. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Local Display Access Screen (IMV31 shown)
Field
Local Display Access
Password Options

Configuration Password

Calibration Password

Entry
Select a password option. Choose from No Passwords,
Configuration Password Enabled, and Configuration andCalibration Password enabled.
This field appears when you select Configuration Password
Enabled from the password options. Specify the password thatallows you to change the configuration from the local display.
This field appears when you select Configuration and Calibration
Password enabled from the password options. Specify the
password that allows you to change the calibration from the local
display.

483

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays the complete information of the device. It allows you to
configure the final assembly number, tag, descriptor, message, and date of last calibration of thedevice.

Figure 645. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Device Information Screen (IMV31 shown)
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Device TypeModel
Device ID
Write Protect Mode

Sensor Serial Number
Final Assembly Number
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date of Last Calibration
484

Entry
This field shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
This field shows the device type that is registered with the
HART Communication Foundation.
This field shows the model of the device.
This field shows the identification number of the device.
This field shows whether variables can be written to the fielddevice or whether commands that cause actions to be
performed in the field device can or cannot occur.
This field shows the serial number of the sensor.
Specify the Final Assembly Number. This is the number
associated with the overall transmitter.
Specify the HART tag.
Specify the HART descriptor.
Specify the HART message that is sent from the device whenrequested.
Select the date of last calibration from the calendar.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Hardware Revision
Software Revision
Software Sub Revision

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
This field shows the universal command set revision level.
This field shows the field device revision level.
This field shows the hardware revision level.
This field shows the software revision level.
This field shows the software sub revision level.

Device Status
Device Status
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 646. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Device Status Screen (IMV31 shown)485

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Calibration
DAC Trim
DAC Trim calibration allows you to set the loop current to either 4 mA (zero) or 20 mA (span).
By providing the inputs to the following screens, the values indicated by a suitable reference like adigital multimeter, the transmitter can trim its output. DAC Trim performs 4 mA and 20 mA
calibration points respectively.

Figure 647. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 1 (IMV31 shown)
NOTE

DAC Trim calibration is allowed only when the mA is active in HART status andthe polling address is set to zero.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 648. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 2 (IMV31 shown)486

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 649. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 3 (IMV31 shown)

Figure 650. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 4 (IMV31 shown)

Field
DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the value for the reference meter.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 651. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 5 (IMV31 shown)487

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Click Yes to continue the calibration process. The following screen appears. If you click No, entera value from the reference meter. Refer to Figure 653.

Figure 652. Sample IMV25/IMV31Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 6 (IMV31 shown)

Figure 653. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 7 (IMV31 shown)

Field
DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify a value from the reference meter.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 654. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 8 (IMV31 shown)488

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Click Yes to complete the DAC trim calibration.
If you click No, enter a value for reference meter.
The following screen appears if the DAC Trim calibration is completed successfully.

Figure 655. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 9 (IMV31 shown)

Scaled DAC Trim
This procedure is the same as the DAC Trim procedure described in the previous section exceptthat the 4 and 20 mA points are scaled to whatever units are required by the readout or control
devices. For example, if the readout device is a voltmeter, across a 250  resistor, the 4 and 20 mA
points would correspond to 1 and 5 volts, respectively.

Figure 656. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 1 (IMV31 shown)
NOTE

Scaled DAC Trim calibration is allowed only when the mA is active in HART status
and the polling address is set to zero.

489

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Click Next. The following screen appears.

Figure 657. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 2 (IMV31 shown)

Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Low ValueHigh Value

Entry
Specify the scaled value that will be mapped to 4 mA.
Specify the scaled value that will be mapped to 20 mA.

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 658. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 3 (IMV31 shown)

Figure 659. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 4 (IMV31 shown)490

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 660. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 5 (IMV31 shown)
Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the reference meter value for scaled DAC trim at the
4 mA point.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 661. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 6 (IMV31 shown)
Click Yes, and then click Next to continue the calibration process. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 662. If you click No, the screen appears as shown in Figure 663.

Figure 662. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 7 (IMV31 shown)491

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 663. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 8 (IMV31 shown)

Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the reference meter value for DAC trim at the 20 mA
point.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 664. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 9 (IMV31 shown)
Click Yes to complete the Scaled DAC trim calibration. If you click No, enter the reference metervalue and continue the calibration process.
The following screen appears if the DAC Trim calibration is completed successfully.

492

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 665. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 10 (IMV31 shown)

Differential Pressure
The Differential Pressure screen allows you to calibrate differential pressure at zero value, LRV,
URV, 1 user point, and 2 user points.

Figure 666. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 1 (IMV31
shown)

Field

Entry

Differential Pressure Calibration
Calibrate
Select an option from the drop-down list to calibrate differential
pressure. Choose from DP at Zero, DP at LRV, DP at URV, DP at 1
User Point, and DP at 2 User Points.
NOTE

If you select:
DP at 1 User Point - Calibration is performed at 1 user entered point.
DP at 2 User Points - Calibration is performed at 2 user entered points.
Click Next to start the calibration process.

493

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 667. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 2 (IMV31
shown)
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 668. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 3 (IMV31
shown)

Figure 669. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 4 (IMV31
shown)

Figure 670. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 5 (IMV31
shown)
494

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

When the calibration is completed successfully, the following screen appears. Click OK.

Figure 671. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 6 (IMV31
shown)

Absolute Pressure
Absolute Pressure is the pressure at the sensor connection. For the IMV31, the Pressure (AP)Calibration screen allows you to calibrate absolute pressure at 1 user point, 2 user points, and M2
at 1 User Point. For the IMV25, the Pressure (AP) Calibration screen allows you to calibrate
absolute pressure at pressure, the lower range value, the upper range value, 1 user point, and 2
user points.

Figure 672. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 1 (IMV31
shown)495

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field

Entry

Absolute Pressure Calibration
Calibrate
Select an option from the drop-down list to calibrate absolutepressure.
For IMV31, choose from AP at 1 User Point, AP at 2 User Points andM2 at 1 User Point.
For IMV25, choose from AP at Pressure, AP at LRV, AP at URV, AP
at 1 User Point, and AP at 2 User Points.
• AP at Pressure - allows calibration at specified pressure• AP at LRV - allows calibration at specified lower range value• AP at URV - allows calibration at specified upper range value• AP at 1 User Point - allows bench pressure calibration at 1 user
determined point• AP at 2 User Points - allows bench pressure calibration at 2 user
determined points• M2 at 1 User Point - allows you to perform a 1-point calibration
while the transmitter is installed on the tank
Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 673. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 2 (IMV31
shown)
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 674. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 3 (IMV31
shown)

496

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 675. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 4 (IMV31
shown)

Figure 676. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 5 (IMV31
shown)

Field

Entry

Absolute Pressure Calibration
Enter User Point 1
Specify a value for absolute pressure calibration.
aValuea. This parameter varies based on the option selected for AP calibration. If you select ‘AP at 2 User Points’, youneed to enter two values for calibration.

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 677. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 6 (IMV31
shown)497

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 678. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 7 (IMV31
shown)
When the calibration is completed successfully, the following screen appears. Click OK.

Figure 679. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 8 (IMV31
shown)

Sensor Temperature (IMV31 Only)
The Sensor Temperature Calibration screen allows you to calibrate sensor temperature at userdefined points.

Figure 680. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 1
Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 681. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 2498

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 682. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 3

Figure 683. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 4

Figure 684. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 5

Field

Entry

Sensor Temperature Calibration
Enter Temperature Value
Specify a value for sensor temperature calibration.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 685. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 6499

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 686. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Calibration Screen 7
Click OK when the calibration is completed.

Electronics Temperature (IMV31 Only)
The Electronics Temperature Calibration screen allows you to calibrate electronics temperature atuser-defined points.

Figure 687. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 1
Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 688. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 689. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 2500

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 690. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 3

Figure 691. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 4

Field

Entry

Electronics Temperature Calibration
Enter Temperature Value
Specify a value for electronics temperature calibration.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 692. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 5

Figure 693. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 6
When the calibration is completed successfully, the following screen appears. Click OK.

501

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 694. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Electronics Temperature Calibration Screen 7

RTD Temperature
The RTD Temperature Calibration screen allows you to calibrate the RTD temperature at userdefined points.

Figure 695. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 1 (IMV31
shown)
Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 696. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 2 (IMV31
shown)
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 697. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 3 (IMV31
shown)

502

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 698. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 4 (IMV31
shown)

Figure 699. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 5 (IMV31
shown)
Field

Entry

RTD Temperature Calibration
Enter Temperature Value
Specify a value for RTD temperature calibration.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 700. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 6 (IMV31
shown)

Figure 701. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 7 (IMV31
shown)
Click OK to complete the calibration.
503

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Level (IMV31 Only)
Level calibration is a field calibration procedure done at the tank. It can be done at one or two
user-defined points.

Figure 702. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 1

Field
Level Calibration
Calibrate

Entry
Select an option from the drop-down list for level calibration. Choose
from Level Zero and Level Span.

Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 703. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 704. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 3504

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 705. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 4

Figure 706. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 5
Field
Level Calibration
Enter Level Value

Entry
Specify a value for level calibration.

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 707. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 6

Figure 708. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Level Calibration Screen 7
Click OK to complete the calibration.

505

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Application Design Conditions (IMV31 Only)
The Application Design Conditions screen is where you can start the tank level configuration
process. To start the process, you can specify parameters such as tank type, tank pressure, head
dimensions, temperature sources, and maximum and minimum values of operating conditions.

Figure 709. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions (Tank Type Selection)

Field
Level Tank Configuration
Tank Type

506

Entry
Select the tank type from the drop-down list. Choose from:• Open Tank
• Closed Tank, Dry Leg• Closed Tank, Wet Leg• Boiler Drum

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Open Tank
The Open Tank configuration allows you to calculate density of fluids in the tank.

Figure 710. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions Open Tank Selection Screen

Field
Level Tank Configuration
Tank Type
Tank Dimensions
H1
H2
Operating Conditions
M2 - Minimum
M2 - Maximum
T1 - Minimum
T1 - Maximum
T1 - Source

Entry
Select the tank type as Open Tank from the drop-down list.
Specify the height from lower leg tap to zero level point.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to the lower leg tap.
Specify the minimum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the maximum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the minimum operating value for T1 (tank liquid
temperature).
Specify the maximum operating value for T1 (tank liquid
temperature).
Select the source for tank liquid temperature from the drop-downlist. Choose from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User
Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
507

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series TransmittersField
T2 - Minimum
T2 - Maximum
T2 - Source

Next

Entry
Specify the minimum operating value for T2 (high-side leg
temperature).
Specify the maximum operating value for T2 (high-side leg
temperature).
Select the source for high-side leg temperature from the drop-downlist. Choose from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User
Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen.

The subsequent screen allows you to select the tank liquid and calculate its density at the given
pressure and temperature values. Select the liquid from the following tank liquid options:
1. Water or Steam
2. AlChE 250+ Fluids
3. Standard Fluids
4. Enter Fluid Properties

Tank Liquid - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of liquid in the tank when the liquid type is Water or
Steam.

Figure 711. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank - Tank Liquid- Water or Steam508

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the liquid as Water or Steam from the drop-down list.
Specify the normal operating pressure of the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature of the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid at thegiven pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the density calculated in the selected engineering
units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density liquid in the tank when the liquid type is AlChE 250+
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of 250 fluids next to the liquid selection.

Figure 712. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank - Tank Liquid- AlChE 250+ Fluids Selection509

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Save

Entry
Select the liquid as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid selection.
Specify the normal operating pressure of the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature of the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid at thegiven pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the density calculated in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of liquid in the tank when the liquid type is Standard
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of standard fluids next to the liquid
selection.

510

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 713. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank - Tank Liquid- Standard Fluids Selection
Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Save

Entry
Select the liquid as Standard Fluids and then select a fluid fromdrop-down list displayed next to the liquid selection.
Specify the normal operating pressure of the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature of the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid at thegiven pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the density calculated in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

511

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Tank Liquid - Enter Fluid Properties
This screen allows you to calculate density of the liquid in the tank for the customized fluid.

Figure 714. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Open Tank - Tank Liquid- Enter Fluid Properties Selection

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidFluid Properties
Fluid Name
Temperature (Normal)
Data Points

Temperature

512

Entry
Select the liquid as Enter Fluid Properties from the drop-down list.
Specify the fluid name.
Specify the normal operating temperature of the fluid.
Select the number of data points for temperature and density
measurements. Choose from:• 1 Data Point• 2 Data Points• 3 Data Points• 4 Data Points
Based on the number of data points you select, you can specify
the low/high reference points.
Based on the number of data points selected this parameter allows
you to specify the data points (low and high) for temperature
measurement.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Actual Density
Tank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Based on the number of data points selected this parameter allows
you to specify the data points for density measurement.
Specify the normal operating pressure for the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid for the
given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selected engineering
units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Closed Tank, Dry Leg
The Closed Tank Dry Leg configuration allows you to calculate density of fluids in the tank andthe density of gas/vapor in the upper leg.

Figure 715. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg

513

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Level Tank Configuration
Tank Type
Tank Pressure Greater than
20 psia

Tank Dimensions
H1
H2
H3
Operating Conditions
M2 - Minimum
M2 - Maximum
T1 - Minimum
T1 - Maximum
T1 - Source

T2 - Minimum
T2 - Maximum
T2 - Source

T4 - Minimum
T4 - Maximum
T4 - Source

Next

514

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Select the tank type as Closed Tank, Dry Leg from the drop-down
list.
The value and the measurement units for this parameter are updated
based on the measurement units selected for absolute pressure.
Selection of this check box allows you to specify the following:• H3 - height from transmitter connection to upper leg tap• T4 - temperature 4
Specify the height from lower leg tap to zero level point.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to the lower leg tap.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to upper leg tap.
Specify the minimum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the maximum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 1.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 1.
Select the source for temperature 1 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 2.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 2.
Select the source for temperature 2 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 4.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 4.
Select the source for temperature 4 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

The subsequent screen allows you to select the tank liquid and calculate its density at the given
pressure and temperature values. Select the liquid from the following tank liquid options:
1. Water or Steam
2. AlChE 250+ Fluids
3. Standard Fluids

Tank Liquid - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of the tank liquid if the liquid is Water or Steam.

Figure 716. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Tank Liquid - Water or Steam515

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Next

Entry
Select Water or Stream from the drop-down list.
Specify the normal operating pressure for the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid for the
given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selected engineering
units.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of gas/vapor in the upper leg.

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor in the upper leg if the vapor is Water or
Steam.

Figure 717. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Water or Steam516

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Saturated Steam Calculation(RTD Temperature not
used)
Steam Calculation (Using
measured temperature andpressure)CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the vapor as Water or Stream from the drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure in the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the upper leg.
Select this option to calculate saturated steam without using the
RTD temperature.
Select this option to calculate steam using measured temperatureand pressure.
Click Calculate to calculate density for the given pressure andtemperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selected engineering
units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate the density of tank liquid if the liquid is AlChE 250+ Fluids.
Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of 250 fluids next to the liquid selection.

517

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 718. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Next

518

Entry
Select the liquid as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid selection.
Specify the normal operating pressure for the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid at thegiven pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of gas/vapor in the upper leg.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor in the upper leg if the liquid is AlChE
250+ Fluids.

Figure 719. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

Entry
Select the vapor as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the vapor selection.
This field shows the normal operating pressure in the upper
leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the upper leg.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the gas/vapor in theupper leg at the given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the density calculated in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

519

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate the density of tank liquid if the liquid is Standard Fluids.
Selection of this option displays a drop-down list fluids next to the liquid selection. Select theliquid as Standard Fluids and then select a fluid from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid
selection. For the detailed description of other parameters in this screen, refer to “Tank Liquid AlChE 250+ Fluids” on page 517.

Figure 720. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids

520

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of the gas/vapor in the upper leg if the vapor isStandard Fluids. Select the vapor as Standard Fluids and then select a fluid from drop-down list
displayed next to the vapor selection. For the detailed description of other parameters in thisscreen, refer to “Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids” on page 519.

Figure 721. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids521

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases
This screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor if the vapor is Natural Gases. Select a tankliquid and then select the vapor as Natural Gases. A drop-down list of the following methods is
displayed next to the vapor selection:
1. NX-19
2. AGA-8 Gr, N2 and CO2
3. AGA-8 Heating Value, Gr and CO2 Inputs
4. AGA-8 Detailed Method, Input Mole Fractions
5. S-GERG Heating Value, Gr and CO2 Inputs
Select a method and calculate the density of gas/vapor for the given values.

Figure 722. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (NX-19 Selection)

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure

522

Entry
Select the vapor as Natural Gases and then select NX-19 fromthe drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Normal TemperatureSpecific Gravity
NitrogenCarbon Dioxide
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Enter the specific gravity of the gas/vapor in the upper leg.
Specify the percentage of nitrogen in the upper leg gas/vapor.
Specify the percentage of carbon dioxide in the upper leg
gas/vapor.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg at the given temperature and pressure measurements.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Figure 723. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Gr Selection)523

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal TemperatureSpecific Gravity
Heating Value
NitrogenCarbon dioxide
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Select the vapor as Natural Gases and then select AGA-8 Grfrom the drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Enter the specific gravity of the gas/vapor in the upper leg.
This field shows the heating value of the selected gas.
Specify the percentage of nitrogen in the gas/vapor.
Specify the percentage of carbon dioxide in the gas/vapor.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Figure 724. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Heating Value Selection)524

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal TemperatureSpecific Gravity
Heating Value
NitrogenCarbon Dioxide
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the vapor as Natural Gases and then select AGA-8
Heating Value Gr from the drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Enter the specific gravity of the gas/vapor in the upper leg.
Specify the heating value of the selected gas.
This field shows the percentage of nitrogen in the upper leg
gas/vapor.
Specify the percentage of carbon dioxide in the upper leg
gas/vapor.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Figure 725. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Detailed Method Selection)525

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor

Enter Properties

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Select the vapor as Natural Gases and then select AGA-8
Detailed Method from the drop-down list. Enter Properties
button appears.
Click Enter Properties to select the gases and enter molepercent (refer to Figure 726). The total mole percent for thegases selected should not exceed 100%.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Figure 726. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gas - Natural Gas Properties526

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 727. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (S-GERG Heating Value Selection)

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal TemperatureSpecific Gravity
Heating Value
NitrogenCarbon dioxide
Calculate

Entry
Select the vapor as Natural Gases and then select S-GERG
Heating Value Gr from the drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Enter the specific gravity of the gas/vapor in the upper leg.
Specify the heating value of the selected gas.
This field shows the percentage of nitrogen in the upper leg
gas/vapor.
Specify the percentage of carbon dioxide in the upper leg
gas/vapor.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg.

527

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Density
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

Entry
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

If you choose vapor as Mixtures, enter mixture properties.

Figure 728. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixtures Screen

52815. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Field
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Vapor
Enter Properties

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Gas/Vapor
Save

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the vapor as Mixtures. Enter Properties button appears.
Click Enter Properties to select the gases and enter molepercent (refer to Figure 729). The total mole percent for all thegases selected should not exceed 100%.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for gas/vapor in
the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for gas/vapor in theupper leg.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of gas/vapor in theupper leg.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

Mixture Properties

Figure 729. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Dry Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixture Properties Screen529

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Closed Tank, Wet Leg
The Closed Tank, Wet Leg configuration allows you to calculate density of fluids in the tank andin the upper leg and the density of gas/vapor in the tank.

Figure 730. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg

Field
Level Tank Configuration
Tank Type
Tank Pressure Greater than
20 psia

Dual Seal
Tank Dimensions
H1
H2
H3
Operating Conditions
M2 - Minimum

530

Entry
Select the tank type as Closed Tank, Wet Leg from the drop-down
list.
The value and the measurement units for this parameter are updated
based on the measurement units selected for absolute pressure.
Selection of this check box allows you to specify the following:• H3 - height from transmitter connection to upper leg tap• T4 - temperature 4
Select Dual Seal to measure the height from the bottom of the tank.
Specify the height from lower leg tap to zero level point.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to the lower leg tap.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to upper leg tap.
Specify the minimum operating value to measure tank pressure.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series TransmittersField
M2 - Maximum
T1 - Minimum
T1 - Maximum
T1 - Source

T2 - Minimum
T2 - Maximum
T2 - Source

T4 - Minimum
T4 - Maximum
T4 - Source

Next

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the maximum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 1.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 1.
Select the source for temperature 1 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 2.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 2.
Select the source for temperature 2 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 4.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 4.
Select the source for temperature 4 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen.

The subsequent screen allows you to select the tank liquid and calculate its density at the given
pressure and temperature values. Select the liquid from the following tank liquid options:
1. Water or Steam
2. AlChE 250+ Fluids
3. Standard Fluids531

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Tank Liquid - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of the tank liquid if the liquid is Water or Steam.

Figure 731. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Water or Steam

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Next

532

Entry
Select the liquid as Water or Stream from the drop-down list.
Specify the normal operating pressure for the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the tank liquid for the
given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selected engineering
units.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of gas/vapor in the tank.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Tank Gas/Vapor - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor in the tank if the vapor is Water or Steam.

Figure 732. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - Water or Steam

Field
Tank Gas/Vapor(M2)
Vapor
Tank Gas/Vapor(M2)
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Saturated Steam Calculation(RTD Temperature not
used)
Steam Calculation (Using
measured temperature andpressure)
Next

Entry
Select the vapor as Water or Stream from the drop-down list.
This field shows the normal operating pressure in the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the upper leg.
Select this option to calculate saturated steam without using the
RTD temperature.
Select this option to calculate steam using measured temperatureand pressure.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of liquid in the upper leg.

533

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Upper Leg Liquid - Water or SteamThis screen allows you to calculate density of liquid in the upper leg if the liquid is Water or
Steam.

Figure 733. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - Water or Steam

Field
Upper Leg Liquid
LiquidUpper Leg Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Liquid
Save

534

Entry
Select the liquid as Water or Steam from the drop-down list.
Specify the normal operating pressure in the upper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the upper leg.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the upper leg
liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density for the given pressure andtemperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selected engineering
units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Tank Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of the liquid in the tank if the liquid is AlChE 250+
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of 250 fluids next to the liquid selection.

Figure 734. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Al ChE 250+ Fluids

Field
Tank Liquid
LiquidTank Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Tank Liquid
Next

Entry
Select the liquid as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid selection.
Specify the normal operating pressure for the tank liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the tank liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the tank liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density at the given pressure
and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of gas/vapor in the tank.

535

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Tank Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor in the tank if the vapor is AlChE 250+
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of 250 fluids next to the vapor selection.

Figure 735. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - AlChE 250+ Fluids

Field
Tank Gas/Vapor(M2)
Vapor
Tank Gas/Vapor
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
CalculateDensity
Tank Gas/Vapor
Next

536

Entry
Select the vapor as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the vapor selection.
This field shows the normal operating pressure in the tank.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the tank.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the gas/vapor in thetank at the given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the density calculated in the selectedengineering units.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you cancalculate density of liquid in the upper leg.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Upper Leg Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of liquid in the upper leg if the liquid is AlChE 250+
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of 250 fluids next to the liquid selection.

Figure 736. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids

Field
Upper Leg Liquid
LiquidUpper Leg Liquid
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Upper Leg Liquid
Save

Entry
Select the liquid as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid
from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid selection.
Specify the normal operating pressure in the upper leg liquid.
Specify the normal operating temperature in the upper leg
liquid.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the upper leg
liquid.
Click Calculate to calculate the density of the liquid in theupper leg at the given pressure and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density in the selectedengineering units.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

537

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of the tank liquid if the liquid is Standard Fluids.
Selection of this option displays a drop-down list fluids next to the liquid selection. Select theliquid as Standard Fluids and then select a fluid from drop-down list displayed next to the liquid
selection. For the description of other parameters in this screen, refer to “Tank Liquid - AlChE
250+ Fluids” on page 535.

Figure 737. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Liquid - Standard Fluids

53815. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Tank Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of gas/vapor in the tank if the vapor is Standard Fluids.
Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of fluids next to the vapor selection. Select thevapor as AlChE 250+ Fluids and then select a fluid from drop-down list displayed next to thevapor selection. For the description of other parameters in this screen, refer to “Tank Gas/Vapor AlChE 250+ Fluids” on page 536.

Figure 738. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Tank Gas/Vapor - Standard Fluids539

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Upper Leg Liquid - Standard Fluids
This screen allows you to calculate density of the liquid in the upper leg if the liquid is Standard
Fluids. Selection of this option displays a drop-down list of fluids next to the liquid selection.
Select the liquid as Standard Fluids and then select a fluid from drop-down list displayed next tothe liquid selection. For the description of other parameters in this screen, refer to “Upper Leg
Liquid - AlChE 250+ Fluids” on page 537.

Figure 739. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Liquid - Standard Fluids

54015. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases
This screen allows you to calculate the density of gas/vapor if the vapor is Natural Gases. Select atank liquid and then select the vapor as Natural Gases. A drop-down list of the following methods
is displayed next to the vapor selection:
1. NX-19
2. AGA-8 Gr, N2 and CO2
3. AGA-8 Heating Value, Gr and CO2 Inputs
4. AGA-8 Detailed Method, Input Mole Fractions
5. S-GERG Heating Value, Gr and CO2 Inputs
Select a method and calculate the density of gas/vapor for the given values. For detailed
description of the parameters in the following screens, refer to “Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural
Gases” on page 522.

Figure 740. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (NX-19 Selection)541

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 741. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Gr Selection)

Figure 742. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Heating Value Selection)542

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 743. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (AGA-8 Detailed Method Selection)

Figure 744. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gas Properties543

MI 020-520 – January 2014

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Figure 745. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Natural Gases Screen (S-GERG Heating Value Selection)

Figure 746. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixtures Screen54415. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 747. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Closed Tank Wet Leg Upper Leg Gas/Vapor - Mixture Properties Screen

Boiler Drum
The Boiler Drum configuration allows you to calculate density of water in the drum and in theupper leg.

Figure 748. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Boiler Drum Screen 1545

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Level Tank Configuration
Tank Type
Tank Dimensions
H1
H2
H3
Operating Conditions
M2 - Minimum
M2 - Maximum
T1 - Minimum
T1 - Maximum
T1 - Source

T2 - Minimum
T2 - Maximum
T2 - Source

T4 - Minimum
T4 - Maximum
T4 - Source

Next

546

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Select the tank type as Boiler Drum from the drop-down list.
Specify the height from lower leg tap to zero level point.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to the lower leg tap.
Specify the height from transmitter connection to upper leg tap.
Specify the minimum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the maximum operating value to measure tank pressure.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 1.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 1.
Select the source for temperature 1 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 2.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 2.
Select the source for temperature 2 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Specify the minimum operating value for temperature 4.
Specify the maximum operating value for temperature 4.
Select the source for temperature 4 from the drop-down list. Choose
from RTD, Sensor Temp, Electronic Temp, and User Value.
If you select ‘User Value’ as temperature source, specify a value in theadjacent text box that is displayed.
Click Next to advance to subsequent screen where you can calculatedensity of water in the drum and in the upper leg.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 749. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Application Design Conditions - Boiler Drum Screen 2547

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Water in Drum
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
Water in Upper Leg
Normal Pressure
Normal Temperature
Temperature (Saturation)
CalculateDensity
Water in Drum
Steam
Water in Upper Leg
Save

548

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
Specify the normal operating pressure for the water in the
drum.
This field displays the normal operating temperature for thewater in the drum.
This field shows the saturation temperature for the water in the
drum.
This field shows the normal operating pressure for the water inupper leg.
Specify the normal operating temperature for the water inupper leg.
This field shows the saturation temperature of the water inupper leg.
Click Calculate to calculate the density at the given pressure
and temperature values.
This field shows the calculated density of the water in drum.
This field shows the calculated density of the steam in upper
leg.
This field shows the calculated density of the water in upper
leg.
Click Save to save the configuration to the transmitter.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Test Device Equations
The Test Device Equations screen enables you to test the tank configuration for raw sensor inputs
and displays the calculated level data (density, pressure and level values) outputted from thetransmitter. To use this function, enter test values Raw Inputs fields and click Apply. The level
data calculated for the given inputs is displayed below.

Figure 750. Sample IMV31 Transmitter Test Device Equations Screen

Field
Density and Level Data
Level Data
Height 1
Height 2
Height 3
Density
Fluid Material 1
Fluid Material 3
Fluid Material 4
LimitsPressure

Entry

This field shows Height 1.
This field shows Height 2.
This field shows Height 3.
This field shows the density calculated for the fluid 1.
This field shows the density calculated for the fluid 3.
This field shows the density calculated for the fluid 4.
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for pressure
measurement.
549

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Density 1,3 Temp
Density 2 Temp
Density 4 Temp
Density
Level
Test Level Coefficients
Raw Inputs
Differential Pressure
Absolute Pressure
RTD
Sensor Temperature
Electronics Temperature
Level Data
PressureDensityDensity 2
Density 3
Density 4
Level
Apply
Reread550

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for temperature
1 and 3.
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for temperature
2.
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for temperature
4.
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for density
measurement.
This field shows the upper and lower range limits set for levelmeasurement.

Specify a value for the transmitter to calculate differential pressure.
Specify a value for the transmitter to calculate absolute pressure.
Specify a value for the transmitter to calculate RTD.
Specify a value for the transmitter to calculate sensor temperature.
Specify a value for the transmitter to calculate electronic temperature.
This field shows the pressure calculated by the transmitter for the
given input.
This field shows the density calculated by the transmitter for the given
input.
This field shows the density 2 calculated by the transmitter for the
given input.
This field shows the density 3 calculated by the transmitter for the
given input.
This field shows the density 4 calculated by the transmitter for the
given input.
This field shows the level calculated by the transmitter for the given
input.
After you enter the raw inputs, click Apply for the transmitter tocalculate density and level for the given inputs.
Click Reread to read stabilized values from the transmitter.

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
Analog Output
The Analog Output screen allows you to override analog value, and measurement.

Figure 751. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Loop Test Analog Output Screen (IMV31 shown)
Field

Entry

Override Analog Output
PV Analog Output
This field shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Override Analog Value
Specify a value that overrides the analog value.
Override Measurement Select this check box to override the analog value. Deselect it if
override is not required.

Digital Output
The Digital Output screen allows you to select a variable with which you want to override thedigital output, and set the override value.

Figure 752. Sample IMV25/IMV31 Transmitter Loop Test Digital Output Screen (IMV31 shown)551

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

15. IMV25 and IMV31 Series Transmitters

Entry

Override Digital Output
Digital Output
Select a measured variable with which you want to override the digital
Override
output value from the drop-down list. Choose from PV, SV, TV, and
QV.
Override Value
Specify a value to override the digital output.
Override Measurement Select this check box to override the digital output. Deselect it if
override is not required.

552

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter
The IMV30 Electronic Multivariable Transmitter measures absolute and differential pressure,sensor and electronics temperature, and process temperature (from an RTD). It also calculates
process density and flow rate and provides transmission of all the measured and calculated values.
IMV30 transmitter allows direct analog connection to common receivers while still providing
intelligent transmitter digital communications using a HART Communicator. Additional
information is available in the following document:

MI 020-382 I/A Series® Intelligent Electronic Multivariable Transmitters IMV25T and IMV30-T with HART or 4 to 20 mA Output Signals

The DTM does not do complete configuration of an IMV30 transmitter. For that you need
PCMV. This DTM will allow a user to change HART configuration and parameters related torange values, units and 4-20 mA span.

553

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Create Pre-Configuration File
The Pre-Configuration screen enables you to create a new configuration file from one of several
default databases, or from the configuration of a connected device. You can then download the
new configuration to a connected device or save it to a file.
Follow the steps given below to create a new configuration file:
1. Double click the IMV series Device DTM. Create Pre-Configuration File window
appears.
2. Select the Device Type from the drop-down list and select the device model.
3. Click OK. The device DTM appears.
4. Configure the selected device parameters.
5. To save the configuration use Save As in the File menu and save the configuration with
.PW4 file extension.
The following figure shows the Pre-Configuration screen for the IMV30.

Figure 753. Sensor Range Selection Screen55416. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information, device information and the current
PV data. Each time the PV is mapped to a measurement the PV data and the graphicalrepresentation of the PV data are updated accordingly.

Figure 754. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Overview Screen
Field
HART
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Polling Address
Device Information
Date of Last Calibration

Entry
Shows the HART tag which is the unique identifier of the device.
Shows the HART descriptor used to define a description for thedevice. It can have a maximum of 16 characters.
Shows the HART message that is sent from the device when requested.
The message can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Shows the configured address of the device.
Shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
NOTE

The date of last calibration can be remotely displayed
and reconfigured, using the PC-Based Configurator.
Device Software Version
Device ID

Shows the software version of the device.
Shows the serial number of the device.

555

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen allows you to map measurements to primary, secondary, tertiary, and thequaternary variables. It displays the upper and lower range limits and the upper and lower range
values of the measurement mapped to the PV.
You need to set the upper range value (URV) and lower range value (LRV) within theconfigurable limits.

Figure 755. Sample IMV30 Transmitter General Screen
Field
GeneralPV MapSV Map

TV Map

556

Entry
Map primary variable to one of the measurements displayed in thedrop-down list. Choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD Temperature,
Flow, and Density.
Map secondary variable to one of the measurements displayed in thedrop-down list. Choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD Temperature,
Flow, and Density.
Map tertiary variable to one of the measurements displayed in thedrop-down list. Choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD Temperature,
Flow, and Density.

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
QV Map

PV URLPV LRL
PV URVPV LRVmA Output Fail Safe

Entry
Map quaternary variable to one of the measurements displayed in thedrop-down list. Choose from Differential Pressure, Absolute Pressure,
Sensor Temperature, Electronic Temperature, RTD Temperature,
Flow, and Density.
Shows the upper range limit of the measurement mapped to theprimary variable.
Shows the lower range limit of the measurement mapped to theprimary variable.
Specify the upper range value for the primary variable.
Specify the lower range value for the primary variable.
This is the mA output delivered for transmitter faults and criticalsensor faults. Choose Up Scale or Down Scale from the drop-down
list.

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to set engineering units for each process parameter inthe device. You also have the option to define custom units.

Figure 756. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen557

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Measurement Units
Differential Pressure
Units

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Entry

Select the units for differential pressure. Choose from psi, inHg,
ftH2O, inH2O, atm, bar, mbar, MPa, kPa, Pa, Kgcm2, gcm2, cmHg,
mmHg, torr, mH2O, cmH2O, mmH2O, and hW60.
Absolute Pressure Units
Select the units for absolute pressure. Choose from psi, inHg, ftH2O,
inH2O, atm, bar, mbar, MPa, kPa, Pa, Kgcm2, gcm2, cmHg, mmHg,
torr, mH2O, cmH2O, mmH2O, and hW60.
Sensor Temperature Units Select the units for sensor temperature. Choose from degC, K, degF,
and degR.
Electronic Temperature
Select the units for electronic temperature. Choose from degC, K,
Units
degF, and degR.
RTD Temperature Units
Select the units for RTD temperature. Choose from degC, K, degF,
and degR.
Flow Units
Select the units for flow measurement.
• If the flow is mapped to Mass Flow, choose units from the following list: kg/s, kg/m, kg/h, kg/d, lb/s, lb/m, lb/h, lb/d, g/s,
g/m, g/h, g/d, t/h, t/d, STon/h, STon/d, LTon/h, and LTon/d.
• If the flow is mapped to Volume, choose units from the following
list: M3/s, M3/m, M3/h, M3/d, Ft3/s, Ft3/m, Ft3/h, Ft3/d,
Gal/s, Gal/m, Gal/h, Gal/d, Bbl3/s, Bbl3/m, Bbl3/h, Bbl3/d,
Bbl4/s, Bbl4/m, Bbl4/h, Bbl4/d, l/s, l/m, l/h, l/d, MI/h, MI/d,
Mgal/h, Mgal/d, Mcfd, and Mmcfd.
• If the flow is mapped to Standard Volume, choose units from thefollowing list: Sm3/s, Sm3/m, Sm3/h, Sm3/d, Nm3/s, Nm3/m,
Nm3/h, Nm3/d, Sft3/s, Sft3/m, Sft3/h, Sft3/d, Sgal/s, Sgal/m,
Sgal/h, Sgal/d, Sbl3/s, Sbl3/m, Sbl3/h, Sbl3/d, Sbl4/s, Sbl4/m,
Sbl4/h, Sbl4/d, Nl/s, Nl/m, Nl/h, Nl/d, mScfd, and mmScfd
Density Units
Select the units for density measurement. Choose from lb/ft3, lb/gal,oz/in3, kg/m3, g/cm3, lb/yd3, LT/yd3, ST/yd3, and kg/l.
DP Custom Engineering Units
Label - Custom Values
Specify a label for the custom units. The label specified will be added
to the Differential Pressure drop-down list.
Label - Reference Values
Select a reference unit that is convenient for conversion to the custom
unit.
URV - Custom Values
Specify a value in custom units equal to the URV in the reference units
selected.
URV - Reference Values
Displays the upper range reference value.
LRV - Custom Values
Specify a value in custom units equal to the LRV in the reference units
selected.
LRV - Reference Values
Displays the lower range reference value.

558

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Flow Custom Engineering Units
Label - Custom Values
Specify a name for the custom units.
Label - Reference Values
Select a reference unit that is convenient for conversion to the custom
unit.
Ref - Custom Values
Specify the value in custom units equal to the reference value inreference units.
Ref - Reference Values
The value of the URV appears as the default value. You can change thisto a number that is convenient for conversion.
URV - Custom Values
Specify the URV custom value.
URV - Reference Values
Specify the URV reference value.
LRV - Custom Values
Specify the LRV custom value.
LRV - Reference Values
Specify the LRV reference value.
Density Custom Engineering Units
Label - Custom Values
Specify a name for the custom units.
Label - Reference Values
Select a reference unit that is convenient for conversion to the custom
unit.
Ref - Custom Values
Specify the value in custom units equal to the reference value inreference units.
Ref - Reference Values
The value of the URV appears as a default value. You can change thisto a number that is convenient for conversion.
URV - Custom Values
Specify the URV custom value.
URV - Reference Values
Specify the URV reference value.
LRV - Custom Values
Specify the LRV custom value.
LRV - Reference Values
Specify the LRV reference value.

Differential Pressure
The Differential Pressure screen displays the upper and lower range values, and the upper andlower range limits set for the differential pressure.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
the URL and LRL.

559

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Figure 757. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Screen
Field
Differential Pressure (DP)Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Damping
Transfer Function

Entry
Shows the upper range limit.
Shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.
Select the damping time. Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and
32 seconds.
Select the transfer function from the following options:• Linear• Square Root Linear < 20% Flow
• Square Root Cutoff < 10% Flow

Absolute Pressure
The Absolute Pressure screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for thedifferential pressure.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
the URL and LRL.

560

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 758. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Screen
Field
Pressure (AP)Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Damping
Pressure Type

Entry
Shows the upper range limit.
Shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.
Select the absolute pressure damping time. Choose from 0, 0.25, 0.5,
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32 seconds.
Select the pressure type. Choose from Absolute or Gauge.

Sensor Temperature
The Sensor Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for the sensor
temperature.
The upper and lower range values are configurable and can be set within the limits specified for
the URL and LRL.

561

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Figure 759. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Sensor Temperature Screen
Field
Sensor Temperature
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

Entry
Shows the upper range limit.
Shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.

Electronic Temperature
The Electronic Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits and values for theelectronics temperature.
The upper and lower range values can be set within the limits specified for the URL and the LRL.

Figure 760. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Electronic Temperature Screen562

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Electronic Temperature
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

Shows the upper range limit.
Shows the lower range limit.
Specify the upper range value.
Specify the lower range value.

RTD Temperature
The RTD Temperature screen displays the upper and lower range limits for the RTD
temperature, and allows you to set the upper and lower values to measure RTD temperature.

Figure 761. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Screen
Field
RTD Temperature
Measurement
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value

Entry
Select On to turn on or Off to turn off the RTD measurement.
Shows the upper range limit for the RTD temperature.
Shows the lower range limit for the RTD temperature.
Specify the upper range value for RTD temperature.
563

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Entry

Lower Range Value
Specify the lower range value for RTD temperature.
RTD Strategy Flow and Density
RTD Strategy Flow and
Select an option for RTD strategy.
Density• Never Use Default (Fail When Bad) - select if you choose not to
use the default value• Use Default on Failure - select if you choose to use default value
on RTD failure• Use Saturation Steam - this is enable if you choose to calculate
saturated steam without using RTD temperature• Always Use Default - select if you choose to use a default value
Strategy Default
This parameter is enabled in the event of an RTD sensor failure.
Specify the RTD strategy default value.

Density
The Density screen displays the upper and lower range limits for density measurement, and allows
you to set upper and lower range values to measure density.

Figure 762. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Density Screen
Field
Measurement
Measurement
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value

564

Entry
Select On to turn on or Off to turn off the density measurement.
Shows the upper range limit for the density measurement.
Shows the lower range limit for the density measurement.
Specify the upper range value for density measurement.
Specify the lower range value for density measurement.

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014Flow
The Flow screen displays the upper and lower range limits to measure the flow, and allows you to
set upper and lower range values for flow measurement.

Figure 763. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Flow Screen
Field
Measurement
Measurement
Flow
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Flow Type

Entry
Select On to turn on or Off to turn off the flow measurement.

Shows the upper range limit to measure flow.
Shows the lower range limit to measure flow.
Specify the upper range value to measure flow.
Specify the lower range value to measure flow.
Select the flow type. Choose from MassFlow, Volume, and Standard
Volume.
DP Input Noise Reduction for Flow
Noise Reduction
Select On to turn on or Off to turn off the noise reduction feature.
Flow Cutoff (0=None)
Specify the flow cutoff value.

565

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Display Flow Data
The Display Flow Data screen is used to display all the details of the flow rate application,
including fluid, primary device type, flow measurement standard, pipe and primary devicematerials, pipe and primary device bore sizes, and so forth. It also displays the calculated densityand flow rate at normal operating conditions.
NOTE

The configuration of this flow data must be accomplished using PCMV.

Figure 764. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Display Flow Data Screen
Field
Density and Flow Data
Flow Data
Pipe Diameter
Bore DiameterPrimary Element
Density
Fluid Material

566

Entry

Shows the diameter of the pipe.
Shows the diameter of the bore.
Shows the primary element of the orifice plate.
Shows the fluid and the fluid state.

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Base Conditions
Absolute Pressure
RTD TemperatureDensity
LimitsDifferential Pressure
Absolute Pressure
RTD TemperatureDensity
Flow

Shows the absolute pressure.
Shows the RTD temperature.
Shows the density.
Shows the differential pressure limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the absolute pressure limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the RTD temperature limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the limits for density measurement in the selected engineering
units.
Shows the limits for flow measurement in the selected engineering
units.

OutputHARTThe HART screen allows you to set HART polling address, and the number of response
preambles. It also displays the number of request preambles in the HART message.

Figure 765. Sample IMV30 Transmitter HART Output Screen567

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Field
HART
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles
Number of Response
Preambles

Entry
Select the HART polling address from a range of 0 to 15.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in a request message fromthe transmitter to the host.
Specify the number of response preambles.

Local Display Access
The Local Display Access screen is where you can set password that allows you to change theconfiguration and calibration at the local display.

Figure 766. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Local Display Access Screen
Field
Local Display Access
Password Options

Entry
Select a password option. Choose from No Passwords, Configuration
Password Enabled, and Configuration and Calibration Password
enabled.

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays the complete information of the device. The final
assembly number, tag, descriptor, message, and date of last calibration of the device can be set as
per the user preference.

56816. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 767. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Device TypeModel
Device ID
Write Protect Mode

Sensor Serial Number
Final Assembly
NumberTag
Descriptor
Message
Date of Last
Calibration
Revisions
Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Hardware Revision
Software Revision
Software Sub Revision

Entry
Shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Shows the device type.
Shows the model number and sensor code of the device.
Shows the device ID.
Shows whether variables can be written to the field device or whether
commands that cause actions to be performed in the field device can or
cannot occur.
Shows the serial number of the device.
Specify the final assembly number of the device.
Specify a unique name for the device tag. You can use up to 8 characters.
Specify a description for the device. You can use up to 16 characters.
Specify the HART message. You can use up to 32 characters.
Specify the date of last calibration.

Shows the universal command set revision level.
Shows the field device revision level.
Shows the hardware revision level.
Shows the software revision level.
Shows the software sub revision level.

569

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Device Status
Device Status
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 768. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Device Status Screen

570

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status.

Figure 769. Sample IMV30 Transmitter HART Status Screen571

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Calibration
DAC Trim
DAC Trim calibration allows you to set the loop current to either 4 mA (zero) or 20 mA (span).
By providing the inputs to the following screens, the values indicated by a suitable reference like adigital multimeter, the transmitter can trim its output. DAC Trim performs 4 mA and 20 mA
calibration points respectively.

Figure 770. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 1
NOTE

DAC Trim calibration is allowed only when the mA is active in HART status andthe polling address is set to zero.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 771. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 2572

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 772. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 3

Figure 773. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 4

Field
DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the value for the reference meter.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 774. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 5573

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Click Yes to continue the calibration process. The following screen appears. If you click No, entera value from the reference meter. Refer to Figure 776.

Figure 775. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 6

Figure 776. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 7

Field
DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify a value from the reference meter.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 777. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 8574

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Click Yes to complete the DAC trim calibration.
If you click No, enter a value for reference meter.
The following screen appears if the DAC Trim calibration is completed successfully.

Figure 778. Sample IMV30 Transmitter DAC Trim Screen 9

Scaled DAC Trim
This procedure is the same as the DAC Trim procedure described in the previous section exceptthat the 4 and 20 mA points are scaled to whatever units are required by the readout or control
devices. For example, if the readout device is a voltmeter, across a 250  resistor, the 4 and 20 mA
points would correspond to 1 and 5 volts, respectively.

Figure 779. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 1
NOTE

Scaled DAC Trim calibration is allowed only when the mA is active in HART status
and the polling address is set to zero.

575

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Click Next. The following screen appears.

Figure 780. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 2
Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Low ValueHigh Value

Entry
Specify the scaled value that will be mapped to 4 mA.
Specify the scaled value that will be mapped to 20 mA.

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 781. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 3

Figure 782. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 4576

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 783. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 5
Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the reference meter value for scaled DAC trim at the
4 mA point.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 784. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 6
Click Yes, and then click Next to continue the calibration process. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 785. If you click No, the screen appears as shown in Figure 786.

Figure 785. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 7577

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Figure 786. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 8
Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Reference Meter Value

Entry
Specify the reference meter value for DAC trim at the 20 mA
point.

Click Next, and the following screen appears.

Figure 787. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 9
Click Yes to complete the Scaled DAC trim calibration. If you click No, enter the reference metervalue and continue the calibration process.
The following screen appears if the DAC Trim calibration is completed successfully.

578

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 788. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Screen 10

Differential Pressure
The Differential Pressure screen allows you to calibrate differential pressure at zero value, LRV,
URV, 1 user point, and 2 user points.

Figure 789. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 1
Field

Entry

Differential Pressure Calibration
Calibrate
Select an option from the drop-down list to calibrate differential
pressure. Choose from DP at Zero, DP at LRV, DP at URV, DP at 1
User Point, and DP at 2 User Points.
NOTE

If you select:
DP at 1 User Point - Calibration is performed at 1 user entered point.
DP at 2 User Points - Calibration is performed at 2 user entered points.
Click Next to start the calibration process.

579

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Figure 790. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 791. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 3

Figure 792. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 4

Figure 793. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 5
When the calibration is completed successfully, the following screen appears. Click OK.

580

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 794. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Differential Pressure Calibration Screen 6

Absolute Pressure
Absolute Pressure is the pressure at the sensor connection. This screen allows you to calibrate
absolute pressure at pressure, the lower range value, the upper range value, 1 user point, and 2
user points.

Figure 795. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 1
Field

Entry

Absolute Pressure Calibration
Calibrate
Select an option from the drop-down list to calibrate absolutepressure. Choose from AP at Pressure, AP at LRV, AP at URV, AP at 1
User Point, and AP at 2 User Points.
• AP at Pressure - allows calibration at specified pressure• AP at LRV - allows calibration at specified lower range value• AP at URV - allows calibration at specified upper range value• AP at 1 User Point - allows bench pressure calibration at 1 user
determined point• AP at 2 User Points - allows bench pressure calibration at 2 user
determined points
Click Next to start the calibration process.

581

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Figure 796. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 797. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 3

Figure 798. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 4

Figure 799. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 5582

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Absolute Pressure Calibration
Specify a value for absolute pressure calibration.
Enter User Point 1
Valueaa. This parameter varies based on the option selected for AP calibration. If you select ‘AP at 2 User Points’, youneed to enter two values for calibration.

Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 800. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 6

Figure 801. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 7
When the calibration is completed successfully, the following screen appears. Click OK.

Figure 802. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Absolute Pressure Calibration Screen 8583

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

RTD Temperature
The RTD Temperature Calibration screen allows you to calibrate the RTD temperature at userdefined points.

Figure 803. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 1
Click Next to start the calibration process.

Figure 804. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 2
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 805. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 3

Figure 806. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 4584

16. IMV30 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 807. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 5
Field

Entry

RTD Temperature Calibration
Enter Temperature Value
Specify a value for RTD temperature calibration.
Click Next in the following screens to continue the calibration process.

Figure 808. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 6

Figure 809. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 7

Figure 810. Sample IMV30 Transmitter RTD Temperature Calibration Screen 8
Click OK to complete the calibration.

585

MI 020-520 – January 2014

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Test Device Equations
The Test Device Equations screen enables you to test the tank configuration for raw sensor inputs
and displays the calculated level data (density, pressure and level values) outputted from thetransmitter. To use this function, enter test values Raw Inputs fields and click Apply. The level
data calculated for the given inputs is displayed below.

Figure 811. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Test Device Equations Screen

Field
Density and Flow Data
Flow Data
Pipe Diameter
Bore DiameterPrimary Element
Density
Fluid Material
Base Conditions
Absolute Pressure
RTD TemperatureDensity586

Entry

Shows the diameter of the pipe.
Shows the diameter of the bore.
Shows the primary element of the orifice plate.
Shows the fluid and the fluid state.
Shows the absolute pressure.
Shows the RTD temperature.
Shows the density.

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Field
Normal Operating Point
Differential Pressure
Absolute Pressure
RTD TemperatureDensityFlow
Raw Inputs
Differential Pressure
Noise Reduction
Absolute Pressure
RTD
Flow Data
Density
Flow
Apply
RereadMI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Shows the differential pressure limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the absolute pressure limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the RTD temperature limits in the selected engineering units.
Shows the limits for density measurement in the selected engineering
units.
Shows the limits for flow measurement in the selected engineering
units.
Shows the differential pressure.
Select On to turn on or Off to turn off the noise reduction feature.
Shows the absolute pressure.
Shows the RTD temperature.
Shows the calculated flowing density in the selected engineering units.
Shows the calculated flow rate in the selected engineering units.
After you enter the raw inputs, click Apply for the transmitter tocalculate density and level for the given inputs.
Click Reread to read stabilized values from the transmitter.

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
Analog Output
The Analog Output screen allows you to override analog value, and measurement.

Figure 812. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Loop Test Analog Output Screen587

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

16. IMV30 Transmitter

Entry

Override Analog Output
PV Analog Output
This field shows the current PV Analog Output in mA.
Override Analog Value
Specify a value that overrides the analog value.
Override Measurement Select this check box to override the analog value. Deselect it if
override is not required.

Digital Output
The Digital Output screen allows you to select a variable with which you want to override thedigital output, and set the override value.

Figure 813. Sample IMV30 Transmitter Loop Test Digital Output Screen

Field

Entry

Override Digital Output
Digital Output
Select a measured variable with which you want to override the digital
Override
output value from the drop-down list. Choose from PV, SV, TV, and
QV.
Override Value
Specify a value to override the digital output.
Override Measurement Select this check box to override the digital output. Deselect it if
override is not required.

588

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter
The RTT15 Temperature Transmitter is a microprocessor-based temperature transmitter thatreceives input signals from thermocouples, RTDs, resistance (ohms), or millivolt sources. This
chapter provides information that is exclusive to using RTT15 Transmitter with HART
communication protocol.
Additional information about this transmitter is available in the following document:

MI 020-463
ProtocolRTT15-T I/A Series® Temperature Transmitter with HART®

NOTE

Use of a USB HART modem is not recommended with this DTM. Read and write
commands may time out resulting in nuisance error messages.

589

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information, the device information, and thecurrent data of the primary variable (PV).

Figure 814. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Overview Screen
Field
HART
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Polling Address

Device Information
Date of Last Calibration
Device Software Version
Device ID

590

Entry
Shows the HART tag which is the primary identifier of the device(maximum of 8 characters).
Shows the HART descriptor used to define a description for thedevice (maximum of 16 characters).
Shows the HART message (maximum of 32 characters).
Shows the configured address of the device.
In the standard point to point, 2-wire analog mode, the polling
address can be ‘0’. For multidrop operation it can vary from 1
through 15.
Shows the last calibrated date of the transmitter.
Shows the software version of the device.
Shows the serial number of the device.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Field
PV
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URVMI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Shows the current PV analog output in mA.
Shows the current lower range value of the primary variable.
Shows the current upper range value of the primary variable.

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables.

Figure 815. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Process Variables Screen

Field

Entry

Process Variables
Primary Variable
Shows the current value of the primary variable.
Electronics Temperature
Shows the current electronics temperature.
PV Analog Output
Shows the current PV analog output.
PV as % of Range
Shows the current PV value in percent of range.
The Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 parameters are available if the Connection Type is 2-wire diff or 2wire average, and the Sensor Measurement Type is Differential or Average.
Sensor 1
Shows the value of Sensor 1.
Sensor 2
Shows the value of Sensor 2.

591

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen allows you to enter the upper and the lower range values of the primaryvariable and the damping time.
It also displays the sensor details. The upper and lower limits of the sensor are displayed from thedevice.

Figure 816. Sample RTT15 Transmitter General Screen

Field
GeneralPV LRVPV URVPV Damping
Lower Sensor Limit
Upper Sensor Limit
Minimum Span Limit
Sensor Limits Unit

592

Entry
Enter the lower range value of the primary variable.
Enter the upper range value of the primary variable.
Enter the damping time.
Shows the sensor lower limit read from the device.
Shows the sensor upper limit read from the device.
Shows the minimum span between the upper and lower limits of thesensor.
Shows the units configured for the sensor limits.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to configure units for the primary variable.

Figure 817. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen

Field
Measurement UnitsPV Units
CJC/Electronics
Temperature Units

Entry
Select measurement units for the primary variable. Choose from degC,
degF, degR, Kelvin, mV, V, Ohm, KO, or %.
Shows the measurement units for cold junction compensation (CJC)
or electronics temperature.

SensorThe Sensor screen allows you to configure sensor parameters.

Figure 818. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Screen 1593

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Figure 819. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Screen 2
Field
SensorSensor Type

594

Entry
Select a sensor from the list available as follows:• Ohms• Pt100 IEC 751• Ni100 DIN 43760• Spcl RTD• Millivolts• T/C Type B IEC 584• T/C Type E IEC 584• T/C Type J IEC 584• T/C Type K IEC 584• T/C Type L DIN 43710• T/C Type N IEC 584• T/C Type R IEC 584• T/C Type S IEC 584• T/C Type T IEC 584• T/C Type U IEC 584• T/C Type W3 ASTM
• T/C Type W5 ASTM
• Spcl T/C17. RTT15 Transmitter

Field
Connection TypeRTD Factor

Sensor Measurement Type

Cold Junction
CompensationCJC Value

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the connection type if you are using RTD. Choose from 2wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 2-wire diff, and 2-wire average.
This parameter is available if the sensor selected is one of thefollowing:• Ohms• Pt100 IEC 751• Ni100 DIN 43760• Spcl RTD
If RTDs other than 100 ohm resistance are used with yourtransmitter, enter the RTD factor.
The RTD Factor parameter is available if the sensor selected is oneof the following:• Pt100 IEC 751• Ni100 DIN 43760• Spcl RTD
Select the Sensor Measurement Type if RTD is not used. Choose
from Single, Differential, or Average.
This parameter is available for the following sensors:• Millivolts• T/C Type B IEC 584• T/C Type E IEC 584• T/C Type J IEC 584• T/C Type K IEC 584• T/C Type L DIN 43710• T/C Type N IEC 584• T/C Type R IEC 584• T/C Type S IEC 584• T/C Type T IEC 584• T/C Type U IEC 584• T/C Type W3 ASTM
• T/C Type W5 ASTM
• Spcl T/CSpecify the cold junction compensation (CJC) if the sensor chosen
is a T/C type sensor. Choose from the following available options:• Internal Sensor• External Pt100• External Ni100• Constant (None)
Enter a constant value for CJC.
This parameter is available if CJC is chosen as Constant (None).

595

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Field

Entry

Absolute Maximum ValueEnter the absolute maximum value on individual sensors fordifferential measurements.
This parameter is available if:• the Sensor Type is Ohms, Pt100 IEC 751, Ni100 DIN
43760, or Spcl RTD; and the Connection Type is Differential.
• the Sensor Type is Millivolts and the Sensor Measurement
Type is Differential.
• the Sensor is one of the T/C types; the Sensor Measurement
Type is Differential; and the Cold Junction Compensation isInternal Sensor or Constant (None).
Shows the type of measurement.

Measurement Type

Cable ResistanceEnter ValueThe Enter Value screen allows you to configure a value for cable resistance when using thetransmitter with a 2-wire RTD.

Figure 820. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Enter Value Screen 1

Field
Enter Value
Cable ResistanceEnter cable resistance forsensor596

Entry
Select the sensor for which you want to enter the cable resistance.
Choose from Sensor 1 and Sensor 2.
This parameter is available when the Measurement Type is
RTD/Ohm diff 2-wire or RTD/Ohm avg 2-wire.
Enter cable resistance value for the selected sensor.
This parameter is available if the Sensor Type is Ohms, Pt100 IEC
751, Ni100 DIN 43760, Spcl RTD, or Millivolts; and theConnection Type is 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

Entry

Enter cable resistance forexternal CJC sensor

Enter cable resistance value for external CJC sensor.
This parameter is available for T/C type sensors and when the CJC is
External Pt100 or External Ni100.

Enter the cable resistance value for the selected sensor and click Next. The following screen
appears which shows the completion of the process.

Figure 821. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Enter Value Screen 2

Measure Value
The Measure Value screen allows you to configure the transmitter to measure and enter the cable
resistance if it is not known in case of 2-wire RTD.

Figure 822. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 1
Select the sensor to enter or measure the cable resistance and click Next in the subsequent screens.

597

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Figure 823. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 2

Figure 824. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 3

Figure 825. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 4
When the cable resistance for the selected sensor is displayed, choose one of the options from thedrop-downOK - to proceed with the cable resistance value that is displayed

Original value - for original cable resistance value

Read new value - for a new cable resistance value

Click Next to complete the process.

598

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 826. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 5
The following screen appears if the configuration of the device is corrupted.

Figure 827. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Measure Value Screen 6

Sensor Error Values
The Sensor Error Values screen shows the output that is set to a predetermined mA value if a
broken or shorted sensor is detected.

Figure 828. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Sensor Error Values Screen599

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Field

Entry

Broken Sensor
Broken Sensor Value
Reset to 3.5 mA
Reset to 23 mA
Shorted Sensor
Shorted Sensor Value
Reset to 3.5 mA
Reset to 23 mA

Shows the value that output goes to in case of a broken sensor (which
can be configured between 3.5 and 23 mA).
Click to set the output to go to 3.5 mA in case of broken sensor.
Click to set the output to go to 23 mA in case of broken sensor.
Shows the value that output goes to in case of a shorted sensor (between
3.5 and 23 mA).
Click to set the output to go to 3.5 mA in case of shorted sensor.
Click to set the output to go to 23 mA in case of shorted sensor.

Min Max Values
The Min Max Values screen shows the minimum and maximum logged values based on themeasurement units configured.

Figure 829. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Min Max Values Screen

Field
Min Max Values
Minimum Logged Value
Maximum Logged Value
Reset Min Max Values

600

Entry
Shows the minimum logged value of the current measurement.
Shows the minimum logged value of the current measurement.
Resets the maximum/minimum log to actual measured values.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

OutputAnalog
The Analog Output screen allows you to configure the parameters for analog output.

Figure 830. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Analog Output Screen

Field
Analog Output1 (PV)Lower Range Value
Upper Range Value
Analog Output 0%
Analog Output 100%
Current Output Lower
Limit
Current Output Upper
Limit
Reset Analog Output
Limits

Entry
Enter the lower range value for the primary variable.
Enter the upper range value for the primary variable.
Enter the mA output at 0% of range.
Enter the mA output at 100% of range.
Enter the lower limit of the analog output.
Enter the upper limit of the analog output.
Click to reset analog output limits to the default settings.

601

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

HART
The HART screen allows you to set HART polling address, and the number of response
preambles. It also displays the number of request preambles in the HART message.

Figure 831. Sample RTT15 Transmitter HART Screen
NOTE

The DAC Trim and the Override DAC Trim calibrations are not available if thepolling address is configured to a non-zero value.

Field
HART
Polling Address
Number of Request
Preambles
Number of Response
Preambles

602

Entry
Select the HART polling address from a range of 0 to 15.
Shows the number of preambles to be sent in a request message fromthe transmitter to the host.
Specify the number of response preambles between 5 to 20.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Configuration
The Diagnostic Configuration screen allows you to configure the transmitter to check for sensor
errors.

Figure 832. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Diagnostic Configuration Screen

Field
Diagnostic Settings
Error Detection

Entry
Select a procedure to check for a sensor error. Choose from thefollowing options:• No test performed - not to perform sensor error detection test
• broken sensor - to test for broken sensor• shorted sensor - to test for shorted sensor• broken and shorted - to test for broken and shorted sensor

AccessThe Access screen is where you can activate or deactivate write protection, and enter or change thewrite protection password.

Figure 833. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Access Screen 1603

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Entry

AccessWrite Protect

Configure the write protect status. Choose from Enable write
protected, Disable write protected, and Set new password.
The below two parameters are available if Write Protect = Set new password
Current Password
Enter the current write protection password (up to 8 characters).
New Password
Enter the new write protection password (up to 8 characters).

Figure 834. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Access Screen 2

Field
AccessEnter Password

604

Entry
Enter write protect password (up to 8 characters).
This parameter is available if Write Protect = Enable write protected.

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Information
The Device Information screen displays complete information of the device. It allows you to set
the tag name, descriptor, HART message, final assembly number, and date of last calibration.

Figure 835. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Information Screen

Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Distributor
Device Name
Serial Number
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Final Assembly
NumberDate of Calibration
Revisions
Device Software
Revision
Hardware Revision

Entry
Shows the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Shows the name of the distributor of the device.
Shows the name of the device which is the unique identifier.
Shows the sensor serial number.
Enter the tag (up to 8 characters).
Enter the descriptor (up to 16 characters).
Enter the HART message (up to 32 characters).
Enter the assembly number of the device that is connected.
Enter the date of last calibration.
Shows the device software revision level.
Shows the hardware revision level.

605

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Field

Entry

Universal Revision
Field Device Revision
Write Protect
Write Protect Mode

Shows the universal command set revision level.
Shows the field device revision level.
Shows the write protect status.

Device Status
Device Status
The Device Status screen shows the current status of the device. The status of various parameters
is recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X(error).

Figure 836. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Device Status Screen

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status of the device.
The status of each parameter is easily recognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow
triangle (warning), or a red X (error).
If Configuration Changed does not show a green check mark, it can be reset by clicking the Reset
Configuration Changed Flag button on the lower right side of the screen.

606

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 837. Sample RTT15 Transmitter HART Status Screen

Calibration
DAC Trim
The DAC Trim is used to trim the 4 and 20 mA output values of the transmitter to match theoutput of a plant standard measurement device.

Figure 838. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1

Figure 839. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2607

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

After the connection to the reference meter is established, the device output is configured to 4
mA. Enter meter value if you wish to change it and click Next.

Figure 840. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3

Figure 841. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4
Click Next and you are prompted for a confirmation to proceed with 4 mA output.

Figure 842. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5
If you click No, you will be prompted to enter the reference meter value.
If you click Yes, you will be prompted to tune the value for 20 mA output.

Figure 843. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6
The device output is set to 20 mA. Enter meter value if you wish to change it and click Next.

608

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 844. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7

Figure 845. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8
Click Next and you are prompted for a confirmation to proceed with 20 mA output.

Figure 846. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9
If you click No, you will be prompted to enter the reference meter value.
If you click Yes, the calibration process will be continued.

Figure 847. Sample RTT15 Transmitter DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10
Click OK after the calibration is done.

609

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Scaled DAC Trim
The Scaled DAC Trim is used to trim the scaled mA output values of the transmitter to match theoutput of a plant standard measurement device.

Figure 848. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1

Field
Scaled DAC Trim
Trim will be scaled from 4
to 20

Entry
Choose Proceed from the drop-down to proceed with the 4 to 20
limits or choose Change to enter user defined limits.

If you choose Proceed, calibration is done for the 4 and 20 mA output values. Refer to “DAC
Trim” on page 607 for the procedure.
If you choose Change, the following screen is displayed.

Figure 849. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2Enter the lower and upper limits for the mA output and click Next. You are again prompted for a
confirmation. Choose Proceed to proceed with the limits specified or choose Change to reenter
the limits for mA output.

Figure 850. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 3610

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

If you choose Proceed, the connection to the reference meter is established, and the device output
is configured to 4 mA.

Figure 851. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 4

Figure 852. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 5
Click Next. The lower limit of the mA is displayed. You can change it if required.

Figure 853. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 6
Click Next. You are prompted for a confirmation to proceed with lower limit of the mA output.

Figure 854. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 7611

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Figure 855. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 8
If you click No, you will be prompted to enter the lower limit.
If you click Yes, the device output will be configured to 20 mA.

Figure 856. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 9
Click Next, the upper limit of the mA is displayed. You can change it if required.

Figure 857. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 10

Figure 858. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 11
Click Next and you are prompted for a confirmation to proceed with upper limit.

612

17. RTT15 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 859. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 12
If you click No, you will be prompted to enter the upper limit.
If you click Yes, the calibration process will be continued.

Figure 860. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Scaled DAC Trim Calibration Screen 13
Click OK after the calibration is done.

Override DAC Trim
The Override DAC Trim allows you to override any configured DAC trim and restore factory
calibration setting.

Figure 861. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Override DAC Trim Calibration Screen 1
Click Override DAC Trim. The default calibration settings are restored.

613

MI 020-520 – January 2014

17. RTT15 Transmitter

Figure 862. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Override DAC Trim Calibration Screen 2

Troubleshooting
Loop Test
The Loop Test screen allows you to override current analog output value.

Figure 863. Sample RTT15 Transmitter Loop Test Screen61417. RTT15 Transmitter

Field
Override Analog Output
PV Analog Output
Override Analog Value

Override User Value

Override Measurement

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Shows the current analog output value.
Select a value to override the current analog output. Choose from 4,
20, and Other.
If you choose Other, you can enter a value of your choice whichshould be between 4 and 20 mA.
Enter a value between 4 to 20 mA to override the current analog
output.
This parameter is available only if Override Analog Value is chosen as
Other.
Select the check box and click Apply to override the analog value.
Clear the check box and click Apply to disable the override process.
You can also click Cancel to disable the override process.

615

MI 020-520 – January 2014

616

17. RTT15 Transmitter18. RTT80 TransmitterThis chapter provides information that is exclusive to using RTT80 Transmitter with HART
communication protocol. Additional information about this transmitter is available in thefollowing documents:

MI 020-582 RTT80 I/A Series® Temperature Transmitter with HART® Protocol
Installation, Operations, Configuration, and Maintenance

PSS 2A-1F8 A RTT80 Intelligent Temperature Transmitter with HART
Communication ProtocolMI 020-580 I/A Series Temperature Transmitter Intrinsic Safety (CSA/FM)
Connection Diagrams

MI 020-581 I/A Series Temperature Transmitter Intrinsic Safety (ATEX/IECEx)
Connection Diagrams

DP 020-580 I/A Series Temperature Transmitter

PL 008-680 I/A Series Intelligent Temperature Transmitter617

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

The following figure shows the menu structure of the DTM.

Figure 864. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Menu Structure Screen

61818. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Overview
The Device Overview screen displays the HART information, device information, and thecurrent PV data.
The PV as % of Range block shows the current PV value in percentage.

Figure 865. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Overview Screen619

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
HART
Tag
Descriptor

Message

Polling Address
Device Information
Date of Last Calibration

Entry
This field shows the tag of the device, which is the unique identifier ofthe device. The Tag can consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
This field shows the HART descriptor, which is used to define a
description for the device. The Descriptor can consist of up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
This field shows the HART message, which is sent from the device via
the HART digital protocol when requested. The Message can consistof up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
This field shows the address of the device.
This field shows the date on which the transmitter was last calibrated.
NOTE

You can change the calibration date from the Device
Information screen to record the date of lastcalibration.
Device Software Version
Device ID
PV
PV Analog Output
PV LRVPV URV

620

This field shows the software version of the device.
This field shows the Device ID, which is the unique identification
number of the device.
This field shows the current PV analog output in mA.
This field shows the lower range value of the process variable. Lower
range value defines the operational endpoint from which the Analog
Value and the 0% point of the Percent Range are derived.
This field shows the upper range value of the process variable. Upper
range value defines the operational endpoint from which the Analog
Value and the 100% point of the Percent Range are derived.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Process Variables
The Process Variables screen displays the values of device variables and the measured values
assigned to the device variables in the selected engineering units.

Figure 866. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Process Variables Screen

Field
Process Variables
Primary Variable
Secondary Variable
Tertiary Variable
Quaternary Variable
PV Analog Output
PV% of Range

Sensor 1 Temperature

Entry
This field shows the primary HART value in the selected engineering
units.
This field shows the secondary HART value in the selectedengineering units.
This field shows the tertiary HART value in the selected engineering
units.
This field shows the quaternary (fourth) HART value in the selectedengineering units.
This field shows the current value of PV analog output in the selectedengineering units.
This field shows the current PV value in percentage. PV% of Range
tracks the Digital Value representation with respect to the range
defined by the Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value for normal
operating modes. The units of this variable are always in percent.
This field shows the current temperature at the sensor input 1.

621

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field

Entry

Sensor 1 Temperature
Raw ValueSensor 2 Temperature
Sensor 2 Temperature
Raw Value
Device Temperature
Value

This field shows the non-linearized mV or Ohm value of sensor 1
input.
This field shows the current temperature at the sensor input 2.
This field shows the non-linearized mV or Ohm value of sensor 2
input.
This field shows the device temperature.

Device Configuration
GeneralThe General screen displays the upper and lower limit values of PV analog outputs. It allows you
to set PV map and mains filter. You can also specify upper and lower range values of PV analog
outputs, PV damping time, and alarm delay.

Figure 867. Sample RTT80 Transmitter General Screen

Field
GeneralPV MapPV Lower Limit
PV Upper Limit
622

Entry
Select a measured variable to assign to the primary HART value fromthe drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Device
Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2), Sensor
Switching, and Average with Backup.
This field shows the lower limit value of PV analog output.
This field shows the upper limit value of PV analog output.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
PV LRVPV URVPV Damping

Mains Filter
Alarm Delay

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify Lower Range Value of the measurement. This value relates to
the 4 mA analog output value.
The set point depends on the measured variable assigned in the PV
Map parameter and the sensor type(s) selected. For more details on thesensor types refer to “Sensor1 Type” on page 625 and “Sensor2 Type”
on page 631.
Specify Lower Range Value of the measurement. This value relates tothe 20 mA analog output value.
The set point depends on the measured variable assigned in the PV
Map parameter and the Sensor Type selected. For more details on thesensor types refer to “Sensor1 Type” on page 625 and “Sensor2 Type”
on page 631.
Specify the damping time that is applied to the current output.
This parameter specifies the time constant of the exponential delaythat occurs in the current output when the measured value fluctuates.
If you enter a low time constant the current output reacts quickly, andif you enter a high time constant, current output reaction is delayed.
Select the mains filter from the drop-down list. Choose from 50 Hz
and 60 Hz.
Specify time in seconds before an alarm is broadcast.

NOTE

When one of the sensor types is ‘No Sensor’, then the PV Map drop-down displays
two options:
1. Sensor Type n (n = 1 or 2, whichever is selected)
2. Device Temperature
When both the sensor types are ‘No Sensor’, then the PV Map drop-down displays
one option - Device Temperature.

623

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Measurement Units
The Measurement Units screen allows you to select the engineering units for all the measured
values.

Figure 868. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Measurement Units Screen

Field

Entry

Measurement Units
Unit

Select the units for all the measured values from the drop-down list.
Choose from degC, degF, K, degR, Ohm, and mV.

SensorSensor 1 Settings
The Sensor 1 Settings screen allows you to select the sensor and connection types, and set values
for Sensor Offset and Sensor Serial Number for sensor input 1.
If the connection type is 2-wire, then set the value for 2-Wire Compensation.

Figure 869. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Settings Screen62418. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Sensor 1 Settings
Sensor1 Type

Entry
Select the sensor type for sensor input 1 from the drop-down list. The
options in the drop-down change based on the measurement units
selected in the “Measurement Units” on page 624.
Choose from:• Pt100 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt200 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt500 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt1000 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt100 JIS C1604-81 (a=0.003916)• Ni100 DIN43760 (a=0.006180)• Ni120 DIN43760 (a=0.006180)• Ni100 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.006170)• Ni120 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.006170)• TC Type B (PtRh30-PtRh6) IEC60584• TC Type C (W5Re-W26Re) ASTM E988
• TC Type D (W3Re-W25Re) ASTM E988
• TC Type E (NiCr-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type J (Fe-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type K (NiCr-Ni) IEC60584• TC Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) IEC60584• TC Type R (PtRh13-Pt) IEC60584• TC Type S (PtRh10-Pt) IEC60584• TC Type T (Cu-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type L (Fe-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type U (Cu-CuNi) IEC60584• Pt50 GOST (a=0.003911)• Pt100 GOST (a=0.003911)• Cu50 GOST (a=0.004280)• Cu50 OIML (a=0.004280)• Cu50 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.004260)• RTD Platinum (Callendar/van Dusen)• RTD Poly Nickel (OIML R84, GOST 6651-94)• RTD Polynomial Copper (OIML R84:2003)• 10...400 Ω• 10...2000 Ω• -20...100 mV• No Sensor
NOTE

If you select ‘No Sensor’ then the rest of the fields inthis screen do not appear.

625

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
Connection Type

2-Wire Compensation

Sensor Offset
Sensor Serial Number

Entry
Select the connection type for sensor input 1 from the drop-down list.
Choose from 2-wire, 3-wire, and 4-wirea.
Prerequisite: You must specify an RTD sensor as the sensor type.
If you select 2-wire as the connection type, the 2-Wire Compensation
field appears. If you select 3-wire or 4-wire as the connection type, thisfield does not appear.
Specify the resistance value for 2-Wire compensation. You can specify
from 0 to 30 Ω.
This field appears only if you select the connection type as 2-wire.
Specify the sensor offset value. The value you specify is added to themeasured value. You can specify from -10.0 to +10.0.
Specify the serial number of the sensor. You can specify up to 12
alphanumeric characters.

a. 4-wire connection is not available for sensor input 2.

If you select thermocouple (TC) sensor as the sensor type, then select the reference junction
measurement and specify the fixed preset value for temperature compensation.

Figure 870. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Settings Screen (Thermocouple Sensor Type)

Sensor 1 Settings
Reference Junction

626

Select the reference junction (cold junction) measurement from thedrop-down list. Choose from No Compensation, Internal
Measurement, Fixed Value, and Sensor 2 Value.
• No Compensation: Select this option if you do not want to use
temperature compensation• Internal Measurement: Select this option if you want to useinternal reference junction temperature• Fixed Value: Select this option if you want to use a fixed preset
value, and you can specify the compensation value via theReference Junction Preset Value parameter.
• Sensor 2 Value: Select this option if you want to use themeasured value of sensor 2

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Reference Junction
Preset Value

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Specify the fixed preset value for temperature compensation. You canspecify from –50 to +85°C.
Prerequisite: You must select the Fixed Value parameter from theReference Junction drop-down list.

Sensor 1 Trimming
The Sensor 1 Trimming screen allows you to select the linearization method for the connected
sensor. When you reset this parameter to the factory settings, the original linearization is restored.

Figure 871. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Trimming Screen

Field
Sensor 1 Trimming
Trimming

Entry
Select the linearization method for the connected sensor from thedrop-down list. Choose from Factory Trim Settings and User Trim
Settings.

If you select User Trim Settings, then specify sensor trimming upper and lower values as shown in
Figure 872.

Figure 872. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Trimming Screen (User Trimmings)

627

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sensor 1 Trimming
Trimming Min Span

Trimming Lower Value

Trimming Upper Value

18. RTT80 TransmitterThis field shows the minimum possible span between the upper andlower values of sensor trimming.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.
Specify the lower point for linear characteristic calibration. This value
affects the offset and slope.
The input for this parameter depends on the measured variableassigned in the PV Map parameter and the Sensor 1 Type selected. For
more details on PV Map refer to “General” on page 622 and for
Sensor 1 Type refer to “Sensor 1 Settings” on page 624.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.
Specify the upper point for linear characteristic calibration. This value
affects offset and slope.
The input for this parameter depends on the measured variableassigned in the PV Map parameter and the Sensor 1 Type selected. For
more details on PV Map refer to “General” on page 622 and for
Sensor 1 Type refer to “Sensor 1 Settings” on page 624.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.

Sensor 1 Linearization
The Sensor 1 Linearization screen is enabled when you select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel,
or RTD Polynomial Copper option in the Sensor Type parameter.
If you select either RTD Poly Nickel or RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type, then specify
values for polynomial coefficients.

Figure 873. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Linearization Screen (RTD Poly Nickel or RTD
Polynomial Copper Sensor Type)628

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
Sensor 1 Limits
Lower Range Limit

Upper Range Limit

Polynomial Coefficients
Polynomial Coeff. R0
Polynomial Coeff. A

Polynomial Coeff. B

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the lower calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Specify the upper calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Specify the R0 value for linearization of nickel or copper sensors. You
can specify from 40.000 to 1050.000 Ω.
Specify the coefficient A for sensor linearization of copper or nickel
resistance thermometers. The default value set for this parameter is5.49630e-003.
Specify the coefficient B for sensor linearization of copper or nickel
resistance thermometers. The default value set for this parameter is6.75560e-006.

If you select RTD Platinum as the sensor type, then specify values for Callendar-Van-Dusen
Coefficients.

Figure 874. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 1 Linearization Screen (RTD Platinum Sensor Type)629

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry

Sensor 1 Limits
Lower Range Limit

Specify the lower calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select a sensor type of RTD Platinum, RTD
Poly Nickel or RTD Polynomial Copper.
Upper Range Limit
Specify the upper calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select a sensor type of RTD Platinum, RTD
Poly Nickel or RTD Polynomial Copper.
Callendar-Van-Dusen Coefficients
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. R0
Specify the R0 value for linearization with the Callendar-Van-Dusen
polynomial. You can specify from 40.000 to 1050.000 Ω.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. A
Specify the coefficient A for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 3.910000e-003.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. B
Specify the coefficient B for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 5.780000e-007.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. C
Specify the coefficient C for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 4.180000e-012.

Sensor 2 Settings
The Sensor 2 Settings screen allows you to select the sensor and connection types, and set values
for Sensor Offset and Sensor Serial Number for sensor input 2.
If the connection type is 2-wire, then set the value for 2-Wire Compensation.

Figure 875. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Settings Screen

630

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Sensor 2 Settings
Sensor2 Type

Entry
Select the sensor type for sensor input 2, from the drop-down list. The
options in the drop-down change based on the measurement units
selected in the “Measurement Units” on page 624.
Choose from:• Pt100 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt200 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt500 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt1000 IEC 751 (a=0.00385)• Pt100 JIS C1604-81 (a=0.003916)• Ni100 DIN43760 (a=0.006180)• Ni120 DIN43760 (a=0.006180)• Ni100 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.006170)• Ni120 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.006170)• TC Type B (PtRh30-PtRh6) IEC60584• TC Type C (W5Re-W26Re) ASTM E988
• TC Type D (W3Re-W25Re) ASTM E988
• TC Type E (NiCr-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type J (Fe-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type K (NiCr-Ni) IEC60584• TC Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) IEC60584• TC Type R (PtRh13-Pt) IEC60584• TC Type S (PtRh10-Pt) IEC60584• TC Type T (Cu-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type L (Fe-CuNi) IEC60584• TC Type U (Cu-CuNi) IEC60584• Pt50 GOST (a=0.003911)• Pt100 GOST (a=0.003911)• Cu50 GOST (a=0.004280)• Cu50 OIML (a=0.004280)• Cu50 OIML R84:2003 GOST (a=0.004260)• RTD Platinium (Callendar/van Dusen)• RTD Poly Nickel (OIML R84, GOST 6651-94)• RTD Polynomial Copper (OIML R84:2003)• 10...400 Ω• 10...2000 Ω• -20...100 mV• No Sensor
NOTE

If you select ‘No Sensor’ then the rest of the fields inthis screen do not appear.

631

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Connection Type

2-Wire Compensation

Sensor Offset
Sensor Serial Number

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry
Select the connection type for sensor input 2 from the drop-down list.
Choose from 2-wire and 3-wire.
Prerequisite: You must specify an RTD sensor as the sensor type.
If you select 2-wire as the connection type, the 2-Wire Compensation
field appears. If you select 3-wire as the connection type, this field does
not appear.
Specify the resistance value for 2-Wire compensation. You can specify
from 0 to 30 Ω.
This field appears only if you select the connection type as 2-wire.
Specify the sensor offset value. The value you specify is added to themeasured value. You can specify from -10.0 to +10.0.
Specify the serial number of the sensor. You can specify up to 12
alphanumeric characters.

If you select thermocouple (TC) sensor as the sensor type, then select the reference junction
measurement and specify the fixed preset value for temperature compensation.

Figure 876. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Settings Screen (Thermocouple Sensor Type)
Field
Sensor 2 Settings
Reference Junction

632

Entry
Select the reference junction (cold junction) measurement for
temperature compensation of thermocouples (TC) from the dropdown list. Choose from No Compensation, Internal Measurement,
Fixed Value, and Sensor 2 Value.
• No Compensation: Select this option if you do not want to use
temperature compensation• Internal Measurement: Select this option if you want to useinternal reference junction temperature• Fixed Value: Select this option if you want to use a fixed preset
value, and you can specify the compensation value via theReference Junction Preset Value parameter.
• Sensor 2 Value: Select this option if you want to use themeasured value of sensor 2

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Reference Junction
Preset Value

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Specify the fixed preset value for temperature compensation. You canspecify from –50 to +85°C.
Prerequisite: You must select the Fixed Value parameter from theReference Junction drop-down list.

Sensor 2 Trimming
The Sensor 2 Trimming screen allows you to select the linearization method for the connected
sensor. When you reset this parameter to the factory settings, the original linearization is restored.

Figure 877. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Trimming Screen

Field
Sensor 2 Trimming
Trimming

Entry
Select the linearization method for the connected sensor from thedrop-down list. Choose from Factory Trim Settings and User Trim
Settings.

If you select User Trim Settings, then specify sensor trimming upper and lower values as shown in
Figure 878.

Figure 878. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Trimming Screen (User Trimmings)633

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
Sensor 2 Trimming
Trimming Min Span

Trimming Lower Value

Trimming Upper Value

Entry
This field shows the minimum possible span between the upper andlower values of sensor trimming.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.
Specify the lower point for linear characteristic calibration. This value
affects offset and slope.
The input for this parameter depends on the measured variableassigned in the PV Map parameter and the Sensor 2 Type selected. For
more details on PV Map refer to “General” on page 622 and for
Sensor 2 Type refer to “Sensor 2 Settings” on page 630.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.
Specify the upper point for linear characteristic calibration. This value
affects offset and slope.
The input for this parameter depends on the measured variableassigned in the PV Map parameter and the Sensor 2 Type selected. For
more details on PV Map refer to “General” on page 622 and for
Sensor 2 Type refer to “Sensor 2 Settings” on page 630.
Prerequisite: The Trimming parameter is set to User Trim Settings.

Sensor 2 Linearization
The Sensor 1 Linearization screen is enabled when you select RTD platinum, RTD Poly Nickel,
or RTD Polynomial Copper option in the Sensor Type parameter.
If you select either RTD Poly Nickel or RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type, then specify
values for polynomial coefficients.

Figure 879. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Linearization Screen (RTD Poly Nickel or RTD
Polynomial Copper Sensor Type)634

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
Sensor 2 Limits
Lower Range Limit

Upper Range Limit

Polynomial Coefficients
Polynomial Coeff. R0
Polynomial Coeff. A

Polynomial Coeff. B

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify the lower calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Specify the upper calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Specify the R0 value for linearization of nickel or copper sensors. You
can specify from 40.000 to 1050.000 Ω.
Specify the coefficient A for sensor linearization of copper or nickel
resistance thermometers. The default value set for this parameter is5.49630e-003.
Specify the coefficient B for sensor linearization of copper or nickel
resistance thermometers. The default value set for this parameter is6.75560e-006.

If you select RTD Platinum as the sensor type, then specify values for Callendar-Van-Dusen
Coefficients.

Figure 880. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Sensor 2 Linearization Screen (RTD Platinum Sensor Type)635

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Sensor 2 Limits
Lower Range Limit

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry

Specify the lower calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Upper Range Limit
Specify the upper calculation limit for sensor linearization.
Prerequisite: You must select RTD Platinum, RTD Poly Nickel, or
RTD Polynomial Copper as the sensor type.
Callendar-Van-Dusen Coefficients
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. R0
Specify the R0 value for linearization with the Callendar-Van-Dusen
polynomial. You can specify from 40.000 to 1050.000 Ω.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. A
Specify the coefficient A for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 3.910000e-003.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. B
Specify the coefficient B for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 5.780000e-007.
Call./v. Dusen Coeff. C
Specify the coefficient A for sensor linearization. The default value set
for this parameter is 4.180000e-012.

636

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Min Max Values
The Min Max Values screen displays the minimum and maximum temperatures measured in thepast at sensor inputs 1 and 2. If the sensor type is not selected (that is, if sensor type is ‘No
Sensor’), then the corresponding sensor temperature limits are not displayed.
This screen also displays the minimum and maximum electronics temperature measured in the
past.

Figure 881. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Min Max Values Screen637

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Sensor Limits
Sensor 1 Min Valuea

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry

This field shows the minimum temperature measured in the past at
sensor input 1.
a
Sensor 1 Max Value
This field shows the maximum temperature measured in the past at
sensor input 1.
b
Sensor 2 Min Value
This field shows the minimum temperature measured in the past at
sensor input 2.
b
Sensor 2 Max Value
This field shows the maximum temperature measured in the past at
sensor input 2.
c
Reset Sensor Limits
Click Reset Sensor Limits to reset the maximum indicators for theminimum and maximum temperatures measured at the sensor inputs.
Device Temperature Limits
Min Value
This field shows the minimum electronics temperature measured in
the past.
Max Value
This field shows the maximum electronics temperature measured in
the past.
Reset Device
Click Reset Device Temperature Limits to reset the maximum
Temperature Limits
indicator for the minimum and maximum electronic temperatures
measured.
a. This field does not appear if sensor type 1 is ‘No Sensor’.
b. This field does not appear if sensor type 2 is ‘No Sensor’.
c. This button is disabled if sensor type 1 and 2 are ‘No Sensor’.

638

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Settings
The Diagnostic Settings screen allows you to select the drift mode, drift alarm category, set thedrift point, and sensor switch point. It allows you to select calibration counter start and alarm
category, and set the calibration counter start value.

Figure 882. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostic Settings Screen
Field
Diagnostic Settings
Corrosion Detection
Drift/Difference Mode

Entry
Select the device reaction when corrosion of the sensor cables is
detected. Choose from Maintenance Required and Failure.
This parameter verifies the accuracy of the measured values andmonitors the connected sensors. Select an alarm for the measurements
exceeding or dropping below the set point, from the drop-down list:

Out Band - A status signal is displayed if the absolutevalue for the differential value exceeds thedrift/difference set point.



Drift/Difference Alarm
Category

Drift/Difference Set Point

In Band - A status signal is displayed if the absolutevalue for the differential value drops below thedrift/difference set point.
Select device reaction to a Drift/Difference alarm from the drop-downlist. Choose from Out of Specification, Maintenance, and Failure.
Prerequisite: The Drift/Difference Mode parameter must be set to
Out Band (drift) or In Band.
Specify the maximum permissible measured value deviation between
sensor 1 and sensor 2 that results in drift/difference detection. You canchoose from 1.0 to 999.0.

639

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Sensor Switch Set Point

Calibration Counter Start

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry
Specify the threshold value for sensor switching.
Whether or not this field appears depends on the sensor types selectedin the “Sensor 1 Settings” and “Sensor 2 Settings”.
This parameter can be used to turn the calibration counter on or offor reset the counter. Choose one of the following options from thedrop-down list:
1. Off: Stops the calibration counter
2. On: Starts the calibration counter

Calibration Alarm
Category
Calibration Counter Start
Value
Calibration Countdown

640

3. Reset + run: Resets the calibration counter to the set
start value and starts the calibration counter
Select the calibration alarm category (status signal) from the dropdown list. Choose from Maintenance Required and Failure.
Specify number of days for calibration countdown. You can specify
from 0 to 365 days.
This field shows remaining days on the calibration counter. The
countdown of the calibration counter runs only if the device is turnedon.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

AccessThe Access screen displays the locking state of the device.

Figure 883. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Access Screen

Field
AccessLocking State

Entry
This field shows the device locking status. The DIP switch is fitted on
the local display. When you activate Write Protection, you can nothave write access to the parameters.

Device Temperature
The Device Temperature screen allows you to set alarms for device temperature and displays thedevice temperature value in the selected engineering units.

Figure 884. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Temperature Screen

Field

Entry

Device Temperature Settings
Device Temperature
Select the device reaction to out of operating temperature limits (thatAlarmis, less than -40°C (-40°F) or greater than +85°C (+185°F)).
Choose from Off, Out of Specification, and Failure.
Device TemperatureThis field shows the device temperature value in the selected
Value
engineering units.

641

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

OutputAnalog
The Analog Output screen allows you to configure the analog output parameters in selectedengineering units.

Figure 885. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Analog Output Screen64218. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
Analog Output
PV Map

Output Current
Measuring Mode

Lower Range Value

Upper Range Value

Out Of Range Category

Failure Mode

Failure Current

Current Trimming 4
mA
Current Trimming
20 mA

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Select the PV Map from the drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1,
Sensor 2, Device Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup
Sensor 2), Sensor Switching, and Average with Backup.
This field shows the calculated output current in mA.
Select one of the following options from the drop-down list to invert
the output signal.
1. Standard - The output current increases withincreasing temperatures
2. Inverse - The output current decreases with increasing
temperatures
Specify the Lower Range Value of the measurement. This value relates
to the 4 mA analog output value.
The set point depends on the measured variable assigned in the PV
Map parameter and the sensor type(s) selected. For more details on
the sensor types refer to “Sensor1 Type” on page 625 and “Sensor2
Type” on page 631.
Specify the Upper Range Value of the measurement. This value relates
to the 20 mA analog output value.
The set point depends on the measured variable assigned in the PV
Map parameter and the sensor type(s) selected. For more details on
the sensor types refer to “Sensor1 Type” on page 625 and “Sensor2
Type” on page 631.
Select the device reaction to the measurement value outside the set
measuring range from the drop-down list. Choose from Out ofSpecification, Maintenance Required, and Failure.
Select the signal on alarm level of the current output in the event of anerror. Choose from Minimum and Maximum.
If you select Maximum, specify the signal on alarm level using the
Failure Current parameter.
Specify the mA level that conveys a failure. You can specify from 21.5
to 23.0 mA.
Prerequisite: Failure Mode parameter must be set to Maximum.
Specify the current output at the lower end of the measuring range.
You can specify from 3.85 to 4.15 mA.
Specify the current output at the upper end of the measuring range.
You can specify from 19.850 to 20.15 mA.

643

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

DigitalThe Digital Output screen allows you to configure parameters for digital communicationinterface.

Figure 886. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Digital Output Screen

Field
Digital Output
PV MapSV Map

TV MapQV Map644

Entry
Select the PV Map from the drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1,
Sensor 2, Device Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup
Sensor 2), Sensor Switching, and Average with Backup.
Select the SV Map from the drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1,
Sensor 2, Device Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup
Sensor 2), Sensor Switching, and Average with Backup.
Select the TV Map from the drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1,
Sensor 2, Device Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup
Sensor 2), Sensor Switching, and Average with Backup.
Select the QV Map from the drop-down list. Choose from Sensor 1,
Sensor 2, Device Temperature, Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup
Sensor 2), Sensor Switching, and Average with Backup.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

For more details about the Map options, refer to the following list:Sensor 1 - indicates the sensor 1 measured valueSensor 2 - indicates the sensor 2 measured value

Device Temperature - indicates the electronics temperatureAverage - indicates the average of sensor 1 and sensor 2 (that is, 0.5 x (SV1+SV2))



Difference - indicates the difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 (that is, SV1-SV2)



Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2): indicates that if sensor 1 fails, the value of sensor 2
automatically becomes the primary HART value (PV): sensor 1 (OR sensor 2)



Sensor Switching - indicates that if the value exceeds the configured threshold value T
for sensor 1, the measured value of sensor 2 becomes the primary HART value (PV).
The system switches back to sensor 1 when the measured value of sensor 1 is at least 2
K below T: sensor 1 (sensor 2, if sensor 1 > T)

Average with Backup - indicates the average value with the backup value, that is, 0.5 x(SV1+SV2) with backup (measured value of sensor 1 or sensor 2 in the event of asensor error in the other sensor)
NOTE

When one of the sensor types is ‘No Sensor’, then the PV Map, SV Map, TV Map,and QV Map drop-down lists display two options:
1. Sensor Type n (n = 1 or 2, whichever is selected)
2. Device Temperature
When both the sensor types are ‘No Sensor’, then the PV Map, SV Map, TV Map,and QV Map drop-down lists display one option - Device Temperature.

645

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

HART
The HART screen allows you to select the polling address and enter the number of response
preambles. It displays the number of request preambles. You can set the burst mode and the burst
command, and select burst variables for slots 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Figure 887. Sample RTT80 Transmitter HART Screen

Field
HART
Polling Address

Number of Request
Preambles
Number of Response
Preambles
646

Entry
Select the HART address of the device from the drop-down list.
For HART 5.0 - Choose from 0 to 15.
For HART 6.0 - Choose from 0 to 63.
This field shows the number of preambles in the HART message.
Specify the number of preambles in the HART message. You canspecify from 2 to 20.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
HART Revision
Burst Mode

Burst Command

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
This field shows the HART revision of the device.
Select HART burst mode from the drop-down list. Choose from On
and Off. If you switch:
1. On - The device regularly sends data to the bus
2. Off - The device sends data to the bus only whenrequested by the HART master
You can select this parameter only when the Burst Mode option isenabled. Select the command whose response is sent to the HART
master in the burst mode. Choose one of the following options fromthe drop-down list:
1. Command 1 - Primary variable
2. Command 2 - Current and main measured value as %3. Command 3 - Current and dynamic HART variables
4. Command 9 - Dynamic variables and status

Burst Variable Slot 0

Burst Variable Slot 1

Burst Variable Slot 2

Burst Variable Slot 3

5. Command 33 - Dynamic variables and units
You can select this parameter only when the Burst Mode option isenabled. Select a measured variable from the drop-down list to assign
to slot 0. Choose from Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Device Temperature,
Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2), Sensor Switching,and Average with Backup.
You can select this parameter only when the Burst Mode option isenabled. Select a measured variable from the drop-down list to assign
to slot 1. Choose from Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Device Temperature,
Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2), Sensor Switching,and Average with Backup.
You can select this parameter only when the Burst Mode option isenabled. Select a measured variable from the drop-down list to assign
to slot 2. Choose from Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Device Temperature,
Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2), Sensor Switching,and Average with Backup.
You can select this parameter only when the Burst Mode option isenabled. Select a measured variable from the drop-down list to assign
to slot 3. Choose from Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Device Temperature,
Average, Difference, Sensor 1 (Backup Sensor 2), Sensor Switching,and Average with Backup.

647

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

NOTE

When one of the sensor types is ‘No Sensor’, then the Burst Variable Slot 0, 1, 2,
and 3 drop-down lists display two options:
1. Sensor Type n (n = 1 or 2, whichever is selected)
2. Device Temperature
When both the sensor types are ‘No Sensor’, then the Burst Variable Slot 0, 1, 2,
and 3 drop-down lists display one option - Device Temperature.

Local Display
The Local Display Configuration screen is used to configure the information display options.

Figure 888. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Local Display Screen

64818. RTT80 Transmitter

Field

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry

Local Display Configuration
Display IntervalSpecify in seconds the interval a measured value is displayed if
more than one measured value is displayed.
Display
Select the format of display of the measured values on the local
display from the drop-down list. Choose from Value Only andValue+Bargraph.
Value 1 Display
Select the value to be displayed as the first value on the local
display from the drop-down list. Choose from Process Value,Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Output Current, Percent of Range, and Device
Temperature.
Value 1 Decimal Display This field appears only if a measured value is specified in the Value
Format1 Display parameter.
Select the number of characters displayed after the decimal pointfrom the drop-down list. Choose from Automatic, x, x.x, x.xx,
x.xxx, and x.xxxx.
“Automatic” displays the maximum number of decimal places
possible based on the measurement.
Value 2 Display
Select the value to be displayed as the second value on the local
display from the drop-down list. Choose from Process Value,Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Output Current, Percent of Range, and Device
Temperature.
Value 2 Decimal Display This field appears only if a measured value is specified in the Value
Format2 Display parameter.
Select the number of characters displayed after the decimal pointfrom the drop-down list. Choose from Automatic, x, x.x, x.xx,
x.xxx, and x.xxxx.
“Automatic” displays the maximum number of decimal places
possible based on the measurement.
Value 3 Display
Select the value to be displayed as the third value on the local
display from the drop-down list. Choose from Process Value,Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Output Current, Percent of Range, and Device
Temperature.
Value 3 Decimal Display This field appears only if a measured value is specified in the Value
Format3 Display parameter.
Select the number of characters displayed after the decimal pointfrom the drop-down list. Choose from Automatic, x, x.x, x.xx,
x.xxx, and x.xxxx.
“Automatic” displays the maximum number of decimal places
possible based on the measurement.

649

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Device Information
The Device Information screen shows the complete information of the device. It allows you to set
final assembly number, tag, HART short tag, descriptor, date of last calibration, and message.

Figure 889. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Information Screen
Field
Device Information
Manufacturer
Manufacturer ID

Name
Serial Number
Configuration Counter

Entry
This field shows the name of the manufacturer.
This field shows the manufacturer ID. This is a 2-digit
hexadecimal number. The manufacturer ID for this device is
20.
This field shows the name of the device.
This field shows the serial number of the device.
This field shows the counter reading for changes to device
parameters.
NOTE

This parameter increments by 1 when thevalues of static parameters change during
optimization or configuration. This countershows an higher value when several
parameters change in the device. You can notreset this counter. If the counter overflows,(16 bit), it starts again at 1.
Final Assembly Number
Tag

650

Enter the final assembly number for the device.
Specify a unique name for the device tag. You can use up to 32
alphanumeric characters.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Field
HART Short Tag
Device Type

Descriptor
Date of Last Calibration
Message

Operating Time
Versions
Device Software Version
ENP Version
Revision
Software Revision
HART Revision
Device Revision

Hardware Revision
Order Information
Order Code
Extended Order Code
Extended Order Code 2
Extended Order Code 3

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Entry
Specify HART short tag. You can use up to 8 alphanumericcharacters.
This field shows the device type that is registered with the
HART Communication Foundation. This is a 2-digit
hexadecimal number.
Specify a description for the device. You can use up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Specify the date of the last calibration.
Specify the HART message that is sent from the device via the
HART digital protocol when requested. You can use up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
This field shows the time in hours that the device has been in
operation until now.
This field shows the software version of the device.
This field shows the version of the electronic nameplate(ENP). This is a 6-digit number in the format xx.yy.zz
This field shows the software revision of the device.
This field shows the HART revision of the device.
This field shows the revision of the device that is registeredwith the HART Communication Foundation. This is a 2-digit
hexadecimal number.
This field shows the hardware revision number of the device.
This field shows the order code of the device which is
generated from the extended order code.
This field shows the extended order code: RTT80-T.
Not used.
Not used.

651

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Device Status
Device Status 1
The Device Status 1 screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 890. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 1 Screen652

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Device Status 2
The Device Status 2 screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 891. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 2 Screen653

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Device Status 3
The Device Status 3 screen shows the current status of the device. The status of each parameter isrecognized by the use of a green check mark (good), a yellow triangle (warning), or a red X (error).

Figure 892. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Device Status 3 Screen

HART Status
The HART Status screen shows the HART status as well as the field device status.

Figure 893. Sample RTT80 Transmitter HART Status Screen65418. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Troubleshooting
Diagnostics History
The Diagnostics History displays all the information, status, and process conditions of the device.

ActualThe Actual screen displays current diagnostics messages with the highest priority.

Figure 894. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Actual Screen655

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Diagnostics List - Actual
Actual Diagnostics Count
Actual Diagnostics 1
Actual Diagnostics 1
ChannelActual Diagnostics 2
Actual Diagnostics 2
ChannelActual Diagnostics 3
Actual Diagnostics 3
ChannelRemedy Information

656

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Entry
This field shows the number of diagnostics messages currently
pending in the device.
This field shows the current diagnostics message with the highest
priority.
This field shows the sensor input related to current diagnostics 1
message.
This field shows the current diagnostics message with the second
highest priority.
This field shows the sensor input related to current diagnostics 2
message.
This field shows the current diagnostics message with the third
highest priority.
This field shows the sensor input related to current diagnostics 3
message.
If you click on Remedy Information the device displays thesuggested remedial action for the current diagnostics message asshown in the Figure 895.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Figure 895. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Actual Screen (Remedy Information)657

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Previous
The Previous screen displays five diagnostics messages that occurred in the past. These messages
are displayed in chronological order.

Figure 896. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Diagnostics - Previous Screen
Field
Diagnostics List - Previous
Previous Diagnostics 1
Previous Diagnostics 1
ChannelPrevious Diagnostics 2
Previous Diagnostics 2
ChannelPrevious Diagnostics 3
Previous Diagnostics 3
ChannelPrevious Diagnostics 4
Previous Diagnostics 4
Channel658

Entry
This field shows the last diagnostics message with the highest
priority.
This field shows the possible sensor input related to the previous
diagnostics 1 message.
This field shows the last diagnostics message with the second
highest priority.
This field shows the possible sensor input related to the previous
diagnostics 2 message.
This field shows the last diagnostics message with the third highest
priority.
This field shows the possible sensor input related to the previous
diagnostics 3 message.
This field shows the last diagnostics message with the fourthhighest priority.
This field shows the possible sensor input related to the previous
diagnostics 4 message.

18. RTT80 Transmitter

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Field
Previous Diagnostics 5
Previous Diagnostics 5
Channel

Entry
This field shows the last diagnostics message with the fifth highest
priority.
This field shows the possible sensor input related to the previous
diagnostics 5 message.

Restore Factory Defaults
The Restore Factory Defaults screen allows you to reset all data to factory default values.

Figure 897. Sample RTT80 Transmitter Restore Factory Defaults Screen

Field
Restore Factory Defaults
Device Reset

Entry
Select one of the following options to reset the device
configuration from the drop-down list:
1. Not Active - No action is executed
2. To Factory Defaults - All the parameters are reset tothe original factory setting
3. To Delivery Settings - All the parameters are resetto the original factory setting.
4. Restart Device - The device is restarted but theconfiguration is not unchanged659

MI 020-520 – January 2014

18. RTT80 Transmitter

Loop Test
The Loop Test is a procedure to use the transmitter as a calibration source to check other
instruments in the loop.

Figure 898. Sample RTT80 Transmitter - Loop Test Screen

Field
Analog Output
Simulation
Value

660

Entry
Select one of the options - On or Off from the drop-down list to
switch simulation of the current output on or off.
Specify a current value for the simulation. You can choose a value
from 3.58 to 23.0 mA

Index84
Calibration 11
Device Overview 7
Device Status 9
Process Variables 8
Setup 12Store to Device 28
Troubleshooting 26
A
Absolute Maximum Value 596
Access 641
Activity Log 4
Aging 142
Alarm 430
Alarm Status 430
Amount of Fluctuation 147, 255, 356
Analog 642
Analyzer Faults 141, 245, 346
ATC Open 142, 245, 346
ATC Short 142, 245, 346
Auto Hold Mode 126, 249
B
Boiler Drum 545
Broken Sensor Value 600
Burst 647C
Calibration 431
84 11
I/A Series Pressure 413
IMT25 or IMT96 75
MAG2 Series Transmitter 99
Calibration Counter Start 640
Calibration Password 483
Callendar 630
CJC Value 595
Closed Tank, Dry Leg 513
Closed Tank, Wet Leg 530

661

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Coat 141
Coat Limit 128
Comm Faults 142, 246, 346
Comp Range 142, 245, 346
Configuration Counter 650
Configuration Password 483
Configuration Report 1
Connection 626
Correct 432
Correct Input LRV 432
Correct Input URV 432
Corrosion 639
Custom Measurement Curve 112
Cutoff 423
Cutoff Mode 423
D
DAC Trim 99, 486
Damping 108, 217, 321
Device 98
Device Information 428, 650
Device Overview 89, 172, 275, 379
84 7
I/A Series Pressure 412, 438
IMT25 and IMT96 72
MAG2Series 89, 172, 275, 379
Device Reset 659
Device Status 98, 199, 304, 403, 429
84 9
I/A Series Pressure 413, 441
IMT25 and IMT96 73
MAG2 Series Transmitter 98
Diagnostic 132
Diagnostic Settings 639
Diagnostic/Alarm Status
IMT25 and IMT96 74
Differential Pressure 475
Digital 644
Digital Comm Timeout 123, 234, 342
Display 649
Display Format 123, 234, 342
DP at 1 User Point 493, 579
DP at 2 User Points 493, 579
Drift 639

662

Index

IndexMI 020-520 – January 2014

E
Electrode 109
Electronics Temperature 500
Electronics Temperature Failure 442
ENP 651
Enter Value 596
Error Detection 603
Ex Trim 100
External Zero Pushbutton 442
F
Factory Settings 101
Fail Temperature 113, 220
Failure 643
Failure Alarm 425
Firmware Upgrade - 876CR 312
Firmware Upgrade - 876PH 211
Front Panel Timeout 123, 234, 342
G
Gain Trim 100
Glass 141
Glass Cut Off 128
Glass Lo Limit 128
H
H1 507
H2 507
HART 426, 651
HART information 89, 172, 275, 379
HART Polling Address 2
HART Status 1, 430
High Value 490, 576
I
I/A Series Pressure
Calibration 413
Device Overview 412, 438
Device Status 413, 441
Process Variables 412, 439
Setup 414
Troubleshooting 418, 434, 446
IMT25 and IMT96
Device Overview 72
Device Status 73663

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Diagnostic Alarm Status 74
Input/Output Status 75
Process Variables 72
Setup 76
Troubleshooting 87
Input Trigger 132, 237
Input/Output Status
IMT25 and IMT96 75
MAG2 Series 95
L
LCD Adjust Value 123, 234, 342
Leakage 141, 245, 346
Level 504
Local Display 427
Locking 641
Loop Test 26, 102, 209, 310, 408, 435, 551, 587, 660
Low Slope 142
Low Value 490, 576
M
mA Output Failsafe 472
MAG2 Series Transmitter
Calibration 99
Device Overview 89
Device Status 98
Process Variables 90
Setup 90
troubleshooting 101
Magnetic Flow Transmitters 89
Mains Filter 623
Manual 132, 237
Mass Flow 91
Meas Range 142, 246, 346
Measure Value 597
Measurement Stability 147, 255, 356
Measuring Mode 643
Min 637
Min Max Values 600
Model Code Description 28
N
Number 646

664

Index

IndexMI 020-520 – January 2014

O
Open Tank 507
Order 651
Out Of Range Category 643
Output Current 643
P
Passcode 108, 216, 320
Passcode Access 129
Physical Signaling Code 446
Polling Address 2
Polynomial 629
Preamp 142
Preamp Limit 128
Pre-Configuration File 464
Process Variables 621
84 8
I/A Series Pressure 412, 439
IMT25 and IMT96 72
MAG2 Series 90, 173
Pulse Trim 100
PV 622, 623
PV Sensor Serial Number 445
PV% of Range 621
R
Reference 3, 626
Reference Junction Preset Value 627
Remedy Information 656
Remote 139
Remote Timeout 123, 234, 342
Reset Corrects 432
Restore Configuration 130, 252
Restore Factory Settings 434
RTD Strategy Flow and Density 564
RTD Temperature 479, 502
S
Scaled DAC Trim 489, 575
Scan Data 125, 236, 343
Scan Time 125, 236, 343
Scheduled 132, 237
Scratch Pad 5
Self Test 26
Sensor 218, 622, 626
Sensor 1 Linearization 628
665

MI 020-520 – January 2014

Sensor 1 Trimming 627
Sensor 2 Trimming 633
Sensor Temperature 498
Service Hold 133, 238
Set LRV 424
Setup
84 12
I/A Series Pressure 414
IMT25 and IMT96 76
MAG2 Series Transmitter 90
Shorted Sensor Value 600
Signal 422
Signal Condition 422
Signaled 132, 237
Signaled Hold Mode 126
Signals 422
Simulation 660
Simulation Mode 425
Slope 109
Slope Error 112
Slope Limit 128
Span Value 423
Specific Gravity 523
Status 431
Status Record 431
Steam 548
Store to Device
84 28
Strategy Default 564
SV Offset 442
T
Tag Name 108
Tank Dimensional Units 475
Temperature 480
Temperature Compensation 115
Temperature Mode 220
Temperature Stability 147, 255, 356
Trending 5
Trimming 627
Trip State 133, 238
Troubleshooting
84 26
I/A Series Pressure 418, 434, 446
IMT25 and IMT96 87
MAG2 Series Transmitter 101

666

Index

IndexMI 020-520 – January 2014

U
Units Description 27
Universal Revision 446
W
Write Protect 604
Write Protect Mode 484
Z
Zero Trim 431
Zero Value 423667

MI 020-520 – January 2014

ISSUE DATESOCT 2007
APR 2008
DEC 2008
MAR 2009
DEC 2009
APR 2010
JAN 2011
JUL 2011
DEC 2011
JAN 2012
MAR 2012
MAY 2012
OCT 2012
NOV 2012

Index

DEC 2012
JUN 2013
JUL 2013
JAN 2014

Vertical lines to the right of text or illustrations indicate areas changed at last issue date.
Invensys
10900 Equity Drive
Houston, TX 77041
United States of America
http://www.invensys.com

Global Customer Support
Inside U.S.: 1-866-746-6477
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact
your local Invensys representative.
Website: http://support.ips.invensys.com

Invensys, Foxboro, and I/A Series are trademarks ofInvensys plc, its subsidiaries, and affiliates.
All other brand names may be trademarks of theirrespective owners.

Copyright 1999-2014 Invensys Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved
MB 1000114